P_Link I - Install&Service_manual

INSTALLATION/SERVICE MANUAL

PrintlinkKonica Print Management System Printlink

CODE NOIV : 0296ID : 0297HG: 0298DV : 0299IN : 0306OD: 0307

Blank page

Preface

Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual Ver.1.0 2000.12

Printlink accumulates image data obtained from devices required for diagnostics such as CT, MRI, DSA, ultrasonic, and

nuclear medical science, and outputs the image data to the laser imager.

This service manual describes how Printlink can be used safely and accurately by the user.

This product is fully compliant with the applied electrical device EMC standards "IEC 60601-1-2 (1993 version)".

Features1. Backs up the laser imager2. Expands multi-modality3. Expands the connected imager4. Compact controllers5. Large image memory capacity6. Interrupts or prioritizes printing upon emergency7. Interpolation process of the image suitable per modality8. Sets LUT per modality9. Prints time and date per modality

10. Invokes and prints a printed page image11. Erases a page, erases individual frames, and overwrites 12. Sets print conditions per modality13. Prints by rotating 90 degrees per format14. Produces slide size15. Mixes format16. Toshiba Ethernet input and DICOM input/output

Precautions on Service and Installment of Printlink


Before servicing and installing the Printlink, read the following items and understand them well.

1. Precautions upon servicing Printlink(1) To prevent any accidents, do not service the Printlink unless properly trained and authorized by the manufacturer.

(2) When approaching drive parts such as a fan, be careful not to get a part of your body or clothes caught in them.

(3) Electrostatic charge may cause damage to the electronic circuits of the Printlink. Be cautious when handling the main

unit or other electronic parts removed during service operation. Use a grounding strap whenever handling the circuit

board.

(4) Make sure that the main power is turned off whenever the electric board, connectors, or cables are pulled out from or

attached to the unit. It is strictly prohibited to do any engineering work without the main power being turned off.

Doing so may cause serious injury.

(5) To operate or adjust the Printlink in any way other than instructed by this manual may cause exposure to harmful radi-

ation, and is strictly prohibited.

(6) Work properly and safely according to the Caution Labels.

(7) The Printlink incorporates a lithium battery. Improper replacement of the battery may cause damage. Only a techni-

cal service engineer is allowed to replace it.

(8) Do not remove the covers unless properly trained and authorized by the manufacturer.

2. Precautions against electric shock(1) Precautions against high voltage

High voltage is supplied to the device with this system. Observe the following precautions in order to prevent the risk

of electric shock.

• The risk of electric shock exists when touching the high voltage section of the device cover by hand.

(2) Precautions against supplied voltage

The supplied voltage of the devices configuring this system is 100VAC. Observe the following precautions in order

to prevent the risk of electric shock.

• Install the devices in a location where it is not exposed to water.

• Confirm that the ground wires are connect securely.

• Confirm that all cables are connected properly with no damages.

3. Precautions upon installing Printlink(1) Install the system in a location where it is not exposed to water.

(2) Install the system in a location where there is no likelihood of it being adversely affected by atmospheric pressure,

temperature, humidity, drafts, direct sunlight, dust, or air containing salt or sulfur, etc.

(3) Install the system in a stable environment. Do not install it on an inclined surface or a location that can be easily

affected by vibration or shock

(4) Do not install the system in a location where chemical agents are stored or where chemical gases may generate.

(5) Check the voltage and frequency of the power source and be sure they match those indicated in the specification.

(6) The capacity of the outlet should be more than sufficient for the consumed power.

(7) The power cable and communication cable must be connected in order to operate the Printlink system. Connect the

cables properly and set them clear from the path so that no one will stumble and disconnect the cables.

(8) Connect the power cable securely to an outlet that has a ground terminal. If a ground terminal does not exist on the

outlet, add one on and connect it securely.

(9) Printlink is equipped with vents to draw in and exhaust air in order to prevent internal temperature from rising. Please

be sure that these vents are not blocked.

* If this page becomes dirty, rendering it illegible, please purchase (at charge) a new service manual.

Precautions Upon Installation and Usage


4. Confirmation and precautions prior to using Printlink(1) Confirm that the power cable is not damaged.

(2) Confirm that the ground terminal is grounded securely.

(3) Confirm that all cables, etc. are connected properly and securely.

(4) Confirm that there are no cracks in the controller LCD.

(5) Confirm that Printlink is operating normally and steadily.



5. Precautions upon using the controller LCD(1) Be sure to use your fingers to operate the touch panel of the LCD. If a hard and sharp object such as a pen is used, it

may scratch or crack the panel. Also, the display section is made of glass so please avoid applying strong mechani-

cal shock.

(2) If the LCD section is damaged and liquid leaks out, be careful not to contain the liquid in the mouth. If the liquid

sticks to the skin or clothes, wash it with soap immediately.

(3) Operating the system with a crack in the glass portion of the LCD is very dangerous. Do not use the system in this

condition.

6. Precautions regarding the location and method of storing Printlink for acertain length of time

(1) Turn OFF the power switch according to the specified procedure.

(2) Disconnect cables, etc. properly.

(3) Note the following points when storing Printlink.

• Store in a location where it is not exposed to water.

• Store in a location where there is no likelihood of it being adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, temperature,

humidity, drafts, direct sunlight, dust, or containing salt or sulfur, etc.

• Store in a stable environment. Do not store it on an inclined surface or a location that can be easily affected by vibra-

tion or shock.

• Do not store in a location where chemical agents are stored or where chemical gases may generate.

(4) Clean the accessories and cables and store them neatly.

(5) Clean all parts so that they can be used without any hindrance the next time.

7. Precautions upon using Printlink that was stored for a certain length oftime

(1) Confirm that the power cable is not damaged.

(2) Confirm that the ground terminals are grounded securely.

(3) Confirm that all cables, etc. are connected properly and securely.

(4) Confirm that there are no cracks in the controller LCD.

(5) Confirm that Printlink is operating normally and steadily.

(6) When using Printlink with other devices, there is a risk of inflicting danger or diagnostic errors. Therefore, operate

the system with extra care in such situations.




Precautions Upon Installation and Usage


8. Use of Ethernet TerminalThe Ethernet Terminal should be used exclusively for Ethernet connection.

Never use for Telephone connections.

9. Disposal of PrintlinkThis product is subject to industrial waste regulation. The internal lead batteries can be hazardous and must be dis-

posed of properly. Please ask an assigned waste disposer regarding the disposal of this product.


• CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY• BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED

The internal lead batteries are charged automatically after the power

supply is turned on. If the battery must be replaced, contact your

Konica representative.

CAUTION LABELS



• Caution labels imply the degree of the risk which may arise from incorrect use of this product.

• There are 3 degree of caution labels, and each is used depending on the level of risk and damage caused by incorrect

use and mishandling.

DANGER :Failure to avoid this risk implies the imminent danger level which may lead to serious injury including a

loss of life.

WARNING :Failure to avoid the risk implies the danger level which may lead to serious injury including a loss of life.

CAUTION :Failure to avoid the risk implies the danger level which may lead to moderate damage or light injury. Also

it is used when only a damage to property is expected.

NOTE : Serious injury means a loss of eyesight,burns(high or low temperature),electric shock, fracture, intox-ication, which causes you an after-effect or a necessity to be hospitalized and/or hospital recupera-tion for a long period.

Damage means burns or electric shock which does not cause a necessity to be hospitalized and/orhospital recuperation for a long period.Physical damage means a damage to a kind of structure or its contents, livestock, and pets.

egamadehtfoksiR

hgiH woL

yrujniylidoB)ytreporpotegamaddna(

suoiresroefilfossoLyrujni

)suoiressiegamaD(REGNAD GNINRAW

roegamadetaredoMyrujnithgil

)thgilsiegamaD(

GNINRAWro

NOITUACNOITUAC

ylmoytreporpotegamaD NOITUAC

CAUTION LABELS



• Warning and Caution indication.

(1) Notes on Warning level is described on the label of item VI in the related pages.

(2) Notes on Caution level is described on the label of item VI in the related pages or indicated as below.

1) Warning and Caution indication

2) Symbol Mark

This product is classified as below.

Classification based on the kind of protection for the electric shock.A power supply device for commercial use outside.

Class 1 device.

Classification based on the degree of protection for the water intrusion which may lead to danger.Ordinary Device.

(Enclosed device without protection against ingress of water. IPX0)

Classification based on the degree of safety if this product is used in the environment where an inflammableanesthesia which is mixed with air or an inflammable anesthesia which is mixed with oxygen or nitrogenmonoxide is present.

This product is not suitable for use in the environment where an inflammable anesthesia which is mixed with air or

an inflammable anesthesia which is mixed with oxygen or nitrogen monoxide is present.

Classification based on the operation mode.Continuous operation.

kraM gninaeM

gninraW .deldnahsimsiecivedehtfiyrujnisuoiresroefilfossolehtseilpmisihT

noituaCsiecivedehtfienolaegamadlacisyhproyrujnithgiletaredomehtseilpmisihT

.deldnahsim

kraM gninaeM

.noituaCrogninraW;redronaronoitibihorpasetonedsihT)kraMnoitibihorP(

)kraMgninraWronoituaC(

.noitceridaroredroyroslupmocasetonedsihT)redroyroslupmoC(

CAUTION

INSTALLATION/SERVICE MANUAL Contents

Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual Ver.1.0 2000.12 1

1. Printlink Overview1.1 Features......................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................1-2

1.3 Block Diagram ..........................................................................................................................................1-3

1.4 Circuit Boards and Cables.........................................................................................................................1-5

2. Cabinet (Detaching Covers)2.1 Names of Cabinet Sections .......................................................................................................................2-1

2.2 Description of Cabinet Sections................................................................................................................2-2

2.3 Detaching Outer Cover Panels ..................................................................................................................2-4

2.4 Connecting Diagnostic Devices and Imagers............................................................................................2-5

2.5 Replacing the Battery and Fuse.................................................................................................................2-7

3. Power Unit and Internal Boards3.1 Main Board................................................................................................................................................3-1

3.2 Hard Disk ..................................................................................................................................................3-7

3.3 Diagram of Printlink Internal Connection.................................................................................................3-9

4. Setting the Imager4.1 Setting the Li-7, 7A, and 8........................................................................................................................4-1

4.2 Setting the Li-21........................................................................................................................................4-5

4.3 Setting the Li-10A.....................................................................................................................................4-8

4.4 Setting the Li-62P....................................................................................................................................4-11

4.5 Setting the DryPro...................................................................................................................................4-13

5. Setting the Network and the Internal Section of the Main Unit5.1 Setting the Network...................................................................................................................................5-2

5.2 Setting the Install PC.................................................................................................................................5-3

5.3 Setting the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway....................................................................5-4

5.4 Setting the HD Remaining Space and Log Data Mode ............................................................................5-7

6. Using the Installation Software6.1 Operating Environment .............................................................................................................................6-1

6.2 Connection.................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.3 Startup and Exit .........................................................................................................................................6-1

6.4 Functional Description ..............................................................................................................................6-1

6.5 Compatibility of the Maintenance Software ...........................................................................................6-24

6.6 Error Message..........................................................................................................................................6-25

7. Setting the Input I/F7.1 Common Items for All Input .....................................................................................................................7-1

7.2 Setting Each Input .....................................................................................................................................7-2

7.3 Setting Toshiba Ether Input .......................................................................................................................7-3

7.4 Setting the DICOM PRINT Input .............................................................................................................7-6

7.5 Setting the DICOM STORAGE Input.......................................................................................................7-8



8. Setting the Video I/F8.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................8-1

8.2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................8-1

8.3 Block Diagram ..........................................................................................................................................8-1

8.4 Description of Each Part and Its Setting ...................................................................................................8-3

8.5 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board........................................................8-12

8.6 Adjusting the Board ................................................................................................................................8-16

9. Setting the Digital I/F9.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................9-1

9.2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................9-1

9.3 Block Diagram ..........................................................................................................................................9-1

9.4 Description of Each Part and Its Setting ...................................................................................................9-2

9.5 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board..........................................................9-6

9.6 Checking the Transfer Signal of the Digital I/F........................................................................................9-9

9.7 Adjusting the Board ................................................................................................................................9-11

9.8 Setting the Memory Capacity of the Driver............................................................................................9-14

10. Setting the Digital Video I/F10.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................10-1

10.2 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................10-1

10.3 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................................10-2

10.4 Description of Each Part and Its Setting .................................................................................................10-2

10.5 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board........................................................10-9

10.6 Adjusting the Board ..............................................................................................................................10-11

11. Setting the Video HG I/F11.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................11-1

11.2 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................11-1

11.3 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................................11-1

11.4 Description of Each Part and Its Setting .................................................................................................11-2

11.5 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board......................................................11-10

11.6 Adjusting the Board ..............................................................................................................................11-15

12. Setting the Output I/F12.1 Common Items for All Output ................................................................................................................12-1

12.2 Output Settings ........................................................................................................................................12-5

12.3 HSTP Output Settings .............................................................................................................................12-6

12.4 DICOM PRINT Output Settings .............................................................................................................12-8

12.5 DICOM STORAGE Output Settings ....................................................................................................12-10


Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USA Ver. 1.1 2001.3 3

13. Additional Functions13.1 Multi-clients ............................................................................................................................................13-1

13.2 Network Controller Default Function .....................................................................................................13-4

13.3 Printlink-OD Backup...............................................................................................................................13-5

13.4 Bit Conversion.........................................................................................................................................13-7

13.5 STRETCH (Equating different image sizes in the same page) ............................................................13-13

13.6 Conversion from STORAGE to PRINT................................................................................................13-15

14. Setting the Route

15. Saving and Sending Data15.1 Saving and Sending Data ........................................................................................................................15-1

15.2 Procedures for Reinstallation ..................................................................................................................15-2

16. Controller (keypad) Settings16.1 Setting jumpers........................................................................................................................................16-1

16.2 Setting Parameters on the Maintenance Setup Screen ............................................................................16-2

16.3 Setting Parameters on the Maintenance Setup Screen of the Network Controller ...............................16-10

17. Host Controller Settings17.1 Parts Required for Installation.................................................................................................................17-1

17.2 How to Connect Cables and Set Jumpers ...............................................................................................17-2

17.3 Configuration of Host Controller ............................................................................................................17-6

17.4 Printlink Host Controller Settings ...........................................................................................................17-9

18. System Layout Example18.1 Set the Route for Input Printlink, Imager, and Filing Device.................................................................18-2

18.2 Route ID Settings ....................................................................................................................................18-7

19. Setting the Character Recognition19.1 Character Recognition.............................................................................................................................19-1

19.2 Algorithm of Character Recognition.......................................................................................................19-1

19.3 Limitations of Character Recognition .....................................................................................................19-1

19.4 Configuration of Character Recognition Install Data .............................................................................19-2

19.5 Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software Operation Description .................................................19-4

19.6 Procedure for Settings of Character Recognition .................................................................................19-12

19.7 Outline of Preliminary Research of Character Strings To Be Recognized and

Settings of Character Recognition System ..................19-13

19.8 Settings for Printlink .............................................................................................................................19-16

19.9 Settings of Environment of Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software........................................19-18

19.10 Settings of Data with Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software .................................................19-22

19.11 Returning Environment of Printlink......................................................................................................19-55

19.12 Setting and Operating Controller ..........................................................................................................19-56



20.Upgrading Printlink20.1 Printlink Software Overview...................................................................................................................20-1

20.2 Upgrading/Downgrading Printlink Software ..........................................................................................20-1

21. Error Code Table21.1 Error Code Overview ..............................................................................................................................21-1

21.2 Error Log and Event Log ........................................................................................................................21-1

21.3 Recorded Contents of Log ......................................................................................................................21-3

22. Troubleshooting22.1 Troubleshooting on Startup and Connection...........................................................................................22-1

22.2 Troubleshooting on Operations ...............................................................................................................22-1

22.3 Troubleshooting on Image Quality..........................................................................................................22-2

22.4 Using Backup Imager..............................................................................................................................22-2

22.5 Others ......................................................................................................................................................22-2

Appendix

Blank page

Blank page

1. Printlink Overview

Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual Ver.1.0 2000.12 1-1

1.1 FeaturesIn the Printlink System, image data is accumulated by Printlink-IV, ID, DV, HG, or IN which is connected to a diagnostic device and

is transferred directly to the imager or filing system via the network. For imagers which have no network I/F, data is transferred via

Printlink-OD using a digital I/F.

Printlink-IV, ID, DV, HG can transfer images to a maximum of 8 imagers, filing systems, or Printlink-ODs. The transfer of images to

Printlink-OD is made by using the controller which comes with Printlink-OD.

With Printlink-OD, a maximum of 16CH of Printlink input can be connected.

Furthermore, with Printlink-IN, a maximum of 8 imagers, filing systems, or diagnostic devices can be connected for input and output

combined.

NetworkPrintlink

ControllerPrintlink

-IV

Printlink-OD

Printlink-OD

Printlink-ID

Printlink-DV

Printlink-HG

Printlink-IN

PrintlinkNetwork Controller


ImagerController

Imager 1

Imager 2

Imager 3

ImagerController

Filing System

PrintlinkController

PrintlinkController

PrintlinkController


Diagnostic Device 1

Diagnostic Device 2

Diagnostic Device 3

Diagnostic Device 4

Diagnostic Device 5

Diagnostic Device 16

Fig. 1.1 Printlink System


Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual Ver.1.0 2000.121-2

1.2 SpecificationsModel Name : Printlink

Imager Connection : Li-21, Li-7, Li-7A, Li-8, Li-10A, Li-1417D, Li-1417DH, Li-62P, DRYPRO722

Interface : Video / Digital / High-Speed Video / Digital Video / Network

Image Memory Capacity : 4GB / 8GB

Multi-Modalities : Expandable with additional Printlink

Format : 1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 16, 20, 24, 25, 30, 35, 36, 42, 48, and mixed format. (Some formats can-

not be performed depending on the connected imager, the number of pixel data, or the film

size.)

Test Pattern : Built in with SMPTE pattern.

Interpolation Process : Capable

Image Rotation : 90 degree rotation

Exposure Condition : Capable of setting 8 channels for contrast, density, image frame and its polarity, interpolation,

format, and border.

Border Process : Selectable between black and transparent.

Image Frame Setting : Selectable between frame and frameless image.

Negative/Positive Inversion : Function exists for inverting negative and positive images.

Erasing Memory : Memory can be erased per frame at random or for one entire page.

Random Exposure : Capable

Host Control : Connectable depending on the device.

Character Input Function : Date, messages, etc. can be printed in margins.

Copy Function : Up to 99 copies of original data.

Controller : LCD with backlight.

Outer Dimensions : Width 210mm x Depth 480mm x Height 450mm

Weight : Approx. 15kg

Power Source : 100V AC+-10%, 50/60Hz

Power Consumption of Main Unit : 100W

Operating Environment : 15 to 30˚C, 30 to 75% RH (with no condensation)

Storage Environment : -10 to 50˚C, 10 to 85% RH (with no condensation)

Magnetic Resistance : 0.5mT or less

Heat Generation : 100W/h

Options : Various host controls, local switches, coaxial interface cable, hub, card reader.

* Please acknowledge that the above specifications may change without prior notice.



1.3 Block Diagram1.3.1 Configuration• Main board

• PCI Back Plane

• I/F

Video IF (60MHz)

Video IF-HG (130MHz)

Digital Video IF

Digital Input IF

Digital Output IF

• Hard Disk Drive (HDD)

• Controller

• LAN Card

• Power Unit

1.3.2 Block diagram of the entire system

PCI Bus

Input I/F

HDD4GB/8GB

IDE

Controller

Diagnostic Device

Serial

PowerUnit

LAN Card

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Power Source100VAC

Memory 32MBx2

Fig. 1.2 Printlink-IV, -ID, -HG, -DV Block Diagram



PCI BusHDD

4GB/8GB

IDE

Serial

PowerUnit

LAN Card

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Power Source100VAC

Memory32MBx2Network

Controller

Fig. 1.3 Printlink-IN Block Diagram

Fig. 1.4 Printlink-OD Block Diagram

PCI Bus

Output IF

HDD4GB/8GB

IDE

Serial

PowerUnit

LAN Card

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Power Source100VAC

Memory32MBx4

NetworkController

Imager

ImagerController



1.4 Circuit Boards and CablesMain Board Model No. ADP-202-10

Video I/F Part No. 029620000A

Video I/F HG Part No. 029830000A

Digital I/F Input Part No. 029730000A

Digital I/F Output Part No. 030730000A (Board No. 029730000A)

Digital Video I/F Part No. 029930000A

LAN Card Part No. Ether Express Pro 100 plus

Main Memory Board Model No. ADP-169

HDD Model No. WDAC24300

Controller Part No. 029620000A

Network Controller Part No. 030620000A

Internal Cable D37IN Part No. 012585000A

Internal Cable D37OUT Part No. 016285000A

Internal Cable 12bit Part No. 0309WD000A

Printlink-Imager Cable Part No. 0431WD000A

The LAN Card and HDD change from the following models:

PRINTLINK-IV 02960265 or later

PRINTLINK-ID 02970241 or later

PRINTLINK-IN 03060147 or later

PRINTLINK-OD 03070201 or later

PRINTLINK-HG 02980056 or later

PRINTLINK-DV 02990051 or later

LAN Card Part No. LA100-PCI-T V3

HDD Model No. ST38421A

Blank page

2. Cabinet (Detaching Covers)


2.1 Names of Cabinet Sections

Fig. 2.1 Front Panel (1) Fig. 2.2 Front Panel (2)

Fig. 2.3 Rear Panel

RESET E_STOP

(1) Ventilation Slot (3) E_STOP Button

RESET E_STOP

(4) Front Cover

(2) RESET Button

(6) Cooling Fan

(8) Host Controller Output Terminal

(10) Ethernet Terminal

(13) Rubber Support

(12) Production No.

(11) Digital Input Terminal / Video Input Terminal* The terminal changes depending on the board.

(9) Printlink Controller Input Terminal

(7) AC Input Terminal

(5) Breaker Switch for Power Source



Fig. 2.4 Top Panel

2.2 Description of Cabinet Sections(1) Ventilation Slot

This slot absorbs outside air which cools the inside of Printlink. The air is exhausted through the cooling fan.

(2) RESET Button

To reset Printlink. * In principle, this button should not be used.

(3) E_STOP Button

To shut down Printlink forcefully. * In principle, this button should not be used.

(4) Front Cover

Cover for the control section of the main unit. It slides up and down.

(5) Breaker Switch for the Power Source

Main power switch.

(6) Cooling Fan

To cool the inside of Printlink. It also serves as an outlet vent.

(7) AC Input Terminal

Input terminal for AC power.

(8) Host Controller Output Terminal

Host controller output terminal to control the output destination. This terminal connects to the host controller terminal of the

controller.

(9) Printlink Controller Input Terminal

Terminal to connect the controller cable.

(10) Ethernet Terminal

Terminal to connect Ethernet.

(11) Digital Input Terminal / Video Input Terminal

This terminal becomes a digital input terminal when the board is set to digital, and a video input terminal when set to video.

POW

ERHD

DST

ATUS

(14) READY Switch

(15) Power LED

(16) HDD LED

(17) Status LED



(12) Production No.

Production No. of Printlink.

(13) Rubber Support

To stabilize the Printlink body.

(14) READY Switch

A single press turns the power ON, lights the Power LED, and starts up Printlink. The green lamp goes ON during operation.

Furthermore, Printlink shuts down when the switch is pressed until the Status LED starts to blink.

(15) Power LED

The green lamp goes ON during Printlink operation.

(16) HDD LED

Indicates the status of the Printlink hard disk. The green lamp indicates that it is now writing on the hard disk.

(17) Status LED

The orange lamp blinks when Printlink is shutting down.



2.3 Detaching Outer Cover Panels2.3.1 Left side-panelRemove the 3 screws (b) on the rear side of the cabinet which secure the side cover as shown in the figure below. Slide it towards the

direction of the arrow (1), then pull it up to direction (2) to free and detach the cover panel from the main unit.

* Detach the right cover panel in the same procedure.

Fig. 2.5 Side Panel

2.3.2 Front panelRemove the screw (a) as shown in the above Fig. 2.5. Hold portion (c) located at the bottom of the front panel, pull towards direction

(3) and detach the panel.

* Be sure to detach both side panels before detaching the front panel in order to avoid damage to the unit.

Fig. 2.6 Front Panel

(2)

(1)

b

aPart which hooks on to the main unit

(3)

c



Host Control Output Terminal

Ethernet Terminal

Video Input Terminal, Digital Input Terminal, Video HG Input Terminal, Digital Video Input Terminal* The terminal changes depending on the board.

Printlink Controller Input Terminal

2.4 Connecting Diagnostic Devices and ImagersWhen attaching cables or connectors, be sure to disconnect the power cable from the power outlet to prevent electrical shock.

Fig. 2-7 Rear Panel

2.4.1 Connecting a diagnostic device (video input)1. Connect a BNC cable for video signal from the diagnostic device to the "Video Input Terminal".

2. Connect a controller cable from the Printlink controller to the "Printlink Controller Input Terminal".

3. Connect 10Base-T or 100Base-TX to the "Ethernet Terminal".

2.4.2 Connecting a diagnostic device (digital input)1. Connect a digital signal cable D-sub37Pin from the diagnostic device to the "Digital Input Terminal".



2.4.3 Connecting a diagnostic device (video HG input)1. Connect a BNC cable for video signal from the diagnostic device to the "Video HG Input Terminal".



2.4.4 Connecting a diagnostic device (digital video input)1. Connect a digital video cable attached with the diagnostic device and Printlink to the "Digital Video Input Terminal". The cable

is 2 meters in length.





Attach this connector to the digital I/F board.

Attach this 12bit connector to the rear side of Printlink.

2.4.5 Connecting an imager (digital output)1. Connect a digital signal cable D-Sub37Pin to the "Digital Output Terminal", then connect the other end to the digital signal

input terminal of the imager.

If the connection to the imager is made in 12bit, exchange the internal cable linked to the digital I/F board to a 12bit cable as

shown in Fig. 2.8, and connect a digital signal cable D-sub50Pin to the "Digital Output Terminal".

* The same procedure is required for Digital Input.

Fig. 2.8 Internal Cable Connection

2. Connect the imager host controller to the "Host Control Output Terminal" using the PL imager cable (optionally available).


Remarks: Ethernet Connection

Connect the main Printlink unit to a maintenance PC via ISDN or ISDN Router for remote maintenance.



DC32V/10A

Battery

Fuse

Connector (1)

Connector (2)

Connector (3)

Connector (4)Clasp

Pull out this cable

Fuse CoverFuse

2.5 Replacing the Battery and FuseThe back-up battery (lead battery) used with this device is designated as industrial waste. Disposal of

the battery must comply with the waste-disposal regulations.

Also, extreme caution is required during maintenance to prevent electrical shock.

Fig. 2.9 Battery Connection

1. Turn OFF the breaker switch for the power source located at the rear side of the main Printlink unit, then disconnect the power

cable from the outlet.

Note: Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the outlet to prevent electrical shock.

2. Detach both side cover panels from the main Printlink unit, then detach the front cover panel. (Refer to Section 2.3.)

3. Pull out the wiring cable for the battery located at the upper section of Printlink as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 2.10 Cable Wiring

4. Remove the fuse cover as shown below, then remove the fuse.

5. Pull out Connectors (1) to (4) connected to the battery as shown in the figure below. Please note which cable connects to which

connector so that they can be properly reconnected.

Fig. 2.12 Plugging Connectors

Fig. 2.11 Replacing the Fuse



6. After releasing the clasp which secures the battery to the main unit, remove the old battery and replace it with a new one.

7. Reattach the clasp and screw, then attach the connectors removed in Step 5 to their original positions. Be careful not to make

a connection error, as it may lead to a short circuit.

* Follow Step (1) to (3) for replacing a fuse. A spare fuse can be found on the clasp that secures the battery.

Blank page

Blank page

3. Power Unit and Internal Boards


3.1 Main Board3.1.1 SpecificationsModel No. ADP-202-10

CPU Pentium MMX 200MHz (P55TM)

CHIPSET Triton430HX

L2 Cache 512KB PB-SRAM

BIOS Phoenix (Plug-and-Play compatible)

BIOS ROM 256KB FLASH ROM

Main Memory Max. 256MB

Parity Check Parity/ECC

No. of DIMM SLOT 4 Slots

PCI Bus PCI 2.1 compatible

HDD Interface PCI Bus Master E-IDE

FDD Interface AT standard

Parallel Port 1xLPT (EPP/ECP)

Serial Port 2xCPM (RS232C compatible)

Key Interface PS/2-type (8042-equivalent)

Mouse Interface PS/2-type (8042-equivalent)

VGA CHIP F65550

VGA Bus Interface PCI Bus

VGA Interface Analogue CRT&LCD panels

VRAM Memory 2MB

Watchdog 2sec. / 3 to 30sec. / 1min. / 2 to 30min.

Temperature Sensor Installed



3.1.2 Block diagram

Fig. 3.1 Block Diagram of the Main Board

Pentium Processor

Host Bus

L2Cache TXC

DIMM

ISA+PCIPCI Bus

ISA Bus

VRAM

VGAPLL×3

COM2COM1LPTFDDLCDCRTSecondary IDEPrimary IDE

USB

VRAM

SuperI/O

K/B

P/D



3.1.3 Description of each part(1) External view

Fig. 3.2 External View of the Main Board (Parts side)

Fig. 3.3 External View of the Main Board (Soldered side)

Socket7

1 2

JP1

3

JP2 JP3

JP4



Fig. 3.4 Example of Adding Memory

* When adding only one pair of DIMM modules, either the Pair 1 or Pair 2 position can be used.

(2) Adding memoryThe system memory of the main board can be increased up to 256MB by using 72pin DIMM socket compatible memory.

Please note the following instructions when adding memory to the DIMM socket.

• Use DIMM modules in which access time is 60ns or 70ns with +5V single power supply.

• Use DIMM modules with the same capacity in pairs (refer to the figure below).

• Adjust and insert pin No. 1 of the DIMM module to pin No. 1 of the DIMM socket.

• A DIMM module either with or without a parity can be used.

Socket7

Pair 1

CN13,CN14 CN15,CN16

Pair 2

1Pin side of DIMM socket



Fig. 3.5 Position of IDE Connector

3.1.4 Cautions upon detaching an IDE connectorPlease note the following instructions when detaching or reattaching an IDE connector from/to the main board:

• Begin work after removing the main board from the main Printlink unit.

• Be careful when handling the connector as the IDE connector pins are susceptible to damage.

IDE Connector



3.1.5 Dealing with problems(1) Printlink controller does not start up.

(2) Access cannot be made through the I/F.

(3) Access cannot be made to the hard disk.

Procedures for checking:

1. Check the controller. (Refer to Section 16.) If all controllers are in the same condition, check the main board.

2. Check each I/F. (Refer to Section 7. to 11.) If access cannot be made to each I/F board, check the main board.

3. Check the HDD LED on the front panel.

If normal, reinstall.

If abnormal, perform the following:

• Turn the power OFF, then turn it ON again.

• Check the connectors.

• Check the operation of the hard disk.

• Check the power source.

• Reinstall.

If the problem is not solved, replace the circuit board or the hard disk.



3.2 Hard Disk3.2.1 Specifications(1) WDAC24300

Physical Specifications AC24300

Formatted Capacity 4311MB

Interface 40-pin E-IDE

(2) ST38421APhysical Specifications

Formatted Capacity 8.4GB

Interface 40-pin E-IDE

* Image data, OS (Windows NT) for Printlink, and the main program for Printlink are stored in the hard disk.

Therefore, the Printlink system may not start up if there is a problem in the hard disk.

3.2.2 Description of each partFor the external view and the position of the jumper, refer to Sections 3.2.3 and 3.2.4.

3.2.3 Setting(1) Description of the Jumper

View from the top of the jumper pins with the surface of the HDD board faced upwards.

Fig. 3.6 Jumper Diagram (Factory default)

* Factory default setting does not have to be changed, so please be sure that the jumper is set as shown in the

above figure.

40pinCONN

POWER

13579

246810



Fig. 3.7 External View of the Hard Disk

3.2.4 Checking the operationOperation is checked in the following methods:

• Turn ON the power, and check if the HDD LED goes on when access is made to the hard disk.

• The operating system does not start up normally when there is a problem in the hard disk. (This cannot be confirmed without a

monitor.) A software which controls Printlink and the OS for the main board is stored in the hard disk. Therefore, if there is a mal-

function in the hard disk, the system will not start up.

* Other than a malfunction in the hard disk, connectors or the power source can also be the problem.



3.3 Diagram of Printlink Internal Connection

FAN1

FAN2

12

123456789

101112

+5VHDD_STATUS

STATUSOPTION1OPTION2

SP+SP–

POWER_SWRESET_SW

POWER-OFF_SWOPTION_SW

GND

123456789101112

+5VCN13

N–H2085

N–H2015

N–Z1963

N–Z1963

HDD_STATUSSTATUSOPTION1

123

+12V

SBC SLOT

PCI SLOT#1

PCI SLOT#2

PCI SLOT#3 P7

P8

P3

P4

HDD

P5

25PN–H2118–2

SA–4616–10

P6

P9

PCI SLOT#4

PCI SLOT#1

PCI SLOT#2

PCI SLOT#3

PCI SLOT#4

PCI SLOT#5

CN1 CN2 CN8

CN11

N–H2141

CN13,14

CN5

FAN SENSORGND

N–H2015123

+12VCN6

FAN SENSORGND

OPTION2SP+SP–POWER_SWRESET_SWPOWER_OFF_SWOPTION_SWGND

RESET

SC–4576–10

PANEL BOARDSB–4576–100

RESET GND

Batt +VEBatt

Batt –VE

12

RESETE.STOP GND

Red

Black

Black

Red

P132V DC/20A

N–H2134PX1202GF1×2

YellowRed

Black

BrownRedOrangeYellowGreenBluePurpleGrayWhiteBlackBrownRed

123456789

1011121314151617181920

+3.3V+3.3V

P1

COM+5V

COM+5V

COMP.G

+5VS+12V+3.3V–12V

+5V+5V–5V

COMCOMCOM

COMON/OFF

123456789

1011121314151617181920

+3.3V+3.3V

CN5

COM+5VCOM+5VCOMP.G+5VS+12V+3.3V–12V

+5V+5V–5VCOMCOMCOM

COMON/OFF

SC–4576–10

POWER UNITNSP2–180–H2X

BACK PLANE BOARDADP–299HFPP–514P–B/B

CPU BOARDADP–202–10

90-253V AC 50/60Hz3P INLET CONNECTOR

BrownRedOrangeYellowGreenRed

123123

GNDSHUT_DOWN

P12

AC_FALL

GNDSHUT_DOWNAC_FALL

BATT LOWBATT CHECKPOWER FAN

123456

CN17

BATT LOWBATT CHECKPOWER FAN

BlackYellowBlueWhiteOrangePurple

1234

+12GNDGND+5V

YellowBlackBlackRed

1234

+12GNDGND+5V

YellowBlackBlackRed

1234

+12GNDGND+5V

YellowBlackBlackRed

BlackOrangeYellowYellowBrownBlueBlackPurpleBlackBlackBlackWhiteRedRed

RedYellowBlack

RedYellowBlack

RedYellowBlack

Batt– + +–

Batt– +

PAT–13132 MB

LAN CARDETHER EXPRESS PRO/+

Blank page

4. Setting the Imager


The purpose of modifying the settings on the imager side is to enable the imager to receive all image data output from

Printlink-OD. The settings can be changed to receive not only the maximum image data output from Printlink, but also data

in which the image size differs among each page. Check the version of the main unit ROM on the imager side, and if a

non-designated version is installed, please be sure to change the ROM.

As for the controller, set it according to the table below. For items that are not listed in the table, please leave them as they

are.

4.1 Setting the Li-7, 7A, and 8Confirm that the Li-7, 7A, and 8 main unit ROM versions are the ones listed in the table or later versions. If not, it is necessary to

change the Li-7 main unit ROM.

Table 4.1 Version Required for Li-7 to Connect with Printlink

* ROM other than the ones indicated above (AFCONT, IFU17, IFU27) do not have to be changed.*1 Channels which are not connected to the diagnostic device via Printlink must also be changed. Furthermore, the 3rd channel (both

internal and external) must be changed.*2 Only the channels connected to Printlink must be changed.*3 Upwardly compatible with V1.21. (An option must be added during start-up.)

ROM Type

MAIN

TRN17

MDL*1

DIGIF*1

MIU-Li7A Host I/F*2

MIU-Li7 Host I/F*2

Maintenance Software*3

Version Required for Printlink Connection

V1.30

V1.30

V1.30

V1.31

V1.02

V1.00

V1.30



4.1.1 Setting the controller(1) Setting the Li-7

1. Disconnect the 1st jumper (JP1) in the controller of Li-7, then start up Li-7.

2. Set the controller according to Table 4.2, then touch [Print] to secure the setting.

3. Turn OFF the power, return the controller jumper to the original position, then turn the power ON again.

4. After Li-7 is restarted, touch [Shift] + [Mode] to display the Setup Screen, and set according to Table 4.3.

* Restarting the device is not required after the setting has been completed.

KEYPAD SETUP

GENERAL SETUP

MODALITY SETUP

HOST SETUP

HOST TYPE SETUP

KONICA SETUP1

Initial

ENQ/ACK

Change Film Size

Maximum smooth

Maximum sorter

Baudrate

Stop bits

Data bits

Parity

Baudrate

Stop bits

Data bits

Parity

Security

Delay

Li-7

Yes

Yes

4

4

9600

1

8

Even

9600

1

8

Even

MIU

1

0

SEARCH CONDITION

SETUP

Range

Rotate

MIX

Host

On

On

On

On

Table 4.3 Setup for Li-7 Controller

Table 4.2 Setup for Li-7 Host Control



(2) Setting the Li-7A / 81. The maintenance setup screen can be displayed after the Li-7A/8 has been activated. (The Maintenance screen will appear

by pressing the upper left and bottom left portions of the Setup screen simultaneously for over 1 second.)

2. Set the controller according to Table 4.4. When the setting has been completed, touch [OK] located at the upper right por-

tion of the screen to secure the setting, and allow you to use the controller under the new setting when the initial screen

reappears. If there are still items that must be set, use the arrow key to switch the screen, and continue the setting. The set-

ting will be secured by touching the arrow key.

3. After setting each parameter, move to Setup Screen 2/2, and set the controller according to Table 4.5.

Table 4.4 Setup for Li-7A/8 Host Control

Table 4.5 Setup for Li-7A/8 Controller

INSTALL SETUP

HOST TYPE SETUP

HOST SETUP

MAXIMUM SORTER

LOCAL SWITCH

SLIDE

SECURITY

DELAY

OPTIMIZE

4

OFF

OFF

MIU

1

0

OFF

SETUP 2/2 HOST CONTROL ON



4.1.2 Setting the digital I/F and the main unit(1) Setting the digital I/F

It is required to set the Li-7/7A/8 so that the digital I/F will receive all image data (size) output from Printlink.

1. Search for a modality which holds the maximum image size within the modalities input in Printlink.

2. Add enough memory so that the maximum image size found in Step 1 can be received.

The following standards are used to judge whether the image size can be received by Li-7/7A/8.

• (Image size x Maximum number of frames that can be set) > Memory capacity installed in the I/F

If the actual situation fits the above formula, memory needs to be added.

e.g.) When the memory capacity of Li-7/7A/8 digital I/F is 16MB:

• 1280 x 1024, 15 frames –> 18.75MB is required –> Memory must be added.

• 1024 x 1024, 15 frames –> 15MB is required –> Memory does not have to be added.

(2) Changing the settings using the maintenance softwareVarious image data sizes can be received by the digital I/F by recognizing the image size from the header information of the

digital signal.

1. Start up the Li-7/7A/8 maintenance software, and display the I/F DATA screen. Set the "SIZE_MODE" of the channel con-

necting Printlink to "VAR" (variable size mode), then send the setting to Li-7/7A/8.

2. Send the modified data to Li-7/7A/8 to execute "DATA SET".



4.2 Setting the Li-21Confirm that the Li-21 main unit ROM version is the one listed in the table or later versions. If not, it is necessary to change the Li-

21 main unit ROM.

Table 4.6 Version Required for Li-21 to Connect with Printlink

ROM Type

Device (211)

Print (212)

File (214)

Digital (219)*1

Video (216) *1

DMU Control Kit Li-21 (507) *2

Software to Create Video File

Software to Create Format File

Installation Software

Version Required to Connect with Printlink

V6.0125

V4.1116

V5.1205

V5.1116

V5.1116

V5.1109

MKVF6

MKFF12

V1.9

*1 Channels which are not connected to the diagnostic device via Printlink must also be changed.

*2 Only the channels connected to Printlink must be changed.



4.2.1 Setting the controller(1) Setting

1. Start up Li-21 by setting DIP switch 1 and 2 in the Li-21 controller to ON.

2. Set the controller according to Table 4.7.

3. Turn the power OFF temporarily, return the DIP switch to its original position, then turn the power ON again.

4. After Li-7 is restarted, touch [Shift] + [Mode] to display the Setup Screen, and set the controller according to Table 4.8.


Table 4.7 Setup for Li-21 Host Control

Table 4.8 Setup for Li-21 Controller

KEYPAD SETUP

GENERAL SETUP

HOST TYPE SETUP

MODALITY SETUP

HOST SETUP 1

HOST SETUP 2

HOST SETUP 3

Local Switch

Erase Dir.

MD timeout

Supply counter

Change Film Size

Change supply

Lut calibration

Maximum smooth

Maximum sorter

Baudrate

Stop bits

Data bits

Parity

Error Logoff Fake

Toggle RR after BK

Error Type

Magazine error fatal

Version number

Film size report

Smooth

Medium Smooth

Den+Con+LUT

Use Async

Error on Store

Error Clear

NO

Last

Init

NO

Yes

Yes

Yes

7

No. of supply unit

Konica

9600

1

8

Even

NO

NO

KC

Yes

2.0

Def

7

7

Use

Yes

Def

Yes

SEARCH CONDITION

SETUP

Range

Rotate

MIX

Host

On

On

On

On



4.2.2 Setting the digital I/F and main unit(1) Setting the digital I/F

Li-21 needs to be set so that the digital I/F will receive all image data (size) output from Printlink.


2. If the maximum image size in Step 1 is 2K x 2K or larger, change the setting so that it can receive that size.

(Corresponding to special sizes.)

If there is a 5M (2K x 2.5K) size image data input in Printlink, the setting needs to be changed.

3. Turn ON the 7th switch of DIP Switch 2, and change the setting so that the digital I/F can receive various image data sizes

by recognizing the image size from the header information of the digital signal.

(2) Changing the setting using the maintenance softwareChange the set data so that the maximum image size in Step 1 in the above section can be received.

1. Calculation: (Max. image size) ÷ (640 x 512)

Round up the solution to the tenth.

(e.g.) "2.31" is rounded up to "2.4".

2. Start up MKFF12 to create a format file.

Assuming that the solution in Step 1 is "4.0", start up MKFF12 as MKFF12/d4.0/1/f5 (return).

d: "?" time(s) of the set memory size secured.

Enter the solution in Step 1. Be sure to enter up to the tenth (e.g. 4.0) even for integers.

1: This indicates Li-21.

f: Film size.

3. Create a format film by setting the H size, V size to 640, 512 respectively, and by setting the format to "0".

4. Start up MKVF6 to create a video film.

Start up MKVF6 as MKVF6 (return).

Create a video file by entering "Digital:1", "h size:640", "v size:512", "h total:515 (h size+3)" and setting the store time

to 1 or above.

5. With the Li-21 maintenance software, assign the disk capacity of the channels which are not being used with Li-21, as a

result of connecting Printlink, to the channels connected to Printlink.

6. Start up the Li-21 maintenance software, and send the format file and video file set as above to the Li-21 main unit.



4.3 Setting the Li-10AUnlike Li-7, 7A, 8, Li-62P, and Li-21, Li-10A cannot receive the settings for the stamp and sorter from Printlink.

Confirm that the Li-10A main unit ROM version is the one listed in the table or later versions. If not, it is necessary to change the Li-

10A main unit ROM.

Table 4.9 Version Required for Li-10A to Connect with Printlink

* There is no need to change other ROM (device, print, file, video).

*1 Only the channels connected to Printlink must be changed.


V4.0512

V4.0125

MKVF6

MKFF12

V1.7

ROM Type

DMU Control Kit Li-10A (digital) *1

DMU Control Kit Li-10A (controller) *1

Software to Create Video File

Software to Create Format File

Installation Software




1. Turn ON one of the DIP switches in the Li-10A controller and start up Li-10A.

2. Set the controller according to Table 4.10.

3. Turn OFF the power, return the Dip switch on the controller to its original position, then turn ON the power again.

4. After start-up, touch [Shift] + [Mode] to display the Setup Screen, and set according to Table 4.11.


Table 4.10 Setup for Li-10A Host Control

KONICA SETUP 1

HOST TYPE SETUP

KEYPAD SETUP

GENERAL SETUP

MODALITY SETUP

HOST SETUP

Security

Use async.

Magazine error fatal

Initial

ENQ/ACK

Change Film Size

Maximum Smooth

Baudrate

Stop bits

Data bits

Parity

Baudrate

Stop bits

Data bits

Parity

3

Yes

Yes

Konica

Li-10A

Yes

Yes

7

9600

1

8

Even

9600

1

8

Even

Table 4.11 Setup for Li-10A Controller

SEARCH CONDITION

SETUP

Range

Rotate

MIX

Host

1-64

On

On

On



4.3.2 Setting the digital I/F and main unit(1) Setting the digital I/F

Li-10A needs to be set so that the digital I/F will receive all image data (size) output from Printlink.


2. If the maximum image size in Step 1 is 2K x 2K or larger, change the setting so that Li-10A can receive that size.

(A special order can be placed.)

If there is a 5M (2K x 2.5K) size image data input in Printlink, the setting needs to be changed.

3. Turn ON the 7th switch of DIP Switch 2, and change the setting so that the digital I/F can receive various image data sizes

by recognizing the image size from the header information of the digital signal.

(2) Changing the setting using the maintenance softwareChange the set data so that the maximum image size in Step 1 in the above section can be received.

1. Calculation: (Max. image size) ÷ (640 x 512)

Round up the solution to the tenth.

(e.g.) "2.31" is rounded up to "2.4".

2. Start up MKFF12 to create a format file.

Assuming that the solution in Step 1 is "4.0", start up MKFF12 as MKFF12/d4.0 (return).

d: "?" time(s) of the set memory size secured.

Enter the solution in Step 1. Be sure to enter up to the tenth (e.g. 4.0) even for integers.

3. Create a format film by setting the H size, V size to 640, 512 respectively, and by setting the format to "0".

4. Start up MKVF6 to create a video film.

Start up MKVF6 as MKVF6 (return).

Create a video file by entering "Digital:1", "h size:640", "v size:512", "h total:515 (h size+3)" and setting the store time

to 1 or above.

5. With the Li-10A maintenance software, assign the disk capacity of the channels which are not being used with Li-10A, as

a result of connecting Printlink, to the channels connected to Printlink.

6. Start up the Li-10A maintenance software, and send the format file and video file set as above to the Li-10A main unit.




V2.10

V1.05

V1.06

V1.05

V1.20

V1.04

V1.05

4.4 Setting the Li-62PConfirm that the Li-62P main unit ROM version is the one listed in the table or later versions. If not, it is necessary to change the main

unit ROM.

ROM Type

Main

Mechanical Control

Print

Film Processor

D I/F IN

Li-62P Host I/F Konica

Maintenance Software

Table 4.12 Version Required for Li-62P to Connect with Printlink



INSTALL SETUP

KEYPAD SETUP

ADDITION SETUP

HOST TYPE SETUP

HOST SETUP

MAXIMUM SMOOTH

MAXIMUM SORTER

MINIMUM SORTER

END FRAME BUZZER

LOCAL SW

STORE DELAY

H/V DISPLAY

CONTINUE ERR

SIGNAL

INTERVAL TIME

SECURITY

DELAY

7

4

1

NO

OFF

0

OFF

OFF

03

PRINTLINK

1

0


1. After starting up Li-62P, display the maintenance setup screen. (The Maintenance screen will appear by pressing the upper

left and bottom left portions of the Setup screen simultaneously for over 1 second.)

2. Set the controller according to Table 4.13. When the setting has been completed, touch [OK] located at the upper right por-

tion of the screen to secure the setting, and allow you to use the controller under the new setting when the initial screen

reappears. If there are still items that must be set, use the arrow key to switch the screen, and continue the setting. The set-

ting will be secured by touching the arrow key.

3. After setting each parameter, move to Setup Screen 2/3, and set the controller according to Table 4.14.

Table 4.13 Setup for Li-62P Host Control

SETUP 2/3 HOST CONTROL ON

4.4.2 Setting the digital I/F• Setting input bit length Setting by Li-62P installation software, changing internal cables.

• Setting Req to Req Digital I/F DIPSW7 off: 1/10µs

on:500µs

• Image transfer timeout Digital I/F DIPSW5 off, DIPSW6 off: 60s

DIPSW5 off, DIPSW6 on: 240s

Table 4.14 Setup for Li-62P Controller



4.5 Setting the DRYPRO722The DRYPRO722 is an imager of the DICOM input.

This section explains how to make the settings after the network is made and the IP address is obtained.

4.5.1 Setting and installing the DRYPRO722(1) Setting the DRYPRO722

a) Before installing the DRYPRO722, check its version, and always use the latest version.

Upgrade the version by following the procedures described in the "Installation Manual" and "Service Manual" for

DRYPRO722.

b) It is not necessary to make the settings in the DRYPRO722 operation panel and the circuit boards in order to connect with

the Printlink.

(2) Setting the address of the DRYPRO722a) You can check the address and net mask of the DRYPRO722 on the operation panel. From the Maintenance screen, touch

the upper left portion of the screen twice to enter the Service screen. Touch [VERSION] on Screen 2/3, then touch the

arrow key on the upper right corner of the screen to display the address and net mask of the DRYPRO722.

b) Set the address of the Install PC in the same segment as the address above.

For more detailed information on how to set the address, see Section 5.2 or later.

Select [Server Connection] from the [File] menu in the installation software of the DRYPRO722, and enter the displayed

IP address to connect the DRYPRO722.

Fig. 4.1 Server Connection Dialog Box

c) In order to display the current setting of the DRYPRO722, click [Set IP Address]. Enter the IP address and sub-net mask,

default gateway determined in the previous section, and click [OK]. The settings will be transferred to the DRYPRO722,

and they will take effect next time the DRYPRO722 starts up.

Fig. 4.2 Set IP Address Dialog Box



(3) Setting the DRYPRO722 with the installation softwarea) Select [DryPro >> PC] from [File (F)] menu to read the setting of the DRYPRO722, and make the settings so that they are

as shown in the system design example.

b) For more detailed information on how to make the settings, see the "Installation manual" for the DRYPRO722.

Please note the following:

Note: In order to set the channel to Validity, select the file name, and choose MRICT that appears in the menu with

right click of the mouse. Then, the default settings are set for the Printlink. (Select Regius when you con-

nect the Regius directly to the DRYPRO722.)

From this screen, set each parameter so that it meets the environment under the DRYPRO722 is used at each institution.

Fig. 4.3 DryPro model 722 Installation Window

Only one print service port can be set on the DRYPRO722 side. When you print, a maximum of 16 channels can

be used at the same time for the one print service port. Therefore, it is necessary to set the same Port No. on the

Printlink side that is connected to the DRYPRO722.

c) Select [Save] from [File (F)] menu to save the settings in the PC, and transfer them to the DRYPRO722.

The DRYPRO722 will automatically re-start up, and it will operate with the set parameters.

The settings of the DRYPRO722 has been completed.

Blank page

Blank page

5. Setting the Network and the Internal Section of the Main Unit


Printlink is a system that supports to multiple input modalities and output imagers. Set the entire system prior to initiating

the installation of each input I/F.

The following settings are required to set the entire system.

1. Setting the network.

2. Setting the Install PC

3. Setting the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.


Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USA Ver. 1.1 2001.35-2

5.1 Setting the NetworkDesign the system configuration and make certain that all necessary equipment for setting the network is available. Furthermore, if the

system is going to be complicated with an incorporation of a router, etc., leave such work to the person in charge.

5.1.1 Selecting the cableFor Printlink, use the (UTP) twisted pair cable (category 5) or higher. Note: Check local requirements for Phlymim cables

5.1.2 Selecting the hubs and switchesHubs and switches are required when the network is set up for the first time or when more than one device is going to be installed.

Please note the following points in such cases.

1. Capable of switching automatically between 10BASE-T and 100BASE-T

100BASET is required when the transfer speed between Printlinks is considered. Since some devices can only support

10BASET, ones that can switch automatically should be selected.

2. Open ports for future usage

It is assumed that there will be more devices to connect to the network in the future. Therefore, a hub with more than the nec-

essary number of ports at the time of purchase should be selected (including the Install / service PC - Laptop).

3. Switching function

The switching function provides many advantages. With this function, high-speed communication, reduction in network traf-

fic, as well as reduction of hub restriction within one segment becomes capable. When purchasing a new hub, please select one

which comes with a switching function.

4. Stackable hub

Hubs can be increased without decreasing ports, as hubs can be connected without using a port.

Please purchase a device which fulfills the conditions in Items 1 to 3 above. For Item 4, judge whether these conditions are necessary

per each facility.

5.1.3 Items to note for cascade connections between hubsA cross cable is used for cascade connection using a normal port. However, a straight cable can be used if a cascade exclusive port

exists. In such a case, connect one end of the cable to the cascade exclusive port, and the other end to a normal port. The exclusive

port for cascade acts as a cross converter. Be sure not to connect both ends to the cascade exclusive port.

5.1.4 Items to note when connecting hubs that do not possess a switching functionThere are limitations when making cascade connections for hubs that do not have a switching function. Only four levels for 10BASE,

and two levels for 100BASE can be connected within one segment. Please be careful when making a connection to a network inside

the hospital. Ask the hospital IS dept. for support in advance of configuring the Prinlink systems.

5.1.5 WiringWiring must be performed at each facility.


Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USA Ver.1.1 2001.3 5-3

5.2 Setting the Install PCThe following must be performed in advance to the Install PC.

• Installing a network card: 10BASE/100BASE-TX

• Installing a network protocol: TCP/IP Subnet mask: 255.255.240.0

• Setting the IP address of the Install PC to 10.32.1.100.

Fig. 5.4 Network Dialog Box

(Windows98 English Version)


(Windows98 Japanese Version)

Fig. 5.1 TCP/IP Property Dialog Box

(Windows98 Japanese Version)


(Windows98 English Version)

• Windows log onUser name:itr Password:itr

• Setting log on to [Microsoft Network Client].

TechSupport@KMI

DEFAULT Configuation IP address: 10.32.15.x where x is the last digit of s/n Host name: PLNKxxxx-TT where xxxx is the last 4 digits of s/n of box and TT is the type of box: IV, IN, ID, etc.... the subnet mask is: 255.255.240.0

TechSupport@KMI

YOU must login as the "itr" user on your laptop in order to communicate with the Printlink box properly. This is because of NT security on the Printlink box.



5.3 Setting the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway5.3.1 Obtaining an IP addressConfirm with the hospital and obtain an IP address before connecting each Printlink to the network. The default IP address is set as

10.32.15.x (x = last 1 digits of the serial number). Therefore, the IP address must be changed according to the local environment

before connections are made to the hospital network. The default Subnet Mask is 255.255.240.0

NOTE: If a device with a same IP address is connected to the network, an network error will occur and a connection will

not be able to be made.

• Confirm the IP address of the Printlink Install PC with the network manager of the hospital.

5.3.2 Setting the IP address, subnet mask, and default gatewayThe IP Address, subnet mask, and default gateway must be checked when making connections to the hospital network. (For a local

network only for Printlink, the default setting can be applied.)

• Confirm the settings for the Printlink network IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway with the hospital network manager. (In

some cases, the network is managed by the manufacturer of the diagnostic device.)

(1) Setting methodThere are 2 setting methods, with limitations according to the version.

a) Setting with tools

All versions can be set using tools.

1. Turn OFF the power by pressing the Ready switch in the front panel until the status LED starts to blink, then con-

nect the monitor, keyboard, and mouse.

NOTE: The keyboard and mouse cannot be acknowledged when connections are made with the power ON.

Furthermore, connecting peripheral devices with the power ON can damage the device, so be sure

to turn OFF the power.

Fig. 5.5 Rear Panel

Cooling fan

Host control output terminal

Ethernet terminal

Rubber support

Production No.

Digital input/output terminal, video input terminal* Changes according to the board.

Printlink controller input terminal

AC input terminal

Power breaker switch



Fig 5.9 TCP/IP Property Dialog Box

(WindowsNT English Version)


(WindowNT Japanese Version)


(WindowsNT English Version)


(WindowsNT Japanese Version)

2. Turn the power ON.

3. Click WindowsNT [Setting] and [Control Panel], then double-click [Network].

4. Select protocol, then click [Properties].

5. The screen shown in Figure 5.8 or 5.9 will appear.

6. Set the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default Gateway].

7. Click [Apply] and [OK].

8. The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway has been set.



b) Setting with an installation software

Printlink main unit V1.04 or later versions and maintenance V1.04 or later versions can be set using the installation

software. Refer to Section 20. for upgrading to Printlink main unit V1.04.)

Please confirm that Printlink and the install PC are connected to the network.

1. Start up the installation software V1.04.

2. Click [Server Connection (B)] in the [File] menu, then connect the install PC and Printlink.

3. Click [Set IP Address/Work Buffer (F)] in the [File] menu, then open the [Set IP Address/Work Buffer] dialog box,

set the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default Gateway], and click [Set].

Fig. 5.10 Set IP Address/Work Buffer Dialog Box

4. The setting will be complete by restarting Printlink after shutting it down once.

NOTE: The setting will be neglected on the Printlink side if [Subnet Mask] or [Default Gateway] is [0.0.0.0].

NOTE: Only the [IP Address] can be changed by setting [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway] using instal-

lation software V1.04 for Printlink V1.03 or earlier versions.



Fig. 5.11 Set Environment Data Dialog Box

5.4 Setting the HD Remaining Space and Log Data ModeWhen 255 pages worth of input image cannot fit into the HD, this setting defines the remaining space. When the space goes below the

set value, the oldest image will be deleted. The default value is 200MB, and if images per one frame exceeds 20MB, 300MB should

be selected.

The log data mode setting enables Printlink to save its operational records in the log. There are two modes which are the standard log

and the detail log.

For standard log, set at Event Log.

For detail log, set at Detail Log.

Blank page

6. Using the Installation Software


6.1 Operating EnvironmentTable 6.1 Operating Environment

CPU

Memory

HDD

CRT

LAN Board

OS

i486 or above

32MB or above

800MB

640 x 480 dots

Required

Windows95, 98, or Windows NT4.0

6.2 ConnectionBy connecting Printlink and the maintenance PC through ISDN line via the ISDN router, the installation software enables remote

maintenance.

The installation software has the following functions:

• Upgrading and downgrading

• Reading log data

• Reading the internal operation status

• Setting and reading the IF and network

• Setting LUT

6.3 Startup and ExitStartup method: Double-click PLNKMTN.exe.

Exit method: Click [Exit] under the [File (F)] menu in the menu bar or the close button.

6.4 Functional Description

Present status or description Present IP address or host in connection

Fig. 6.1 Printlink Maintenance Window

The following are the 5 menu items in the [Printlink Maintenance] window of the Printlink installation software.

• File (F) ... Operates Printlink environment file. (See Section 6.4.1.)

• Set (S) ... Sets Printlink. (See Section 6.4.2.)

• Watch (R) ... Monitors Printlink status. (See Section 6.4.3.)

• Tool (T) ... Starts up and exits Desktop Delivery tool. (See Section 6.4.4.)

• Help (H) ... Displays Printlink version information. (See Section 6.4.5.)



Designate a directory Display directories

Fig. 6.3 MAIN, SERVICE & DRIVER File Upgrade Dialog Box

6.4.1 File (F)The following items are in the [File (F)] menu in the menu bar.

Fig. 6.2 File (F) Menu in the Printlink Maintenance Window

• Open (O) ...

Displays the [Open Data File] dialog box to open an existing Printlink environment file.

• Close (C)

Closes a Printlink environment file without ending the application. When non-saved changes are contained, a dialog box con-

firming whether or not to save the file will appear.

• Save (S)

Saves a Printlink environment file under work in a designated location.

• Save As (A) ...

Displays the [Save Data File] dialog box that indicates the location in which the Printlink environment file will be saved and

a dialog box to input the file name.

• Main/Service Upgrade (G) ...

Displays the [MAIN,SERVICE&DRIVER File Upgrade] dialog box (Fig. 6.3) to upgrade Printlink by designating a directo-

ry of the new version file.



Designate an upgrade file(Full-pass designation)

Present version

Version 1 generation before

Version 2 generations before

• Main Downgrade (D) ...

Displays the [Exec.File Downgrade] dialog box to downgrade Printlink by selecting a version from the list box. (The version

can be downgraded back two generations.)

Fig. 6.4 Exec.File Downgrade Dialog Box

• Controller Upgrade (T) ...

Displays the [Upgrade Controller] dialog box to upgrade the controller by designating the type and upgrade file. (Controller

and Network Controller are the two controller types.)

Fig. 6.5 Upgrade Controller Dialog Box

• Read Version & Set Serial No (E) ...

Displays the [Set Serial No.] dialog box to check the serial number and version.

Fig. 6.6 Set Serial No. Dialog Box



• Server Connection (B) ...

Displays the [Change Server Connection] dialog box to set the IP address of the main Printlink unit that performs environment

setting, upgrading/downgrading, and queue monitoring. After connection is made, this will be indicated on the status bar in the

[Printlink Maintenance] window.

Fig. 6.7 Change Server Connection Dialog Box

• Set IP Address/Work Buffer (F) ...

Displays the [Set IP Address/Work Buffer] dialog box to set the work buffer size of Digital_IN, Digital_Out, Video_IN,

Digital_Video_IN, and HG_Video_IN.


• Printlink -> PC (I) ...

Sends the present environment file from Printlink to the maintenance PC.

• PC -> Printlink (P)

Sends the set environment file from the maintenance PC to Printlink.

• Ocr Printlink -> PC (M)

Sends the present mji file from Printlink to the maintenance PC.

• Ocr PC-> Printlink (N)

Sends the set mji file from the maintenance PC to Printlink.



• Read Log (L) ...

Loads the designated Printlink log to the PC.

Fig. 6.9 Output Event Log & Error Log Dialog Box

• Reboot (R)

Restarts Printlink.

NOTE: The IP address must be designated in advance.

• Exit (E)

Closes Printlink Maintenance. If changed but not-saved files are contained, a dialog box confirming whether or not to save the

file will appear.



6.4.2 Set (S)The following items are in the [Set (S)] menu in the menu bar.

Fig. 6.10 Set (S) Menu in the Printlink Maintenance Window

(1) Channel (C) ...Displays the [Set Channel Data] dialog box (Fig. 6.11) and shows a list of channel setting information.

Fig. 6.11 Set Channel Data Dialog Box

• Channel ... Displays the channel number.

• Channel/Printer Name ... Displays the set channel/printer name.

• Protocol ... Displays the set protocol.

• Stamp Message ... Displays the set stamp message.

• Imager ... Displays the set imager.

• CHANGE ... Displays the Change Channel Data dialog box.

Refer to Section a) for details.



a) Change Channel Data Dialog Box

Fig. 6.12 Change Channel Data Dialog Box

• Channel No. ... Displays the selected channel number.

• Channel/Printer Name ... Input the channel/printer name.

• Protocol Name ... Select one of the following protocols.

Not Used Toshiba IN

VIDEO IN HSTP OUT(Li-1417)

DIGITAL VIDEO IN DICOM PRINT IN

HG-VIDEO IN DICOM PRINT OUT

DIGITAL IN DICOM STORAGE IN

DIGITAL OUT DICOM STORAGE OUT

• INPUT ... Setting is possible only when the protocol is of an input attribute.

Stamp Message ... Set the default stamp message to the film.

Convert LUT ... Enable/disable LUT conversion when inputting.

OCR Study ... Enable/disable Study by character recognition.

Image Size Check ... Perform a check when the input image size within one page differs.

Rome -> KANA ... Japanese version only

OCR Study Timeout ... Input the time for Study Timeout for character recognition. This is the waiting

time for the next store during Study. Queue is registered by Timeout.

OCR Default ID ... Input the default ID of the character recognition results.

NAME ... Input the default Name of the character recognition results.

Output OCR/DICOM Stamp ... Not used.

• OUTPUT ... Setting is possible only when the protocol is of an output attribute.

Printer Name ... Input the printer name.

Connect Imager ... Set the imager name of the connected device.



Stretch Base ... Select the image size.

NoStretch : The image size is output without being changed.

PageMax : The image size is adjusted to the largest size within one film.

Install : The image size is adjusted to the size set in the input channel (same as

the test pattern size).

Stretch Mode ... Select the interpolation method.

BiLinear : For bilinear interpolation.

BiLinear+Edge : For bilinear and character enhancement interpolation.

SP-Line : For SP-line interpolation.

Film Type 1 ... Set a film type of upper tray of the output imager.

If there is only one tray in the output imager, this setting is not valid.

Film Type 2 ... Set a film type of lower tray of the output imager.

This setting is for the output imager with only one tray.

• FORMAT ... Set the output format. (Refer to b) Set Format Data dialog box.)

• ERROR CODE ... ERROR CODE (Refer to c) Set Error Code dialog box.)

For FORMAT and ERROR CODE, the setting can be performed only for the output protocol.

• SET ... Set the Protocol Name in detail. (Refer to d) Change Channel Data dialog box.)

• OK ... Enable the present setting and exit.

• CANCEL ... Disable the present setting and exit.

b) Set Format Data dialog box

Fig. 6.13 Set Format Data Dialog Box

• Imager Name ... The name of the connected imager set by the Connect Imager is displayed.

• Film Size ... Select the film size and the format so that it can be used.

• DEFAULT ... The recommended size per imager is automatically selected.

• CUSTOM FORMAT ... Display the next Set Custom Format Data dialog box.



• Set Custom Format Data dialog box

Fig. 6.14 Set Custom Format Data Dialog Box

• Format ID ... Set the format ID. A maximum of 16 types can be registered. (80-8F)

• Film Size ... Set the valid film size. (More than one can be selected.)

• Rotate ... Enable/disable the rotating of an image.

• Slide ... Enable/disable slide.

• Format Mag ... Select the number of formats in which the image magnification are different. (1-3)

c) Set Error Code dialog box

This is a dialog box to make an error table that determines how to conform an error generated from the imager to

Printlink.

Fig. 6.15 Set Error Code Dialog Box Fig. 6.16 Change Error Code Dialog Box

• DEFAULT ... Set the error code set in advance to each imager.

• Imager ... Displays the error code of the imager.

• Printlink ... Displays the error code of Printlink.

• CHANGE ... Displays the Set Error Code dialog box.

• Imager ... Displays the error code of the imager.

• Printlink ... Input the error code of Printlink.



d) Change Channel Data dialog box

i) Set Modality IF Data (Video) dialog box

For Video In, Digital Video In, and HG-Video In.

Fig. 6.17 Set Modality IF Data (Video) Dialog Box

• I/O ... Displays input or output.

• IF Type ... Displays the IF type.

• Serial Port ... Set the serial port.

COM1: Controller for the imager control

COM2: Network controller

• Pixel Aspect Ratio ... Set the pixel aspect ratio.

• Pixel Clock ... Set the pixel clock value of the image.

• Output Pixels ... Set output to either 8bit or 12bit.

• H Delay ... Set the delay value from Hsync.

• Size ... Set the image size.

H: The horizontal size of the image.

V: The vertical size of the image.

• Back Porch H + sync ... Set the number of pixels and sync signal from the horizontal sync to the image data.

• Back Porch V ... Set the number of pixels from the vertical sync to the image data.

• Store Delay ... Set the time (sec) from when the IF receives a store command to when it returns a reply

command.

• Interlace ... Set to Interlace or No Interlace.

Interlace : Every other line of the image data will be returned.

No Interlace : The image data will be returned in order.

• Serration Pulse ... Select ON or OFF for the serration pulse.

• ODD/EVEN ... Set the line during interlace.

Normal : Does not reverse.

Reverse : Reverses.

• 1H Delay ... Set the delay value.

• Set Reverse ... Set whether or not to reverse the image data.

Normal : Does not reverse the image data.

Reverse : Reverses the image data.



ii) Set Modality IF Data (Digital) dialog box

For Digital In and Digital Out.

Fig. 6.18 Set Modality IF Data (Digital) Dialog Box

• IN/OUT ... Displays input or output.

• Serial Port ... Select the serial port.

COM1 : Controller for the imager control

COM2 : Network controller

• Priority Size ... Set the priority order of the size.

Set : The size is given priority regardless of the modality header info.

Modality : The modality header info is given priority.

• Input Pixels ... Set the pixel value to either 8bit or 12bit.


• Pixel Aspect Ratio ... Set the pixel aspect ratio.


H : The horizontal size of the image.

V : The vertical size of the image.

• Set Reverse ... Set whether to reverse the image data.


Reverse : Reverses the image data.

• Digital IF REQtoREQ Time ... Set the request interval between lines when receiving image data.

• Store Delay ... Set the time (sec) from when the IF receives a store command to when it returns a reply

command.

• Store Header timeout ... Set the timeout length for the header info from modality.

• Digital IF Output Speed ... Set the digital output speed.

• Command Status timeout ... Set the command timeout length for store with the imager.

• Store Image timeout ... Set the timeout length for the reception and transmission of the image.



iii) Set TOSHIBA Data dialog box

For Toshiba IN.

Fig. 6.19 Set TOSHIBA Data Dialog Box

• Mag Type ... Set the interpolation type.

• SPLINE Mag Coe ... Set the coefficient of SPLINE.

• Serial Port ... Port for connecting to the network controller. Select COM2.

• Imager Not Ready ... Set whether to accept or reject data received when the imager is still preparing.

Reject : Does not receive data.

Accept : Receives data.


H : The horizontal size of the image.

V : The vertical size of the image.


• Store Display ... Set whether or not to display the store indication of the network controller.

• Store Timeout ... Set the timeout length for transmission and reception.

• MAG WAY ... An interpolation command table for converting Toshiba's interpolation data to Printlink's

internal data value.

• LUT WAY ... A LUT command table for converting Toshiba's LUT data to Printlink's internal data value.



iv) Set HSTP Data dialog box

For HSTP OUT (Li-1417).

Fig. 6.20 Set HSTP Data Dialog Box

• Sheet Data ... Displays the set values of the sheet data.

• Max Image Size ... Set the value of the maximum image size.

• Sheet Type ... Set one of the following sheet types.

Normal : Normal sheet type

Test : Test sheet type

Setup : Setup sheet type

Master Lut : Master Lut sheet type

Remap Lut : Remap Lut sheet type

• Tag Type ... Set one of the following tag types.

Brief : A tag is processed in a simple format.

Extended : A tag is processed in a detailed format.

• Lut Select ... Set LUT.

ImagineSP : LUT data held per film will be used.

MasterLut : LUT data held by the imager will be used.

• Pixel Size ... Set the pixel size.

Auto : Selects 75µ or 90µ automatically.

75µ : Operates at 75µ fixed.

90µ : Operates at 90µ fixed.

• Interpolation ... Set the interpolation type.

• Curve Type ... Set the curve type.

Automatic : Set at automatic computation.

Custom : Printlink set LUT data.

• Density ... Set the maximum and minimum value for density.



• Automatic Computation

Window Start : Minimum pixel value that one image can obtain.

End : Maximum pixel value that one image can obtain.

Pivot Density : Density value per image parameter.

Pivot Gray Level : Gray ratio per image parameter.

Contrast : Contrast value.

Curve Shoulder : Right counter of the LUT curve.

Toe : Left counter of the LUT curve.

Brightness : Brightness of the image.

• Nega/Posi ... Set the output imager. This is set because nega/posi differ depending on the imager.

• Rotate ... Set the rotating direction.

None : No rotation

Right : 90 degree rotation to the right

Left : 90 degree rotation to the left

• Version ... Set the imager version.

• TTO Retry ... Set the number of times of the imager's finisher check.

• Retry Interval ... Set the retry interval (sec) with the imager for one print.

• Retry Count ... Set the retry count with the imager for one print.

• Request Status ... Set the ON/OFF and interval for periodical communication.



v) Set DICOM Data dialog box

For DICOM PRINT IN/OUT and DICOM STORAGE IN/OUT.

Fig. 6.21 Set DICOM Data Dialog Box

• Protocol ... Displays the protocol name.

• Serial Port ... Set the serial port.

COM1: Controller for imager control

COM2: Network controller


• AE Title ... Set the AE title.

(SCP): Input side

(SCU): Output side

• Port No. ... Set the protocol port number.

• Modality ... Set the modality.


• PDU Size ... A DICOM parameter is used. (Please leave this at default.)

• Socket Buf ... Set the socket buffer. (Please leave this at default.)

• Private Data ... Set the DICOM Konica Private Tag. (Please leave this at default.)

• Print ... Set in the case of DICOM PRINT IN/OUT.

N-EVENT Port No. ... Set the port number for N-EVENT.

Max Density ... Set the maximum density.

Output EVENT-REPORT ... Set whether or not to output N-EVENT.

Output Kind ... Set whether to output with BIN_XX or with a processor.

EK Mode ... Set the EK Mode ON or OFF.

• Storage ... Set in the case of DICOM STORAGE OUT.

Conversion Type ... Set the image conversion type.

DV : Video, HG Video, Digital Video

ID : Digital

WSD : Network



The Change Route Data dialog box appears byclicking [Change].

Image Type ... Set normally to DERIVED-SECONDARY.

Secondary Capture Device ... Input the discrimination name for Printlink if requested from the connected party.

A maximum of 64 characters can be input. E.g. Printlink-IV

Video Image Acquired ... Not used.

Digital Image Manufacturer ... Not used.

Digital Image Acquired ... Not used.

Institution Name ... Input the facility name if requested from the connected party.

A maximum of 128 characters can be input.

Institution Address ... Input the facility address if requested from the connected party.

A maximum of 512 characters can be input.

Output VOI LUT ... Used when sending Printlink LUT data to the filing device.

Output Name ... Set the output name.

OCR Other1 Use ... Select the data set in OCR Other1.

OCR Other2 Use ... Select the data set in OCR Other2.

(2) Route (R) ...The Set Route Data dialog box is displayed to set the Route.

Fig. 6.22 Set Route Data Dialog Box

Fig. 6.23 Change Route Data Dialog Box



• Route ID ... Displays the route ID number.

• Route Name ... Enter the route name. This is displayed on the controller.

• Input ... Set the input channel number. It is also the area to set the subjected IP address in the case of network

I/F.

• Output ... Set the output channel number. It is also the area to set the subjected IP address in the case of network

I/F. Two channels can be set for output.

• Set Default ID ... Select which to set as default when multiple routes are set.

(3) Env (I)The Set Environment Data dialog box appears to display or set the information of the main unit.

Fig. 6.24 Set Environment Data Dialog Box

• Serial Port ... Displays the setting information of COM1 and COM2.

• HD Space Warning ... Set the remaining HD space to signal a warning. When the remaining space for Printlink

falls below this space, an old file will be deleted.

• Log Data Output Mode ... Set the Printlink log output mode.

Event Log: Normal mode

Detail Log: Outputs a detailed log.



(4) LUT (L)The Set LUT Data dialog box appears to set the internal LUT pattern.

Fig. 6.25 Set LUT Data Dialog Box

• LUT Set ... Displays the subject set. Displays the set LUT. (Channels 1-18, HSTP 1-8) (LUT 1-8)

• Basic Pattern ... Set the stored basic pattern.

• DECISION ... Determines the values set in 01 to 16 and reflects them to the graph.

• CONVERT ... Converts from pixel value to density value.

• SMPTE ... Conforms the horizontal axis to SMPTE pattern.

• UP/DOWN ... Moves the LUT inclination up and down.

• LEFT/RIGHT ... Shifts the LUT value to the right and left.

• SMOOTH ... Interpolates and smoothens the set data.

• LINEAR ... Connects DMIN and DMAX data with a straight line.

• COPY ... Copies LUT.

• DMIN ... Input the minimum value.

• DMAX ... Input the maximum value.

• 01.- 16. ... Input the LUT value for steps 01. to 16.



6.4.3 Watch (R)The following items are under [Watch (R)] in the menu bar.

Fig. 6.26 Watch (R) Menu in the Printlink Maintenance Window

(1) Channel (C)...The Watch Channel Status dialog box is displayed and the status for each channel is indicated.

Fig. 6.27 Watch Channel Status Dialog Box

• Channel ... Set the channel number.

• Channel Name ... Displays the channel name.

• Protocol ... Displays the protocol name.

• Error Code ... Displays the error code.

• Stop Print ... Displays the print status.

• Status ... Displays the channel status.

• Route ID ... Displays the route ID.

• INPUT ... Displays the Printlink input information.

• OUTPUT ... Displays the Printlink output information.

• NEW STATUS ... Obtains the updated information.

• DISP ... Displays the image.



(2) Queue (P) ...The Watch Output Queue dialog box is displayed and the Printlink queue information is indicated.

Fig. 6.28 Watch Output Queue Dialog Box

• Channel No. ... Set the channel number.

• Page No. ... Set the page number.

• NEW STATUS ... Obtains the updated information.

• DELETE PAGE ... Deletes page information.

• NEXT ... Moves to the next queue.

• PREV ... Moves to the previous queue.

• DISP IMAGE ... Displays the image screen.

• SAVE IMAGE ... Saves the image in a BMP format.



(3) Status (I) ...The Watch Status dialog box is displayed and the Printlink status information is indicated.

Fig. 6.29 Watch Status Dialog Box



6.4.4 Remote maintenance tool (desktop delivery)This following section describes the method to integrate the remote maintenance software that enables setup from Printlink V1.10

without the use of the monitor, keyboard, or mouse.

(1) Installing Desktop Delivery to the maintenance PCDD.exe, which is found inside the Desktop Deliver folder, is distributed from the Printlink V1.10 software. Double-click

DD.exe from the maintenance PC and follow the instructions to install.

Fig. 6.30 Welcome Window

(2) Startup method from the maintenance softwarea) Startup method

Start up the Printlink remote software (Server DD Agent) by selecting [Start (S)] under the [Tool (T)] menu in the tool

bar of the Printlink maintenance software V1.10 as shown in Fig. 6.31.

Fig. 6.31 Tool (T) Menu in the Printlink Maintenance Window



b) Usage

Start up the remote software's Desktop Delivery DD Manager which was installed in advance.

Select Connect in the [File (F)] menu, link and display the main Printlink desktop by setting the Printlink IP address

or host name and the password (itr).

Fig. 6.32 Example of the Desktop Delivery Display

c) Operating method

Printlink can be operated with the maintenance PC mouse and keyboard within the displayed area of the desktop. For

detailed instructions, refer to Help in the tool bar.

d) Exiting method

Exit the remote software by clicking [Stop (t)] under the [Tool (T)] menu in the tool bar of Printlink maintenance soft-

ware V1.10.

NOTE: When using Desktop Delivery in the remote software, be sure to close the remote software on the

Printlink side. A heavy load will be applied to the computer when this software is operating, and may

hinder normal operation.



6.4.5 Help (H)The following item is under [Help (H)] in the menu bar.

(1) Version Information (A)The following window is displayed and the version information of the present Printlink will appear.

The software for V1.10 can only upgrade Printlink V1.05 or earlier versions and read installed data. Furthermore, V1.10

main unit cannot be operated with the V1.05 maintenance software.


Fig. 6.34 Version Information Dialog Box

6.5 Compatibility of the Maintenance SoftwareTable 6.2 Compatibility of Printlink V1.10 Maintenance Software

50.1VtinuniaMreilraero

01.1VtinuniaM skrameR

edargpU KO KO

llatsnI ON KO

atadllatsnidaeR KO KOeblliwataddeviecer,revewoh,daerebnac50.1VfoataD

.tamrof01.1Votdetrevnoc

eueuqhctaW ON KO

lootetomeR ON KO

goldaeR ON KO



6.6 Error Message6.6.1 Error message titles

oN hsilgnE dohteMgnitcerroC

1 rorrElocotorP .enoetairporppanatesdnalocotorpehtkcehC

2 rorrEataDedocrorrE .atadtcerrocehttupnidna,ataddeifidomehtkcehC

3 rorrEataDtamroF .noitamrofnitcerrocehttesdna,noitamrofnitamrofehtkcehC

4 rorrEataDTUL .atadtcerrocehttupnidna,atadTULehtkcehC

5 rorrEteS .gnittesehttcerrocdna,stnetnoctesehtkcehC

6 rorrEtupnI .stnetnoctcerrocehttupnidna,stnetnoctupniehtkcehC

7 rorrEnoitcennoC:smetigniwollofehtkcehC

noitcennocelbaC•edisytiladomehtnoputeS•

8 rorrEnoitacinummoC:smetigniwollofehtkcehC


9 rorrEnoisreVswodniW

:smetigniwollofehtkcehCnoitcennocelbaC•

edisytiladomehtnoputeS•stnetnocdellatsnI•

01 rorrEeliF .elifehtnodetrexesinoitcetorpetirwafieesotkcehC

11 rorrEyalpsiDegamI .tcerrocsielifegamiehtfostnetnocehtfieesotkcehC

21 rorrEevaSeliFegamI .niagayrtdnaNO/FFOrewopehtnruT

31 rorrEyrotceriD .ecapsevirdskcaltirehtehwro,dedaolrevoeraselifyrotceridfieesotkcehC

41 rorrEecnerefeRyrotceriD .tcerrocsiyrotceriddetcelesehtfieesotkcehC

51 rorrEeciveD .niagayrtdnaNO/FFOrewopehtnruT

61 rorrEgolaiDpsiD .elifgninnurehtllatsnierrotratseR

71 rorrEetucexEkniltnirP .tratserdnanoitacilppagninnurehtesolC

81 rorrEmetsyS



91 rorrEnepOeliFegamI .deneposissecorprehtonafirostsixeelifatadegaminafieesotkcehC

02 rorrEdaeReliFegamI



12 rorrEetacollAyromeM .ecapsyromemtneiciffesierehtfieesotkcehC

22 rorrEataDtamroFmotsuC .atadtcerrocehttupnidna,atadofnitamrofmotsucehtkcehC



6.6.2 Message titles


1 noitamrifnoC .nottubKOehtkcilC

2 noitamrifnoC .nottubKOehtkcilC

3 edargpU .detelpmocsignidargpulitnutiaW

4 edargnwoD .detelpmocsignidargnwodlitnutiaW

5 ataDgnidneS .tnessiatadlitnutiaW

6 ataDgnivieceR .deviecersiatadlitnutiaW

7 gnizilaitinI .detelpmocsinoitazilaitinilitnutiaW

8 ataDgnivaS .devassiatadlitnutiaW

9 ataDgnidaeR .daersiatadlitnutiaW

01 egaPgniteleD .deteledsiegapehtlitnutiaW

11 gnitoobeR .pustratskniltnirPlitnutiaW

21 ybdnatSnoitcennoC .kniltnirPotedamsiknillitnutiaW

31kroW/sserddAPIgnignahC

reffuB.deifidomsireffubkrowdnasserddaPIehtlitnutiaW

6.6.3 Error Message


1 .testonsserddaPIkniltnirP .sserddaPItcerrocehtteS

2 kniltnirPottcennoctonnaC



3 yalpsidtonnaC .elifgninnurehtllatsnierrotoobeR

4 lufsseccusnudaerataD



5 lufsseccusnuetirwataD



6 lufsseccusnueteledataD .elifgninnurehtllatsnierrotoobeR

7 lufsseccusnudnesataD



8 .lufsseccusnueviecerataD



9.kniltnirPtoobertonnaC

reporprofyllaunamtoobeR.noitarepo

.yllaunamkniltnirPputratS

01 rorrenoisreVetucexEtonnaC .elifgninnurehtllatsnieR

11 .gninnurydaerlanoitacilppA .gninnurydaerlasitahtnoitacilppanaesU



21 .eruliafnoitcennockniltnirP



31 .tupniyrotceridoN .yrotceridehttupnI

41 .tsixetonseodyrotceriddeificepS .yrotceridwenaekamro,stsixetahtyrotceridaesU

51 .yrotceridetaerctonnaC .yrotceridgnitsixeehtesuos,detaercebtonnacyrotceridA

61 .tupnisserddaPIoN .locotorplenaprellortnocahtiwsserddaPInateS

71gnisusserddaPItupnI

.552dna0neewtebseulav.552ot0morfsieulavehthcihwnisserddaPInatupnI

81 sserddaPIetairporppanI .krowtenlenaprellortnocehthtiwyletairporppasserddanateS

91sserddaPIdnestonnaC

noitcurtsniegnahc



02 .noitcurtsnitooberdnestonnaC



12 ezisreffubkrow/sserddaPIlufsseccusnuegnahc

.niagayrtdnastnetnocdeifidomehtkcehC

22noisrevdnestonnaC.tseuqernoitamrofni



32noisreveviecertonnaC

.ylpernoitamrofni



42noisrevniatbotonnaC

desugniebelifoteudnoitamrofni.kniltnirPyb

.niagayrtdnaesunielifehtesolC

52 .egamiyalpsidtonnaC .elifegamiehtfostnetnocehtkcehC

62 .atadegamievastonnaC .niagayrtdnaNO/FFOrewopehtnruT

72 .ydaertonevirD .evirdehteraperP

82 .lufsseccusnuecnereferyrotceriD .niagayrtdnaNO/FFOrewopehtnruT

92 .gnittessserddaPIetairporppanI .sserddaPItcerrocateS

03dnatupnilacitnedI

.srebmunlennahctuptuo.yletaruccarebmunlennahctuptuo/tupniehttupnI

13fotamrofgnisusserddaPItupnI

."xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx".]XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX[fotamrofagnisusserddaPIehttupnI

23fotamrofgnisusserddaPItupnI

"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"."xxx-xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"

-XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX[]XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX[fotamrofagnisusserddaehttupnI.]XXX

33-elgnisgnisuemanetuortupnI

.sretcarahcetyb.sretcarahcetyb-elgnisgnisuemanetuorehttupnI

43 .1lennahctuptuomorfteS .1lennahctuptuomorfteS

53 .lennahcenoylnotestonnaC .slennahctuptuodnatupniehthtobteS



63

gnisuegassempmatstupnI.sretcarahcetyb-elbuod

gnisuegassempmatstupnI().sretcarahcetyb-elgnis

etyb-elgnisgnisuegassempmatsehttupni,SOnoisrev-hsilgnEnagnisunehW.sretcarahc

73

gnisuegassempmatstupnI.sretcarahcetyb-elbuod

-elgnisgnisuemanretnirptupnI().sretcarahcetyb

etyb-elgnisgnisuemanretnirpehttupni,SOnoisrev-hsilgnEnagnisunehW.sretcarahc

83 .tsixetonseodelifdeificepS .elifgnitsixenatceleS

93 .emanelifgnissiM .emanelifehttupnI

04 .lufsseccusnuypoceliFnanoroediskniltnirPehtnoecapsehtnidetrexesinoitcetorpetirwfieesotkcehC

.elifgnitsixe

14.lufsseccusnuedargpurellortnoC

.noitcennocrellortnocmrifnoC



24

edargpurellortnockrowteN.lufsseccusnu

rellortnockrowtenmrifnoC.noitcennoc



34 .rebmunlairesgnissiM .rebmunlairesehttupnI

44-elgnisgnisurebmunlairestupnI

.sciremunahplaetyb.sretcarahcetyb-elgnisgnisurebmunlairesehttupnI

54 .lufsseccusnudnesegasseM



64 .lufsseccusnuevieceregasseM:smetigniwollofehtkcehC


74 .lufsseccusnunoitazilaitinitekcoS .NO/FFOrewopehtgninrutretfayrterroyrteR

84sserddatekcosedistneilC.lufsseccusnustnemngissa

NO/FFOrewopehtgninrutretfayrterroyrteR

94tekcosedistneilC

.lufsseccusnunoitareneG.yrterneht,NO/FFOrewopehtnrutroyrteR

05noitisiuqcasserddaPIrevreS

.lufsseccusnu


edisytiladomehtnoputeS•

15 .eruliafnoitcennoctekcosrevreS .ediskniltnirPehtnonoitidnoctekcosehtkcehcrogninnursikniltnirPfieesotkcehC

25 .tsixetonseodtneilC .detcennocebotecivedehtkcehC

35 .sserddaPIoN .sserddaPIehtteS

45ngissaevirdkrowteN

.lufsseccusnu.detcennocsikrowtenafirogninnursikniltnirPfieesotkcehC

55 .atadtseuqerdeniatboesutonnaC .ediskniltnirPehtnonoitidnoctekcosehtkcehcrogninnursikniltnirPfieesotkcehC

65 .emanyrotceridetairporppanI .yrotceriddetangisedehtkcehC

75rofselifyrassecengnissiM

.edargpu.selifyrassecenehtllatsnI

85 .lufsseccusnuypoceliFneebsahelifehtfiroelifgninnurehtnodetrexesinoitcetorpetirwfieesotkcehC

.detrats



95rofselifyrassecengnissiM

.edargnwod.seliftneiciffeniehtllatsnI

06noisrevetairporppanI

.noitacificeps.tratsdnanoisrevtcerrocaetangiseD

16 .lufsseccusnunoiteledelifkroW .elifkrowehtnodetrexesinoitcetorpetirwfieesotkcehC

26

rorre/atadlortnocgoLelifatadlortnocgol

noitareneg.lufsseccusnu

evirdehtkcehcro,yrotceriddetcelesehtnodetrexesinoitcetorpetirwfieesotkcehC.ecaps

36 .yllaunamkniltnirPtoobeR .yllaunamkniltnirPputratS

46tluafedniatbotonnaC]s%[regamifoseulav

ro,exe.TNEMKNLPsayrotceridemasehtnielifnoisrevnocedocrorrenaetaerC.atadregamiehtkcehc

56foseulavtluafedniatbotonnaC]s%[]s%[ezismlif]s%[regami

.•••]s%[

ehtkcehcro,exe.TNEMKNLPsayrotceridemasehtnielifatadofnitamrofaetaerC.ezismlifregamiehtfoatad

66nrettap]s%[niatbotonnaC

.seulavfoatadehtkcehcro,exe.KNLPsayrotceridemasehtnielifeulavtesnrettapetaerC

.eulavnrettapeht

76foseulavtluafedniatbotonnaC]x20%x0[]x20%x0[DItamrof

.•••]x20%x0[

tamrofmotsucehtkcehcro,F8x0-08x0DItamroffognitsisnocatadhtiwelifatceleS.atadofni

86 .elifatadegaminepotonnaC .deneposissecorprehtonafiro,stsixeelifatadegaminafieesotkcehC

96 .elifatadegamidaertonnaC .deneposissecorprehtonafiro,stsixeelifatadegaminafieesotkcehC

07noiteledelifeueuqtuptuO

.lufsseccusnu.deneposissecorprehtonafieesotkcehC

17noiteledelifatadegamI

.lufsseccusnu.deneposissecorprehtonafieesotkcehC

27 .lufsseccusnuetacollayromeM .ecapsfotnuomatneiciffesierehtfieesotkcehC

37gnisuemanretnirp/lennahctupnI

.sretcarahcetyb-elgnis.sretcarahcetyb-elgnisgnisusemanretnirp/lennahcehttupnI

47

gnisuDItluafedRCOtupnI.sciremunahplaetyb-elbuodgnisuDItluafedRCOtupnI(

).sciremunahplaetyb-elgnis

etyb-elgnisgnisuDItluafedRCOehttupni,SOnoisrev-hsilgnEnagnisunehW.sciremunahpla

57

gnisuemantluafedRCOtupnI.sretcarahcetyb-elbuod

gnisuemantluafedRCOtupnI().sretcarahcetyb-elgnis

etyb-elgnisgnisuemantluafedRCOehttupni,SOnoisrev-hsilgnEnagnisunehW.sretcarahc

67etyb-elgnisgnisueltiT-EAtupnI

.sretcarahc.sretcarahcetyb-elgnisgnisueltitEAehttupnI

77 .rorredetciderpnU .niagayrtdnaetaruccasiegasuehtfieesotkcehC

87-NdnarebmuntroplacitnedI

.rebmuntropTROPER-TNEVE-TNEVE-NehtrofrebmuntropehtdnarebmuntropehtoteulavtnereffidateS

.TROPER

97 .tupniDItluafedRCOoN .DItluafedRCOnatupnI

08 .gnittestnuocXetairporppanI .tnuocXtcerrocehtteS

18 .gnittestnuocYetairporppanI .tnuocYtcerrocehtteS

28foseulavtluafedniatbotonnaC

.tamrofmotsuc.F8x0-08x0morfDItamroffognitsisnocatadhtiwelifatceleS

Blank page

7. Setting the Input I/F


7.1 Common Items for All InputThe following are common items for all input.

• Channel/Printer Name : Input the name of the connected device.

• Stamp Message : Set the default of the stamp message to put in the film.

• Convert LUT : Set ON/OFF for LUT conversion during input.

• Image Size Check : (Only for DIGITALIN, ToshibaIN, DICOMPRINTIN, and DICOMSTRAGEIN.) Check if

the input image size in one page is different.

• OCR Study : (Valid when OCR is set.) Set ON/OFF for OCR Study.

• Rome -> KANA : Japanese version only.

• OCR Study Timeout : (Valid when OCR is set.) Input the time for OCR Study Timeout. This is the waiting time for

the next store during Study. Queue registration will be made with Timeout.

• OCR Default ID : (Valid when OCR is set.) Input the default ID of the OCR result.

• OCR Default NAME : (Valid when OCR is set.) Input the default name of the OCR result.




7.2 Setting Each InputSelect set in the [Protocol Name] in the Change Channel Data dialog box to set each input.

1. Display the Change Channel Data dialog box.

Click [Channel (C)] under the [Set (S)] menu in the Printlink Maintenance window.

Fig. 7.2 Set (S) Menu in the Printlink Maintenance Window.

2. Allocate ToshibaIN in Channel 1.

Click Channel 1 and select [ToshibaIN] for the [Protocol Name] in the Change Channel Data dialog box. Select a protocol that

matches the connected device.


* A protocol is a procedure or agreement required to communicate with the connected device. For Printlink, one protocol is allo-

cated to one channel.

Refer to the following sections for specific setting procedures.

• 8. Setting the Video I/F

• 9. Setting the Digital I/F

• 10. Setting the Digital Video IF

• 11. Setting the Video HG I/F

• 7.3 Setting Toshiba Ether Input

• 7.4 Setting DICOM PRINT Input

• 7.5 Setting DICOM STRAGE Input



7.3 Setting Toshiba Ether Input1. Select Toshiba IN for the protocol name, click [Set] and display the Set TOSHIBA Data dialog box.

Fig. 7.5 Example of Toshiba Image

Fig. 7.4 Set TOSHIBA Data Dialog Box

2. Set each item

• Mag Type

This is the magnifying interpolation method for the image when there is an image and overlay. There are three types:

SPLINE, BILINEAR, and REPLICATE. Please use SPLINE which is the default.

Processing when the overlay is larger than the image:

Overlay

Overlay

Image

Image

Image + Overlay

Image + Overlay

Processing when the image is larger than the overlay:



• Serial Port

A port to connect a network controller. Choose COM2.

• Imager Not Ready

A setting to receive or reject an image from the Toshiba diagnostic device when the imager is in preparation. By selecting

Accept, images can be received even during preparation. Reject will not receive any images and return an error to the

Toshiba diagnostic device. This should normally be set at Accept.

• Store Timeout

A setting for the length of timeout during image transmission. When an image is being sent even after the set time, recep-

tion will be cancelled.

• Size

Input the largest image size among the image sizes received from Toshiba Ether. This size is used as the image size to check

the format as inputting the image size.

• MAG WAY

A setting to convert Smooth.

This shows which Smooth held by the imager corresponds to the contents of Smooth set from Toshiba.

Smooth set from a Toshiba diagnostic device. Imager Smooth after conversion.

Fig. 7.6 Toshiba MAG WAY Setting

When the setting is as shown in the figure, if data is sent from a Toshiba diagnostic device by REPLICATE, and in the case of

Smooth OFF, TYPE0, Smooth 2 will be set in the imager.



LUT set from the Toshiba diagnostic device. Imager LUT after conversion.

• LUT WAY

LUT WAY converts the designated value of LUT in the Toshiba Ether protocol and the LUT value on the controller.

Fig. 7.7 Toshiba LUT WAY Setting

When set as shown in Fig. 7.7, LUT TYPE 1 will be set in the imager when LUT TYPE0 data is sent from the diagnostic

device.

3. Click [OK] when all settings are completed and return to the [Change Channel Data] dialog. This will complete the setting for

Toshiba IN.



7.4 Setting the DICOM PRINT InputConfirm the following items with the network manager before performing the setting.

• The IP address of the connected device.

• The AE title and port number of the other party if the input source is other than Printlink.

The port number can be set from 1 to 65535, however, please use number 100 or above excluding the following numbers.

Prohibited ports: 10, 5400, 5401, 5316 and 5317. For USA, our convention is to use 7000 series port numbers.

7.4.1 Setting the DICOM PRINT input1. Set the DICOM PRINT IN Protocol

When a DICOM PRINT IN protocol is allocated, [Set] in the Change Channel dialog box becomes active. Click [Set] and dis-

play the Set DICOM Data dialog box.


2. Set the items related to the entire DICOM.

• Serial Port : The network controller becomes usable when COM2 is selected.

• Port No. : Input the port number designated by the connected device. USA: e.g. 7000,7010,7020,etc..

• PDU Size : Set the PDU size.

• Size H/V : Set the maximum value of one frame image size upon output. This is used to check the format validity.

• AE Title (SCP) : Input the AE title of your own device. If the connection is between Printlinks, the default can be used.

However, if some other device is connected to more than one Printlink, it should be changed when a

unique AE title is required.

• AE Title (SCU) : Input the AE title of the connected device. A maximum of 16 characters can be set.

• Modality : Set the type of diagnostic device that is connected.

• Socket Buf : Set the socket buffer. (Default is 256.)

• Output Pixels : Set the pixel size of the image data to be transmitted.

• Store Display : Set the store status display of the network controller.



3. Perform the settings for DICOM PRINT.

• N-EVENT Port No.: When the connected device is Printlink-OD, perform the same setting as the N-EVENT Port No. of

the other party.

• Output EVENT REPORT: When the connected device is Printlink, set to GO. When connecting to a device other than

Printlink, select Cancel.

When this setting is applied when connecting two Printlinks, asynchronous errors such as film empty will appear in the

Printlink controller on the input side.

4. When all settings are completed, click [OK] and return to the [Change Channel Data] dialog box. This will complete setting

for Dicom Print In.

7.4.2 Connecting a different company's DICOMConnection with another company's DICOM is limited to one that has been gone through a connection test and listed in the "DICOM

Connection Results Table". Exchange information between both sides and check the following points upon making a connection.

• AE Title

• Port No.

For DICOM PRINT IN/DICOM STORAGE IN (SCP side), the port number is the one set on your side.

For DICOM PRINT OUT/DICOM STORAGE OUT (SCU side), the port number is the one set on the other party's side.

• IP Address

• Version

Confirm the above points to set DICOM.



7.5 Setting the DICOM STORAGE InputConfirm the following items with the network manager before performing the setting.

• The IP address of the connected device.

• The AE title and port number of the other party if the input source is other than Printlink.

The port number of 1-65535 can be set, however, please use number 100 or above excluding the following numbers.

Prohibited ports: 10, 5400, 5401, 5316 and 5317

1. Set the DICOM STORAGE IN Protocol

When a DICOM STORAGE IN protocol is allocated, [Set] in the Change Channel Data dialog box becomes active. Click [Set]

and display the Set DICOM Data dialog box.


2. Set the items related to the entire DICOM.

• Serial Port: The network controller becomes usable when COM2 is selected.

• Port No.: Input the port number.

• PDU Size: Set the PDU size.

• Size H/V: Set the maximum value of one frame image size upon output. This is used to check the format validity.

• AE Title (SCP): Input the AE title of your own device. The AE title should be unique.

• AE Title (SCU): Input the AE title of the connected device. A maximum of 16 characters can be set.

• Modality: Set the type of diagnostic device that is connected.

• Socket Buf: Set the socket buffer. (Default is 256.)

• Output Pixels: Set the pixel size of the image data to be transmitted.

• Store Display: Set the store status display of the network controller.



3. When all settings are completed, click [OK] and return to the Change Channel Data dialog box. This will complete setting for

DICOM STORAGE IN.

4. For connection with another company's DICOM, refer to Section 7.4.2.

Blank page

8. Setting the Video I/F


8.1 ConfigurationVideo I/F Unit 1 set (consists of 2 boards)

8.2 SpecificationsInput Signal Composite Video

Video + Composite-sync

Video + Separate-sync

Combination of above + External Clock

Pixel Clock 3.75-60MHz

Horizontal Frequency 5-40kHz

Vertical Frequency 15-70Hz

Max. Input Image Size 2048 x 1024 (increments of 4 pixels in horizontal direction)

Memory Configuration 2MB x 1 side

Jitter 2nsec or less

Delay Clock Internal Clock Max. 127nsec in 0.5nsec increment.

External Clock Max. 30nsec in 2nsec increment.

(with phase splitter)

Resolution 8bit

S/N Ratio 42dB (±1 digit)

Bus Configuration PCI 32bit

8.3 Block Diagram8.3.1 Block diagram of video I/F

Video SignalSync Signal

AnalogPLL

A/D Converter32bit Converter

Frame Memory 2MB

Memory Controller PCI I/F

PCI Bus 32bitMemory Board

Fig. 8.1 Block Diagram of Video I/F



8.3.2 Video signal input section

indicates jumper. indicates default.

Fig. 8.2 Block Diagram of the Video signal Input Section



8.4 Description of Each Part and Its Setting8.4.1 Silk print and parts layout diagrams(1) Video I/F analog section Parts layout diagram ... Fig. 8.4

(2) Video I/F analog section Silk diagram ... Fig. 8.5

(3) Video I/F digital section Parts layout diagram ... Fig. 8.6

(4) Video I/F digital section Silk diagram ... Fig. 8.7

8.4.2 Connector

J1 VS Video Signal Input Connector

* 0.5-2.0Vp-p

J2 CS/HD CS (Composite Sync) Input (during Composite Sync)

HD (H Sync) Input Connector (during Separate Sync)

* TTL level (75Ω)

J3 VD VD (V Sync) Input Connector (during Separate Sync)

* TTL level (75Ω)

J4 EXTCLK EXT CLK Input Connector

* TTL, ECL level (75Ω)

Fig. 8.3 Rear Panel of the Board

J1 J2 J3 J4



Video I/F Analog Section Parts Layout Diagram (CheckTerminal / Jumper Pin / Volume)

Test Pin

Jumper Pin

Volume

LED

Video Input Signal

CS/HD

VD

ExternalClock

Connector for Video-Digital Board

Fig. 8.4 Parts Layout Diagram (Video I/F Analog Section)



Video I/F Analog Section Silk Diagram

Fig. 8.5 Silk Diagram (Video I/F Analog Section)



Video I/F Digital Section Parts Layout Diagram (Check Pin)

Fig. 8.6 Parts Layout Diagram (Video I/F Digital Section)

Check Pin

Non-installed Check Pin

PCI Connector

Connector for Video-Analog Board



Video I/F Digital Section Silk Diagram

Fig. 8.7 Silk Diagram (Video I/F Digital Section)

Blank page



8.4.3 LED(1) Checking the board operation

LED1 (POWER) Green : Power supply (+5V)

(2) Checking the video input operationLED2 (NO VIDEO) Red : Lights when no sync signal is input

LED3 (PLL LOCK) Yellow : Lights when PLL is locked

LED4 (A/D START) Yellow : Lights one time (for 0.5sec) when image data is stored.

8.4.4 Jumper(1) Setting for different sync signals

Table 8.1 Jumper Setting for Different Sync Signals

.oNPJlangiScnyS

7PJDV

9PJDH

8PJCNYS

11PJRHH

21PJE/O

41PJDH

71PJDV

31PJPMALC

51PJTEDV

)SV(oediVetisopmoC – – SV SV SV SV SV SV SV

etisopmoCcnyS

)-(suniM – RON SC SC SV SV SV SV SV

)+(sulP – VNI SC SC SV SV SV SV SV

etarapeScnyS

)-(sunimDH – RON SC SC PES PES PES PES PES

)+(sulpDH – VNI SC SC PES PES PES PES PES

)-(sunimDV RON – SC SC PES PES PES PES PES

)+(sulpDV VNI – SC SC PES PES PES PES PES

)SV(gnitteStluafeD RON RON SV SV SV SV SV SV SV

NOTE:

* [VS] and [CS] in the table indicate silk print coding on the board.

* Composite Video : A normal composite signal (1 composite signal).

* Composite Sync : The video signal and CS (composite sync) are separate (I signal, 1 sync)

* Separate Sync : The video signal, HD, and VD are separate (1 signal, 2 sync).

Descriptions of the above jumper functions:

JP7 (VD) : To set the polarity of separate sync (VD).

JP9 (HD) : To set the polarity of composite sync and separate sync (HD).

JP8 (SYNC) : To set either composite video or composite sync for the sync signal.

JP11 (HHR) : To set either composite video or composite sync for HD.

JP12 (O/E) : To select either separate sync or composite sync for O/E.

JP14 (HD) : To select either separate sync or composite sync for HD.

JP17 (VD) : To select either separate sync or composite sync for VD.

JP13 (CLAMP) : To select either separate sync or composite sync for CLAMP.

JP15 (VDET) : To set either separate sync or composite sync for the pulse that inhibits the phase comparison circuit.



(2) Setting for different signal status

Table 8.2 Jumper Setting for Different Signal Status

esluppmalcdnaNEVE/DDOrofegnartnemtsujdafoegnahC.noitceted

.langisehtfoycneuqerflatnozirohehtotgnidroccaegnahC4PJ

*)evobarozHk02ycneuqerflatnoziroH(:H)wolebrozHk02ycneuqerflatnoziroH(:L

.langisoedivroflangisCD/CAfonoitceleSsdeecxeegatlovlevelkcalbehtnehwnoitcennocCAotteS ± .V4.0

5PJ*)GNILPUOCCD(:CD

)GNILPUOCCA(:CA

57foFFO/NO Ω .langistupniehtfonoitanimret.yllacisabdegnahcebottoN

6PJ*)NOnoitanimreT(:MRT)FFOnoitanimreT(:FFO

langisoedivehtrofecnalabnudnaecnalabneewtebnoitceleS.tupni

foDNGehtfolaitnetopehtnehwdetcelesebdluohs)ecnalaB(LAB.V0tonsilangiseht

61PJ*)ecnalabnU(:BU

)ecnalaB(:LAB

.retliffoFFO/NO.langistupniehtnistsixetnemeleycneuqerfhgihfoesionnehwesU

81PJ*)desutoN(:RID

)desU(:LIF

.kcolclanretxeehtrofytiralopfonoitceleS1*.yaledfotnuomaehtesaercniotesreveR

91PJ*)lamroN(:RON

)esreveR(:VNI

*1 The amount of delay for the external clock is 0-30ns in 2nsec increment.

A wider variable capacity can be obtained by reversing the clock when the signal frequency is low.

(Max. 60ns)

*: Default setting

Example : The clock width (width of 1 pixel) for 20MHz signal should be 50ns.

1. In the NOR setting, set the delay to 0-30ns.

2. When set to INV, intake of the signal is delayed by half a pixel value (25ns), and a delay of 25ns can be considered.

30ns 50ns

The timing (activation) of intake shifts half a pixel.

30ns

Total 55ns

INV

NOR

3. 25-55ns can be actually set when setting the delay to 0-30ns in the INV setting.

–> As a result of 1. and 3., 0-55ns can be set.



(3) Setting the PLLChange the PLL setting when the clock jitter cannot be picked up sufficiently.

Table 8.3 Jumper Setting for PLL

* : Default setting

Normally, making adjustment with the RV8 adjuster (FIL1) is sufficient. However, when jitter reduction cannot be improved

with other methods, change the setting.

1. Set JP3 to 1 and adjust RV8.

2. Set JP3 to 3 and adjust RV8, 10.

3. Set JP2 to 2 and adjust RV8, 10.

4. Set JP2 to 3 and adjust RV8, 9, 10.

If improvement cannot be seen after making the above changes, there may be a different problem. Therefore, reset to the orig-

inal setting.

(4) Other jumpers

Table 8.4 Setting for Other Jumpers

2PJ

)2LIF(

*)k0257R(:1

)k00147R(:2

)2LIF9VRtsujdA(:3

3PJ

)1LIF(

)k03398R(:1

)k07467R(:2

)3LIF01VRtsujdA(:3

)TST(01PJ *nepO )desuton(tnemtsujdarofesuotniP

* : Default setting



8.4.5 Descriptions of volumesRV1 (VBD) : Adjusts the pulse width that makes signals for PLL hold for signals without any serration pulse.

RV3 (CP) : Adjusts the phase of the clamp pulse upon separate sync.

RV4 (5V) : Adjusts 5V used in the PLL circuit.

RV6 (WHT) : Adjusts the white level of the AD conversion signal.

RV8 (FIL1) : Adjusts the filter of PLL.

RV9 (FIL2) : Adjusts the filter of PLL. (Used when a jumper pin is inserted in JP2-3.)

RV10 (FIL3) : Adjusts the filter of PLL. (Used when a jumper pin is inserted in JP3-3.)

RV11 (BLK) : Adjusts the black level of the A/D conversion signal.

RV2 (COM) : Adjusts the comparator voltage that detects the sync signal from a composite video.

RV5 (HHR) : Adjusts the signal that eliminates a 1/2H signal.

RV7 (SET) : Adjusts ODD/EVEN and the clamp pulse signal.

8.4.6 Descriptions of test pinsTP6 : +5V

TP18 : +5.5VA

TP19 : -5VA

TP21 : +5V

TP22 : -5.2V

TP23, 24, 25 : AGND

TP29, 30, 31, 32 : GND

TP1 (CP) : Clamp pulse

TP2 (HHR1) : Composite sync signal to make HD

TP3 (HD1) : Hsync signal

TP4 (VD) : Vsync signal

TP5 (VCO) : Output signal of PLL

TP7 (VBD) : Signal to make PLL hold signal

TP8 (CS) : Composite sync signal

TP9 (O/E) : ODD/EVEN detection signal of an interlace signal

TP10 (COM) : Threshold voltage for sync separation (compare with TP20)

TP11 (A/D) : A/D conversion input signal

TP12 (IN) : Video input signal

TP13 (HHR2) : Signal to obtain 1/2H sync signal

TP14 (FB) : Standard signal of PLL

TP15 (FA) : Divided signal of oscillation frequency

TP16 (HD2) : Delayed Hsync signal

TP17 (CLK) : Pixel clock (A/D input clock)

TP20 (VID) : Video signal (minus (-))



8.5 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board

8.5.1 Checking the operation (checking the LED)Refer to Section 8.4.3 and check the LED.

(1) LED1 (POWER) GreenExtinguished ... +5V signal is not supplied to the board.

1. Check the power source voltage of the main Printlink unit.

2. Check the +5V of the board (TP21).

(2) LED2 (NOVIDEO) RedLit ... Cannot detect video signal / Lights when HD signal is not present

1. Check the connections.

2. Check the signal (presence of serration pulse, interlace/non-interlace).

3. Check the setting (jumper setting of separate sync, RV7 (SET), etc.)

4. Check HD1 (TP3).

5. Check the COM level.

Check the threshold value of the sync separation circuit.

6. Check the relation between HHR 1 and 2.

Readjust by referring to Section 8.6.3 (8).

(3) LED3 (PLL LOCK) YellowExtinguished ... Cannot lock PLL (Cannot read the image data) / During EXTCLK.

1. Check the presence of a signal.

2. Check the setting of the installation software and board (jumper, etc.)

3. Readjust the video.

4. Check the waveform (TP15 (FA), TP14 (FB), etc.)

5. Readjust the PLL lock by referring to Section 6.4.4 (3).

(4) LED4 (A/D START) YellowLights one time (0.5sec) at the start of image input • • • Normal.

Does not light at the start of image input • • • Cannot read the image data.



3. Check the waveform (TP2 (HHR1), TP13 (HHR2), TP16 (HD2), TP4 (VD))



8.5.2 Checking the power source+12V, -12V, +5V, -5.2V, +5.5VA, and -5VA are necessary for Video I/F.

(1) CheckCheck the voltage at TP on the board. (See Fig. 8.8.)

a) +5V, +5.5VA, –5VA, –5.2V

TP18 ... +5.5VA +5.5V±0.25V

TP19 ... –5VA –5V±0.2V

TP21 ... +5V +5V±0.25V

TP22 ... –5.2V -5.2V±0.25V

b) ±12V

For ±12V, conduct a check if an abnormality is found in +5.5VA, -5VA, or -5.2V. A test pin is mounted on ±12V.

Check the voltage on the board using the following patterns.

PJ2-39, 40P (+12V) ... +12V±0.5V

PJ2-35, 36P (–12V) ... –12V±0.5V

Pattern location: Video-Analog board

–> When +5V and ±12V are not provided, check the voltage of the main Printlink unit.

–5VA(TP19)

+5.5VA(TP18)

+5V(TP21)

–5.2V(TP22)

+12V(PJ2-39, 40)Pin

–12V(PJ2-35, 36)Pin

Fig. 8.8 Parts Layout Diagram (Video I/F Analog Section)



8.5.3 Remedy for Error(1) V_IN / I/F / A/D Timeout (AA1A)

When it takes over 1 second to load data after it has been stored. (Problem with the hardware.)

a) Check the connections

• Check to see if separate sync is connected properly.

b) Check the settings

• Jumper (presence of serration, etc.)

• Contents set in the installation software.

c) Abnormalities at the input section

• Check that the PLL is locked.

• Check that the signal level of TP11 (A/D) is stable.

• Check that HD2 (TP16) and VD (TP4) are properly output.

d) Abnormalities in video signals (original signal)

• Check that the signals are stable.

• Check that Hsync and Vsync are properly output (whether they are stable without jitters).

(2) V_IN / IF signal unrecognized (AA19)When video signals are not being input. (When they cannot be recognized.)

When errors occur depending on the presence of an HD signal.

a) Check the connections

• Check that the video cable is properly connected.

• Check that the image signal is output from the diagnostic device.

b) Check the settings (Jumper setting for the separate sync, etc.)

c) Check the original signal and HD2 (TP16)

The level and waveform of HSYNC.

d) Check the COM level.


e) Exchange the board.



8.5.4 Turbulence of the image(1) Check the waveform of the video signal.

• Check the waveform of Hsync and Vsync (jitter, serration pulse, noise).

• Check the signal level (DC level variance, voltage amplitude).

• Readjust the board (jumper, volume).

(2) Loss of dots• Check the memory.

• Exchange the I/F.

• Exchange the board.

(3) Noise• Use the filter on the board by exchanging the jumper (exchange filter).

• Use an external noise filter such as a humkiller.

• Change the delay and select a location with less noise.

• Compare the GND level of the diagnostic device and Printlink.

• Set the balance of input or use an isolator.

(4) Crushed or skewed image• Check the setting (interlace/non-interlace).

• Check the setting (H-TOTAL, H-SIZE, V-SIZE).

• Check the signal (Hsync, Vsync).



8.6 Adjusting the Board

8.6.1 Settings by signalsPerform the following settings according to the type of video signal sent from the diagnostic device.

(1) Difference according to the sync signal• Video sync (VS) ... Normal video signal that contains Hsync and Vsync.

• Composite sync (C.SYNC) ... The video signal and composite sync (Hsync + Vsync) are on a separate line.

• Separate sync (SEP) ... The video signal, HD (Hsync), and VD (Vsync) are on a separate line.

Set according to the instructions in Section 8.4.4.

The connection is as follow:

Composite video signal ... J1 (VS) Normal

Video signal ... J1 (VS) Video signal + Composite sync

Sync signal (composite sync) ... J2 (CS/HD)

Video signal ... J1 (VS) Video signal + Separate sync

Sync signal (separate sync) ... J2 (CS/HD)

Sync signal (separate sync) ... J3 (VD)

(2) Input clock• External clock/Internal clock (PLL)

Set from the installation software.

(3) Input section of the video• AC/DC coupling

• Unbalance/Balance input

Refer to Section 8.4.4. Change the setting according to the input electric potential of the signal.

(4) Video signal method• Interlace / Non-interlace

• Switch the ODD and EVEN fields during interlace.

Output the image with the default setting and make a reversed setting when the fields are reversed.

• Presence of serration pulse.

The above settings are made from the installation software.



(5) Image size, etc.The parameter in the figure below is set from the installation software.

NOTE: The same value as the parameter set in MIU is used.

1) Hsize * For Printlink-IV, set Hsize in a 4 pixel unit.

2) Vsize

3) H Total

4) H.Bp+H.Sync

5) V.Backporch

(6) Other settings• Horizontal frequency setting to detect signal sync ... 20kHz or above/or less

• Signal noise filter ON/OFF

Refer to Section 8.4.4 for the above settings.

• Pixel clock range ... 3.75-7.5 / 7.5-15 / 15-30 / 30-60 (MHz)

Set from the installation software.

(4)H.Bp+H.Sync

H

V

(3) H TOTAL

(2) Vsize

(1) Hsize

(5) V.Backporch

Image



(7) Set modality I/F data (Video) dialog box For Video In.


I/O ... Indicates either input or output.

IF Type ... Indicates the IF type.

Serial Port ... Select COM2 as the serial port.

Pixel Aspect Ratio ... Set the pixel aspect ratio.

Set the values when the pixel aspect ratio of the input image is other than 1:1.

Pixel Clock ... Set the pixel clock value of the image. Select [External] for external clock.

Output Pixels ... Set either 8bit or 12bit for the output pixel.

H Delay ... Set the sync delay for the horizontal direction.

For internal clock : A max. of 127ns can be set in 0.5ns increment.

For external clock : A max. of 30ns can be set in 2ns increment.

H-Total ... Set the number of all images in the horizontal direction.

Size ... Set the image size.

H: Horizontal size of the image. V: Vertical size of the image.

Back Porch H+Sync ... Input the total of the horizontal sync signals and horizontal back porches.

Back Porch V ... Set the value of the vertical back porch.

Store Delay ... Input the time from receiving a store command from the controller to sending reply data.

When set to 1.0sec, every replay within 1.0sec can be stored when the time exceeds 1.0sec.

Interlace ... Set interlace or no interlace.

Interlace : Every other line of the image data will be sent .

No Interlace : Image data will be sent in order.



Serration ... Select ON or OFF for serration pulse.

With serration: ON Without serration: OFF

Image data can be obtained without an external clock by connecting

Advantage Windows and setting serration to OFF.

ODD/EVEN ... Set the line during interlace.

Normal: Normal

Reverse: Set reverse when the image field is reversed.

Set Reverse ... Set whether or not to reverse the image data.

Normal: Does not reverse images. Reverse: Reverse images.



8.6.2 Adjusting the video I/FThe procedures for adjusting the video are indicated in the flow chart.

Make adjustments following the procedures below when the composite video signal is an original signal, and when serration pulse

exists. Also, when an instruction indicated in the chart matches your condition, be sure follow the instruction. The number in each

block correspond to the item number (in Section 8.6.3) in which the contents of adjustment is described.

(1) Check original signal

(2) Set jumper

(10) Adjust during separate sync signal

(4) Adjust clamp pulse (I)(3) Adjust clamp pulse (N)

(6) Adjust level

(8) Adjust HHR

(9) Adjust PLL

(11) Adjust signal during no serration pulse

(7) Check (adjust) sync separation circuit

(12) Adjust delay

(13) Adjust position

(5) Check ODD/EVEN

Other than described on right:



During no interlace signal:

For separate sync:

When original signal Hsync level is 0.2V or less:(only when original signal is composite video)

With no serration pulse:

(N) and (I) in the chart indicate the following:(N): No interlace(I): Interlace

During interlace signal:

Fig. 8.10 Flow Chart of Video Adjustment Procedure



8.6.3 Details of adjustments(1) Checking the original signal

1. Connect the video image signal to J1 (VS), and check that the input signal level of TP12 (IN) is 1Vp-p.

NOTE: As for the signal, 0.5-2Vp-p can be read.

2. Measure the black level (back porch) potential of the video signal. Confirm that the potential is within a range of 0V±0.4.

If not, set JP5 to AC.

3. Measure the potential difference of the device GND and Printlink GND. (If noise comes out in the image, set JP16 to BAL

(balance)).

4. Check the Hsync level (during composite video signal). Check whether the level is above or below 0.2V.

5. Check the presence of serration pulse.

(2) Jumper settingAfter checking the original signal, refer to Section 8.4.4(1), (2), (3), and set the jumper securely based on the original signal.

(3) Adjusting the clamp pulse (for non-interlace)Enlarge the area between V-SYNC phases by applying a TV trigger (fall time) at TP8(CS), and adjust RV7(SET) so that the

relation between TP8(CS) and TP1(CP) is displayed as that shown in Photo 8.1.

TP8(CS)

TP1(CP)

TP4(VD)

TP9(O/E)

Photo 8.1

Make adjustments so that the clamp pulse generates synchronously with startup of TP8 (CS).

Check the TP4 (VD) vertical sync signal.

Confirm that TP9 (O/E) ODD/EVEN is at H.



(4) Adjusting the clamp pulse (for interlace)Apply a TV trigger (fall time) at TP8(CS). A check is required in both fields.

First set to FLD2 and apply a trigger in one field. Enlarge the area between V-SYNC phases, and make adjustments so that the

clamp pulse of TP1(CP) appears alternately upon the startup of composite sync in segments where EQUALIZING and SER-

RATING PULSE exist. Also adjust RV7(SET) so that TP4(VD) and TP9(O/E) are displayed as that shown in Photo 8.2.

Photo 8.2

When the above adjustments are completed, set to FLD1, apply a trigger to the other field, and adjust so that the setting is the

same as that shown in Photo 8.3.

Photo 8.3

Finally, switch the trigger to FLD2 and FLD1, and if one field is in the relation of Photo 8.2 and the other in Photo 8.3, the

adjustment for the clamp pulse is completed.

TP8(CS)

TP1(CP)

TP4(VD)

TP9(O/E)

TP8(CS)

TP1(CP)

TP4(VD)

TP9(O/E)



(5) Confirming ODD/EVENApply a trigger at TP4(VD), and confirm that TP4(VD) is spaced uniformly. Confirm that TP9(O/E) is synchronous to TP4

and that they are set alternately as shown in Photo 8.4.

(6) Adjusting the levelApply a trigger at TP11(A/D) and adjust the black level to +2VDC with RV11(BLK) while checking the waveform of the oscil-

loscope signal (refer to the range in Photo 8.5). Then adjust the white level to +3VDC with RV6(WHT).

Adjust the black level to +2V with RV11 (BLK) and the white level to +3V with RV6 (WHT).

Photo 8.4

ODD EVEN

Photo 8.5

TP4(VD)(Trigger)

TP9(O/E)

TP11(A/D)

+3V . . RV6(White Level)

+2V . . RV11(Black Level)

GND



(7) Checking (adjusting) the sync separation circuitNOTE: Make this adjusting when the Hsync level is 0.2V or less.

Apply a trigger to the oscilloscope at TP20(VID), and adjust RV2(COM) so that the relation between TP10(COM) and

TP20(VID) is displayed as shown in Photo 8.6.

NOTE: This adjustment will affect other settings.

Therefore, make readjustments for delay, and check the PLL lock.

Adjust RV2(COM) so that the threshold voltage of TP10(COM) becomes approx. 1/3 of that of Hsync.

Photo 8.6

Note: The voltage range (500mv) and GND level of oscilloscope CH1 and CH2 should be set the same.

GND

TP10(COM)

TP20(VID)



(8) Adjusting the HHRApply a TV trigger (fall time) at TP2(HHR1) and check both fields.

Set the oscilloscope coupling to FLD1 and apply a trigger to one field, apply a delay sweep to enlarge the area between V-

SYNC phases, and make adjustments with RV5(HHR) so that the relation between TP2(HHR1) and TP13(HHR2) is displayed

as shown in Photos 8.7 to 8.10. (In one of the adjusted fields during interlace, confirm that the relation between FLD1 and

FLD2 is displayed as shown in Photos 8.7 to 8.10.)

TP2(HHR1)

TP13(HHR2)

TP4(VD)

FLD1

Enlarged Photo

Photo 8.7

TP2(HHR1)

TP13(HHR2)

TP4(VD)

Photo 8.8

1H

B

A Adjust RV5(HHR) so that A:B =: 4:3.



Photo 8.9

Photo 8.10

Finally, switch the trigger to FLD1 and FLD2, and if one field is in the relation of Photo 8.7 and 8.8, and the other in Photo

8.9 and 8.10, the adjustment for the HHR is completed.

TP2(HHR1)

TP13(HHR2)

TP4(VD)

FLD2

Enlarged Photo

TP2(HHR1)

TP13(HHR2)

TP4(VD)

1H

B

A

Confirm that A: B =: 4:3.



(9) Adjusting the PLLa) Apply a trigger (start up) at TP14(FB), and make adjustments by turning the RV8(FIL1) so that the relation between

TP14(FB) and TP15(FA) is displayed as waveforms shown in Photos 8.11 to 8.13, and that the amount of jitters is held to

a minimum.

Make adjustments by enlarging this area so that jitters can be found easily.

Enlarge this area furthermore.

Photo 8.11

Photo 8.12

To the next page.

TP14(FB)(Trigger)

TP15(FA)

TP14(FB)(Trigger)

TP15(FA)



NOTE: The top andbottom posi-tion of thewaveform hasbeen moved.

NOTE: Set the timeaxis of theoscilloscopeshort.

TP15(FA)

TP14(FB)

Adjust with RV8(FIL1).

Photo 8.13

This deflection is called a jitter. Increase thebrightness of the oscilloscope and view. Thisdeflection is the reason for skewed pixels.

Adjust RV8(FIL1) so that the jitters of FA are minimal (2ns or less).

NOTE: If the jitters do not decrease, perform the adjustments described in the next Section, "b) Adjusting the PLL

- 2".

b) Adjusting the PLL - 2 (For adjusting RV9 and RV10)

This adjustment is made when the jitters do not decrease even when performing the adjustment described in the prior

section.

a) Although difficult, a more detailed adjustment can be made.

NOTE: Sufficient adjustment can usually be made without applying this method. Please avoid using this

method when the problem is not serious.

This adjustment is made by switching the jumper and adjusting the volume, but as there is no orientation to this adjustment,

find the optimum position by adjusting in various patterns indicated below.

Table 8.5 Setting the PLL Jumper

2PJ)2LIF(

*)K0257R(:1

)k00147R(:2

)2LIF9VRtsujdA(:3

3PJ)1LIF(

)K03398R(:1

*)k07467R(:2

)3LIF01VRtsujdA(:3

• Set JP3 to 1 and adjust RV8.

• Set JP3 to 3 and adjust RV8 and RV9.

• Set JP2 to 2 and adjust RV8 and RV9.

• Set JP2 to 3 and adjust RV8, RV9, and RV10.

* : Default Setting



(10) Adjusting during separate sync signalConfirm that the phase of the clamp pulse (TP1, CP) is between the H back porch and Hsync and is set in a position that is not

skewed. If the phase is skewed, the following problems derive, and the CP phase will need to be readjusted.

• The DC level of TP11 (A/D) wobbles in V cycle (jitters appear in the image).

• Jitters appear in the HD.

• Jitters in the PLL lock do not decrease.

Photo 8.14

Pick the trigger with TP1 (CP), and adjust the CP phase with RV3 (CP)

TP11(A/D)

TP1(CP)(Trigger)

Photo 8.15

The pulse width of CP is 0.7-0.9µs.

(Make adjustments so that the startup of CP goes within the H back porch range.)

Enlarged Photo

TP11(A/D)

TP1(CP)(Trigger)

0.7 - 0.9µs

HB.P.



(11) Adjustment during no serration pulse signalApply a trigger at TP11(A/D) fall time. Adjust RV1(VBD) so that the low width of the TP7(VBD) waveform is wider than the

SYNC width, and that it will not go in between the image phase (within the H back porch).

Adjust RV1 so that the startup of VBD goes in between the H back porch range.

Image

Photo 8.16

Adjust RV1 so that the startup of VBD goes in between the H back porch range.

H Back Porch

Photo 8.17

TP11(A/D)

TP7(VBD)(Trigger)

TP11(A/D)

TP7(VBD)(Trigger)

Enlarged Photo

4µs



(12) Adjusting the delaya) Purpose

Delay adjustment is matching the phase of the image pixel and the capture clock.

Image Signal

1 pixel

Correct density is obtained when captured at this positionImage Diagram

Timing of Capture (Startup)

Capture position changes by changing delay

Capture Clock

Set delay from the installation software with values from 0 to 255 in 0.5ns increment.

NOTE: For external clock, set values from 0 to 15 in 2ns increment.

b) Adjusting Method

Adjust video delay following the procedure below.

NOTE: Remove the oscilloscope probe from the board when making the adjustment.

1. Set approx. 12 frames for the format. If there are too many frames, the image size becomes small which will make

it difficult to find the optimum delay value.

2. Enter the setup screen of the modality controller which is to be adjusted.

Fig. 8.11 Set Up Screen



3. The screen will change to the maintenance screen by pressing the top left and bottom left corners simultaneously

for 1 second or more. Then enter the Video Test screen by pressing the arrow key on the top section of the screen.

Fig. 8.12 Video Test Screen

4. The contents of the parameter are described below.

• [INITIAL DELAYTIME] is the value of initial delay. The value set here becomes the delay time for the first

frame.

• [INTERVAL TIME] is the increased delay time per one store.

• [START] is the switch to start the video test. The screen switches to a normal screen when pressed. Different

delay images are automatically stored one frame at a time, and is printed when one page worth is stored.

5. Set the value for [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and [INTERVAL TIME].

The actual delay time is listed below.

For internal clock 0.5ns increment 0-127ns (Max)

For external clock 2ns increment 0-30ns (Max)

NOTE: For external clock, the delay range can be changed from 30ns to 60ns with the jumper setting.

To proceed with the test, first determine the [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and [INTERVAL TIME] so that they cover

the entire pixel clock cycle range, then print it out. Confirm the entire trend from the results, and find the delay

value with only a slight disturbance in the image. Next, change the delay value in detail near the value found in the

previous step, and print it out. Continue this procedure until an optimum delay value is found.

The following is an example:

1. Check the pixel clock of the modality subjected to the video test. The value is set to 55MHz in the example.

2. Calculate the cycle of the pixel clock. The value is 18.2ns (55MHz-1) in the example.

3. Divide the cycle of the pixel clock by 12. (As the format is set to 12 frames,) The value is approx. 1.5ns in

the example.



4. Input the solution obtained in Step 3 as the value for [INTERVAL TIME]. [4]=2ns is input in the example.

If this value becomes larger than [4], divide it into 2 sheets.

1st Sheet: [INITIAL DELAYTIME] = 0, [INTERVAL TIME] = 4

2nd Sheet: [INITIAL DELAYTIME] = 48 (4x12), [INTERVAL TIME] = 4

With this setting, delay has been set to the entire range.

5. Press [START] to start the video test. Be sure to remove the probe of the oscilloscope from the board when

conducting this test.

6. Find the optimum delay value from the printed image data.

7. If a sufficient image was not obtained, decrease the [INTERVAL TIME] and repeat the video test.

8. Delay can only be set at 2ns increment during external clock, so perform the video test by setting 1 for the

[INTERVAL TIME].

The relation between the print image data and delay value is described below.

For instance, when 4 is set for the [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and 5 for the [INTERVAL TIME] in a 12-frame format,

delay will be changed and stored as shown in the figure below when [START] is pressed.

Perform the video test for all video input modalities.

9. When an optimum delay value is found, set the value with the installation software.

4=2ns

19 24···

29

9=4.5ns

14=7ns

* The numbers are delay values (during internal clock).



(13) Adjusting the positionAn image may be skewed as shown in Fig. 8.13 when an image data is printed out. In such a case, refer to the figure and reset

the [H.Bp+H.Sync] and [V-backporch] values using the installation software. (Refer to Section 8.6.1(7).) Print out the result

and perform the resetting until the skew is fixed.

For interlace signal, if the top and bottom of the odd / even line printed out opposite, reset the [ODD/EVEN] values in the same

procedure. (Refer to Section 8.6.1(7).)

H.Bp+H.Sync

Output Image Area

V-backporch

Large

Large

Small

Small

Fig. 8.13 Skewed Image Position

Blank page

9. Setting the Digital I/F


The input and output digital I/F differ in parts installed and functions. However, as the configuration is nearly the same,

only the differences will be explained in the relevant sections.

9.1 Configuration

Digital I/F Unit : 1pc.

D37 IN Cable : 1pc.

D37 OUT Cable : 1pc.

D50 IN/OUT Cable : (optional)

9.2 Specifications

Unit Shape : PCI specification

Power Source : +5V (0.5A or below)

Image Memory : 1MB x 2 sides

For image size that exceeds 1MB, data can be received switching the image memory.

However, the image size in the H direction is in 4 pixel increments.

Transfer Speed : Transfers of up to 2MB/s can be sent or received.

Data Width : 8bit/12bit (can be switched with the register)

NOTE: The same board is used for digital I/F input and output. However, as the number of mounted parts (network

resistor) differ in input and output, please be careful not to mistake the two.

9.3 Block Diagram

IN and OUT are separate.

Image Memory1M

A Plane

* Memory Controller, Data Selector

Digital I/F Timing Controller

Check Pin

IN/OUT Selection

Driver/ReceiverPCIbusI/F

Image Memory1M

B Plane

PCI Bus

J4

Digital I/F

*

*

* indicates different IN/OUT operations.

* IN * OUT * IN * OUT

Fig. 9.1 Block Diagram of Digital I/F



9.4 Description of Each Part and Its Setting9.4.1 Silk diagram (1) Digital I/F Parts Layout Diagram ... Fig. 9.3

(2) Digital I/F Silk Diagram ... Fig. 9.4

NOTE : How to discriminate an input board and output board.

Judge by the number of installed RB (network resistor) and their locations.

An input board is installed with RB1 to 4. See Fig. 9.3.

An output board is installed with only RB5.

39

J440

1

2

9.4.2 Connectors

Fig. 9.2 Top Surface of the Board

J4 ... For digital I/F signal.

Pin allocation is the same for input and output.

Table 9.1 Connectors

91 71 51 31 11 9 7 5 3 1

+5D0 +6D0 +7D0 .C.N +BTS +DOM +QER +TER .C.N DNG

02 81 61 41 21 01 8 6 4 2

-5D0 -6D0 -7D0 .C.N -BTS -DOM -QER -TER .C.N .C.N

93 73 53 33 13 92 72 52 32 12

.C.N +8D0 +9D0 +01D +11D +0D0 +1D0 +2D0 +3D0 +4D0

04 83 63 43 23 03 82 62 42 22

.C.N -8D0 -9D0 -01D -11D -0D0 -1D0 -2D0 -3D0 -4D0



Digital I/F / Parts Layout Diagram (Check Pin / Jumper Pin / Array Resistor / Connector)

Check pin

Non-installed check pin (unnecessary)

Jumper pinD37 IN or D37 OUT cable is connected. Non-installed (unnecessary)Digital IN/OUT

Non-installed (fix to NORMAL with chrome wire)Digital data check pin

Install for input specification

Install for output specification

LED

Fig. 9.3 Parts Layout Diagram (Digital I/F)



Digital I/F / Silk Diagram

Fig. 9.4 Silk Diagram (Digital I/F)



9.4.3 LED(1) Checking the Board Operation

LED4(POWER) Green ... Power Source (+5V)

(2) Checking the Digital I/F OperationLED1(REQ) Orange ... Request Signal (Output)

LED2(MODE) Yellow ... Mode Signal (Input)

LED3(STROBE) Yellow ... Strobe (Clock) Signal (Input)

9.4.4 Jumpers

(1) Setting Input/OutputDigital I/F IN

Table 9.2 Jumper Setting of Digital I/F Input

Digital I/F OUT

Table 9.3 Jumper Setting of Digital I/F Output

(2) Other JumpersJP2 ... Not used.

gnitteStuptuO/tupnIehtnoerawtfosdnarepmujehtfognittesehtotgnidroccatuptuo/tupniteS

.draob1PJ

*NI:trohs2-1


.draobTUO:trohs3-2


.draob1PJ

NI:trohs2-1


.draob*TUO:trohs3-2

* : Default setting

* : Default setting



9.5 Checking the Operation During Board Abnormalities

9.5.1 Checking the operation (checking the LED)Refer to Section 9.4.3 and check the board operation from the LED.

• When LED4 is extinguished during normal condition, there is an abnormality.

LED4 OFF ... Check the power source (5V)

–>Check the power source of the main unit.

• LED1 to 3 lights one time (approx. 0.5sec) when sending digital I/F signals.

(Confirm that it is operating.)

9.5.2 Checking the power sourceThe digital I/F operates at +5V. Check +5V with a tester.

• Checking +5V

The digital I/F does not have a TP for +5V. Confirm that a lead indicated as C3 (+) is connected to +5V.

If the power is within +5V±0.05V, it is normal. If not, check the power source.



9.5.3 Errors and the locations of abnormalities(1) Digital I/F size header error (AD07)

The size of the image sent from the transfer data header is too big.

H: 8191 (1FFFH) or above

V: 65535 (FFFH) or above

1. Check the installation software.

• Image size

• Setting for the Size Header

2. Indicate the image size of the header with the controller.

Set H/V DISPLAY in the Keypad Setup screen to ON.

->Indicate the size of the image sent from the header when the image is stored with a normal screen.

3. When the indication in Step 2 is abnormal:

->The abnormality may be in the header from the diagnostic device.

->Refer to Section 9.6 and check the data of the header with a logic analyzer.

(2) Digital I/F timeout (AD02)The header was not able to receive an image data.

If the time from when Printlink releases a Request signal for a header to the time when the diagnostic device outputs the head-

er exceeds the time set in [Store Header Timeout] in the maintenance software, a timeout error will occur.


• Internal cable

• External digital cable

2. Check if the diagnostic device is ready. (Image data is not output from the diagnostic device.)

• Check if imagers are being stored after transmission is enabled.

• Check the transfer signal with a logic analyzer.

• Check if the header is output from the diagnostic device.

• Check if the time required to output a header to a request is too long. (10 sec. or less.)

3. An abnormality exists in the transfer data and cannot be received by the I/F.

• Check the transfer signal with a logic analyzer.

Does a header exists?

Is the timing of each signal normal?

4. Malfunction in the I/F board.




(3) Digital I/F memory not (A431-A438)Error in the output board.

Transmission of the image data was attempted from the main device when the frame memory was full.

1. Turn the power on again as this is an internal software error. If this error occurs frequently, upgrade the software.

(4) Digital I/F hardware (A441-A448)Transfer error of the digital I/F.

1. Perform the same checks as in Section (2) Digital I/F Timeout.



9.6 Checking the Transfer Signal of the Digital I/FThe timing of the digital I/F signal can be checked with a logic analyzer. It can be confirmed whether signals are being output by check-

ing the waveform.

9.6.1 Waveform of digital I/F signal• Transfer data of the digital I/F are digital data with parallel image data, and are sent in 1H increment.

• The image size is sent with the 1st line being the header.

• Data is sent in 1H increment, and the output side will start sending the data when the input side sets the Request signal to Hi.

• The input side obtains one image by repeating the Hi/Lo setting for Request corresponding to the number of header + V size.

• The timing of each signal differs according to the device. STROBE at 1µs cycle (1MB/s) is the standard timing.

(1) Header (1st line)

(2) Image data (number of lines for V size from the 2nd line)

REQUEST

MODE

H size=UHSx256+LHS V size=UVSx256+LVS

STROBE

DATA SOP SIZE UHS LHS UVS LVS EOP

REQUEST

1 line (1H)

MODE

SOP:0FFH IMG:003H SIZE:002H EOP:000H EOT:001H(EOT substitutes EOP for the final line.)

STROBE

DATA SOP IMG DATA DATA DATA EOP



(3) Signal definition

REQUEST : Hi when the input side is prepared for input for each 1H. Lo after sending 1H. Output is made from the

input side.

MODE : Hi when the transfer data is image data or size data. Lo when the data is a command. The output side

synchronizes to the image data and makes an output.

DATA(D0-D15) : Data line. D0-D7 is the data at 8bit. D0-D11(D15) is the data at 12(16)bit. Output is made from the

output side.

STROBE : Timing for capturing data. 1µs cycle is standard.

9.6.2 Measuring methodBy measuring the following test pins of the digital I/F with a logic analyzer, the above signals can be checked.

(1) InputTP36 ... REQUEST Signal

TP40 ... MODE Signal

TP42 ... STROBE Signal

J5-TRD0 ... D0 (Data bit0)








(2) OutputTP37 ... REQUEST Signal

TP39 ... MODE Signal

TP41 ... STROBE Signal









Digital Data

Digital Data




9.7.1 Dialog box (INPUT) to Set Modality I/F Data (Digital) For Digital In.

IN/OUT ... Displays input or output.

IF Type ... Displays the type of I/F.


Priority Size ... Set the priority order for the size.

Set : Size H and V are given priority.

Modality : The header info of modality is given priority.

Input Pixels ... Set either 8bit or 12bit as pixels from the input modality.

Output Pixels ... Set either 8bit or 12bit as output pixels.

Pixel Aspect Ratio ... Set the aspect ratio of the image. Set this item when the pixel aspect ratio of the input image is

ratio other than 1:1. When the ratio is 1:1, the default value is applied.

Size ... Input the image size of the diagnostic device. Internal test patterns are created based on this

size. Format check is also performed based on this size. Therefore, if more than one image size

exist, input the maximum image size.

H: Horizontal size of the image.

V: Vertical size of the image.

Set Reverse ... Set whether to reverse the image or not.

Normal: Does not reverse images.

Reverse: Reverses images.

Digital IF REQtoREQ Time ... Set the hardware control time for between the image capture line. For normal conditions, set

50µs. When connecting with models that generate a timeout error when the area between lines

is short such as Shimazu IDR1000, set to 500µs.

Store Delay ... Set the waiting time during store. When set to 2.0sec., all data received within 2.0sec. is stored

when the time exceeds 2.0sec.

Store Header timeout ... Set the timeout length for the header information from modality. If the operation of the diag-

nostic becomes slow, the time needs to be extended.

Store Image timeout ... Set the timeout length for receiving an image. When the image size of one frame is large, the

time needs to be extended.

Index: Set Time = Image Capacity/0.2MB

Fig. 9.5 Set Modality I/F Data (Digital) Dialog Box (INPUT)



9.7.2 Dialog box (OUTPUT) to Set Modality I/F Data (Digital) For Digital Out.

Fig. 9.6 Set Modality I/F Data (Digital) Dialog Box (OUTPUT)

IN/OUT ... Displays input or output.

IF Type ... Displays the type of I/F.


Pixels ... Set either 8bit or 12bit for pixels. Set the pixels according to the imager I/F. When 8bit and

12bit are mixed, output will be made after the pixels are converted to the value set here.

Store Header timeout ... Set the timeout length for sending header information to the imager. Apply the default value.

Digital IF Output Speed ... Set the digital output speed. Select from 0.5MB/s, 1MB/s, and 2MB/s.

Command Status timeout ... Set the length of store command timeout with the imager. The set length of time should be

longer than the total length of the time set for [Store Header timeout] and [Store Image time-

out] combined.

Store Image timeout ... Set the timeout length to send an image data.

Table 9.4 Setting for Each Maximum Image Size (1 Frame) Received by Printlink-OD

Extended Header ... When a diagnostic device in which the pixel aspect ratio of the input image is a ratio other than

1:1 is connected, the imager can be controlled by the Use setting. However, there are operating

conditions that must be checked.

tib21K1xK1-0 tib21K5.2xK2-K1xK1 tib21K5xK4-K5.2xK2

tuoemitegamIerotS

sutatSdnammoCtuoemiT

ces03

ces04

ces06

ces07

ces042

ces052



(1) Operating conditions for the extended headerPrintlink-IV, ID, HG, DV, IN: Set according to the pixel aspect ratio of the diagnostic device.

Printlink-OD : A digital output board which is 030730000B or a later version, or an on-board IC in which the version is

V1267A, V1269A, or a later version is required. The software must be V1.10 or a later version.

Li-10A, 21:

• Digital I/F AS3208-219A V9.1210 with additional 16MB Memory

• DSW 4-4 ON, DSW 2-7 ON

• FC board AS3208-214A V7.0826 with additional 64MB Memory

• DSW 13 ON, DSW 14 ON

• Print Board AS3208-212A V9.0324

• DSP AS3208-213A V8.1006

• Video file: Regius.VID

• Format file: Regius.FMT



9.8 Setting the Memory Capacity of the Driver

1. Start up Plnkmtn.exe of the install PC. For details in operation, refer to Section 6, Instructions for Using the Installation

Software.


2. Click [Server Connection (B)] in the [File] menu, input [10.32.15.x] to [Host Name/IP Address] and click [Set].


3. The screen shown in Fig. 9.9 will appear.

Fig. 9.9 Normal End Dialog Box

4. Set the memory capacity of the driver from [Work Buffer Size]. If the size of the used frame exceeds 2MB for [Digital_In] and

[Digital_Out], perform the setting by adjusting to the image size. However, the maximum value that can be set is 10MB. Set

images that exceed 10MB to10MB. For others, apply the default value of 2MB.


Blank page

Blank page

10. Setting the Digital Video I/F


10.1 Configuration

Digital Video I/F Unit: : 1pc. (consists of 2 boards)

Digital Video I/F Cable : 1pc.

Digital Video I/F Relay Cable : 1pc.

10.2 Specifications

Input Signal Digital Video Signal / 8bit *1

Composite Sync *1, *2, *3

Separate Sync (VD, HD) *1, *2, *3

*1: ECL operation level / 100Ω*2: Capable of reversing with DIP SW.

*3: Capable of switching the composite sync and separate sync with the jumper pin.

Pixel Clock Max. 60MHz

Horizontal Frequency 27.5-35kHz


Image Signal 8bit/pixel

Read Image Size Max. 2048 x 1024

Memory 2MB x 1 side

Clock Delay Max. 15ns in 1ns increment. (capable of switching with the register)

Scanning Method Capable of setting the capture of interlace/non-interlace. Capable of reversing ODD/EVEN via the reg-

ister.

Serration Pulse Capable of operating without a serration pulse. The ON/OFF of serration pulse can be switched with

the register.

1H Delay Compatible with Shimazu SCT, SMT, MAGNEX Series, and can delay 1H during EVEN field (the

switch is made with the register).

Bus Configuration PCI 32bit



10.3 Block Diagram10.3.1 Block diagram of the board

Video Signal

Sync Signal ClockClock

Frame Memory2MBMemory Board

ECL/TTLConverter

ECL/TTLConverter

32bit ConverterMemory

Controller PCI I/F

PLL

C-Sync/HD,VD

Clock

Fig. 10.1 Block Diagram of the Digital Video I/F

10.4 Description of Each Part and Its Setting

10.4.1 Silk diagram1) Digital Video I/F Parts Layout Diagram ... Fig. 10.3

2) Digital Video I/F Silk Diagram ... Fig. 10.4

3) Digital Video I/F DV Cable ... Fig. 10.5

4) Digital Video I/F Relay Cable ... Fig. 10.6

Refer to Section 8.4.1, Fig. 8.6 and 8.7 as the digital section is the same as that of the Video I/F.

10.4.2 Connectors

J1(DV IN)


J1 (Digital-Video IN) / Digital Video Signal input connector

ECL balance level/100Ω



Fig. 10.3 Parts Layout Diagram (Digital Video I/F)

SW1: Signal ReverseSW1-1: OFF Normal/ON ReverseSW1-2: OFF Normal/ON ReverseSW1-3: OFF Normal/ON Reverse

JP6:Selection of Sampling Clock1-4 Short: PLL Mode2-3 Short: Duty (Through Mode)

JP5:Choice of Sampling Clock1-4 Short: PLL Mode2-3 Short: Duty (Through Mode)

RV4

JP1:Delay of Input SyncSignal

JP2:Selection of Sync SignalShort: C-SYNCOpen: HD/VD

PLL Circuit BlockRV, RV2, RV3JP3, JP4



Fig. 10.4 Silk Diagram (Digital Video I/F)



CS0056-4397 11DPH-G3-63CP-AHDemanlangiS

.ONNIP .ONNIP

34

202

nworB 1kcalB1deR

DNGDNG

56

312

wolleY 1kcalB1deR

ATAD +0-0

78

422

neerG 1kcalB1deR

ATAD +1-1

901

532

yarG 1kcalB1deR

ATAD +2-2

1121

642

etihW 1kcalB1deR

ATAD +3-3

3141

752

nworB 2kcalB2deR

ATAD +4-4

5161

862

wolleY 2kcalB2deR

ATAD +5-5

7181

972

neerG 2kcalB2deR

ATAD +6-6

9102

0182

yarG 2kcalB2deR

ATAD +7-7

3242

2103

etihW 2kcalB2deR

CNYS +-

5262

3113

nworB 3kcalB3deR

DV +-

7282

4123

wolleY 3kcalB3deR

KLC +-

9203

5133

neerG 3kcalB3deR

DNGDNG

1323

6143

yarG 3kcalB3deR

DNGDNG

3343

7153

etihW 3kcalB3deR

V2.5-V2.5-

Fig. 10.5 DV Cable of the Digital Video I/F



1 2

.oNniP

CS0056-4397 CS0056-4397

1 1

2 2

.1ot1erawolebsnoitcennoC

33 33

43 43

Fig. 10.6 Relay Cable

1 2



10.4.3 LED(1) Check the board operation

D4(POWER) Green ... Power Source (+5V)

(2) Check the video read operationD1(LOCK) Yellow ... Lights when PLL locks.

D2(STORE) Yellow ... Lights one time (approx. 0.5sec) when the image data is stored.

D3(NO VIDEO) Red ... Lights when video signal is not input.

10.4.4 Jumpers(1) Setting performed according to different sync signals

Table 10.1 Jumper Setting of the Sync Signal System

.cnysetarapesdnacnysetisopmocfonoitceleS.DVdnaDH/CNYSCfonoitceleS

2PJ*CNYSC:TROHS

DV/DH:NEPO

.kcolcgnilpmasfonoitceleS

5PJ*edomLLP:trohs4-1

edomhguorhT:trohs3-2

6PJ*edomLLP:trohs4-1

edomhguorhT:trohs3-2

3PJ)2LIF(

*)k0233R(:1

)k00123R(:2

)2LIF2VRtsujdA(:3

4PJ)3LIF(

)k03324R(:1

*)k07414R(:2

)3LIF3VRtsujdA(:3

NOTE : Composite Sync : Separate lines (8bit signal, SYNC x 1pc.) are used for video signal and CS (composite sync).

Separate Sync : Separate lines are used for the video signal, HD, and VD (8bit signal, SYNC x 2pcs.).

(2) Selection of sampling clockSampling clock can be reproduced through the PLL circuit or output by through. For output by through, the clock duty ratio

can be changed.

Table 10.2 Jumper Setting of the Sampling Clock

NOTE : RV4 is used to adjust the changes in duty ratio.

(3) Setting the PLL (valid only when JP5 and JP6 are set to PLL mode)Change the PLL setting on the sampling clock when jitters cannot be removed and is unstable.

Table 10.3 Jumper Setting of PLL

*: Default setting

*: Default setting

*: Default setting



Jitters usually do not appear when set at default. Therefore, when the image cannot be improved after taking other measures,

change the setting.

• Description of other JP function.

JP1 ... Delay line of the input sync signal (Max. 8ns at 2ns increment)

10.4.5 Test pins

TP10 ... +5V

TP12 ... +5V (PLL power source)

TP11 ... -5.2V

TPG1-5 ... GND

TP1 (D7) ... Highest data signal

TP2 (D0) ... Lowest data signal

TP3 (V-SYNC) ... V-sync signal

TP4 (C/H-SYNC) ... C-sync or H-sync signal

TP5 (CLK) ... Clock signal

TP6 (CLK1) ... Clock signal

TP7 (O/E) ... ODD/EVEN detection signal of the interlace signal

TP8 (HD) ... Hsync signal

TP9 (VD) ... Vsync signal

TP13 (VCO) ... PLL output signal

TP14 (FA) ... 1/16 frequency dividing signal of the input clock

TP15 (FB) ... 1/16 frequency dividing signal of the PLL output signal

10.4.6 DIP SWTable 10.4 DIP SW Setting

CNYS-H/CfoytiraloP 1-1WS*lamroN:FFO

esreveR:NO

CNYS-VfoytiraloP 2-1WS*lamroN:FFO

esreveR:NO

kcolcfoytiraloP 3-1WS*lamroN:FFO

esreveR:NO

*: Default setting



10.5 Checking the Operation When Abnormality Exists on the Board

10.5.1 Checking the operation (LED operation)Perform the check by referring to Section 10.4.3.

(1) D1 (LOCK)Extinguished ... The PLL cannot be locked (cannot read the image).

1. Check the presence of the C/H-SYNC signal (TP4).

2. Check the setting for the installation software and board (jumpers, etc.).

3. Check the waveform (Hsync, presence of serration, etc.).

(2) D2 (STORE) YellowLights one time at the beginning of image input ... Normal

Does not light at the beginning of image input ... Cannot read the image.


(3) D3 (NO VIDEO) RedLit ... Cannot detect video signal. Lights when HD signal is not present.


2. Check the setting (jumper setting for separate sync, etc.).

3. Check the C/H-SYNC (TP4) of the original signal.

Check the Hsync level, waveform, and HD waveform of the original signal.

(4) D4 (POWER) GreenExtinguished ... +5V is not supplied into the board.

1. Check the board voltage (TP10).

2. Check the power source voltage of the main unit.

10.5.2 Checking the power sourceThe digital I/F requires +5V, -5.2V, and -12V.

• Check

Check the voltage at the TP on the board.

• Power supplied from the main unit

TP10 ... +5V +5V±0.05V

• Power source converted on the board

TP11 ... -5.2V -5.2V±0.05V

TP12 ... +5V (PLL power) +5V±0.05V

•±12V

Check ±12V when an abnormality exists in +5.5V or -5V.

±12V does not have a test pin. Check the voltage on the board in the following patterns.

PJ2-39, 40P (+12V) ... +12V±0.5V

PJ2-35, 36P (-12V) ... -12V±0.5V

Location of pattern: Video-Digital board

–> When +5V, ±12V is not supplied, check the voltage of the main Printlink unit.



10.5.3 Handling errors(1) D_V I/F Image in Timeout (AB17)

When it requires 1 sec. or more after storing to the end of read. (Problem with the hardware.)


• Check if the separate sync is connected properly.

2. Check the settings.

• Jumpers (presence of serration, etc.)

• Installation software

3. Abnormality in the read section.

• Check if VD (TP9) and HD (TP8) are being supplied.

4. Abnormality in the video signal (original signal).

• Check if the signal is stable.

• Check is C/H-SYNC (TP4) is output properly (stable without jitters).

(2) D_V I/F signal unrecognized (AB19)The video signal is not being input (cannot be recognized). An error is generated depending on the presence of HD signal.


2. Check the terminal resistor power supplied from the diagnostic device. -5.2V should be detected at pin J1-17 or 35.

Fig. 10.7 Digital Video I/F J1

3. Check the settings (jumper setting of the separate sync, etc.).

4. Check the original signal and C/H-SYNC (TP4).

Check the C/H-SYNC level and waveform.

5. Exchange the board.

10.5.4 Image turbulence(1) Check the waveform of the video signal.

• Check the waveform of Hsync and Vsync (jitters, serration pulse, noise).

• Check the signal level (DC level fluctuation, voltage amplitude).

• Readjust the board (jumpers).

(2) Loss of pixels• Check the memory.

• Change to another I/F.


J1-17, 35



(3) Crushed or skewed image• Check the setting (interlace/no interlace).

• Check the setting (image size in the H direction should be a multiple of 4).

• Check the signals (Hsync, Vsync).


10.6.1 Setting according to signalsPerform the following settings according to the type of video signal sent from the diagnostic device.

(1) According to different sync signals• Composite Sync (C.SYNC) ... The digital video signal and composite sync (Hsync+Vsync) are different signals.

• Separate Sync (SEP) ... The digital video signal, HD (Hsync), and VD (Vsync) are different signals.

(The changing of jumper pins is required.) Refer to Section 10.4.4.

(2) Types of video signals• Interlace / No Interlace

• Exchange the ODD field and EVEN field during interlace. Display the image at default setting and if the fields are reversed,

reverse the setting.

• Serration pulse ON/OFF

• 1H Delay ON/OFF

Set 1H or more Delay to the EVEN field with the installation software in order to support Shimazu SCT, SNT, and MAGNEX

Series.

(3) Adjusting the position of the imageSame as the items described in Chapter 8. Refer to Chapter 8.



(4) Set Modality IF Data Dialog Box (Digital Video)For Digital Video In.


I/O ... Displays input or output.

IF Type ... Displays the type of IF.

Serial Port ... Set the serial port to COM2.

Pixel Aspect Ratio ... Set the pixel aspect ratio. Set this item when the pixel aspect ratio of the input image is a ratio other

than 1:1. Apply the default setting if the ratio is 1:1.

Output Pixels ... Set either 8bit or 12bit for the output pixels.

H Delay ... Set the sync delay in the horizontal direction. 15ns can be set as the maximum in 1ns increment.

H-Total ... Input the number of entire images in the horizontal direction.




Back Porch H+sync ...Input the sum of the horizontal sync signal and horizontal back porch.


Store Delay ... Set the time to send a reply from when receiving a store command from the controller.

Interlace ... Select Interlace or No Interlace.

Interlace: Every other line of the image data is sent.

No Interlace: Image data is sent in order.

Serration ... Select ON or OFF for serration.

ON: With serration.

OFF: Without serration.


Normal : Normal

Reverse : Select when the field is reversed in the normal setting.



1H Delay ... Apply when a blank line appears in either the top or bottom even after adjusting V Back Porch.

• Set 1H Delay to OFF to adjust the ODD/EVEN setting.

• Set 1H Delay to ON when a blank line appears in either the top or bottom even after adjusting V

Back Porch.

• When set to ON, reverse the ODD/EVEN setting.

• Readjust the position with V Back Porch.

Set Reverse ... Select whether to reverse the image data or not.


Reverse : Reverse the image data.



10.6.2 Adjusting the video I/FThe procedure for adjusting the video is shown in the flow chart.

Make adjustments following the procedures below when the composite video signal is an original signal, and when serration pulse

exists. Also, when an instruction described in the chart matches your condition, be sure make the adjustment indicated. The number

in each block corresponds to the item number (in Section 10.6.3) in which the contents of adjustment is described.

1) Check original signal.

4) Adjust for separate sync signal.

3) Check ODD/EVEN.

5) Adjust serration pulse ON/OFF.

2) Adjust jumper setting and C/H-SYNC.

6) Adjust delay.

Check image.

Image turbulence with jitter, etc.:

Cannot adjust PLL:

Fine image:

8) Adjust image position.

7) Adjust PLL.

9) Adjust in through mode.End



During no interlace signal: During interlace signal:

For no serration pulse:

For separate sync signal:

Fig. 10.9 Flow Chart of Video Adjustment Procedure



10.6.3 Details of adjustments(1) Checking the original signal

1. Connect the image signal of the digital video to J1 (DV IN), and confirm that the high image data of TP1(D7) and the low

image data of TP2(D0) are normal.

2. Check whether the sync signal of TP3(V-SYNC), TP4(C/H-SYNC) is composite sync or separate sync.

(2) Setting the jumper and adjusting C/H-SYNC1. Check the original signal and set the jumper according to the original signal by referring to Section 10.4.4 (1) and (2).

2. Apply a trigger at TP4(C/H-SYNC) and adjust the jumper pin of JP1 so that the waveform of TP6(CLK1) takes the form

shown in the figure below.

TP4(C/H-SYNC)(trigger)

TP6(CLK1)

5ns-9ns

(3) Checking ODD/EVEN1. Apply a trigger at TP9 and confirm that the waveform of TP7(O/E) takes the form shown in the figure below.

(4) Adjustment for separate synca) Setting according to the different sync signals

Table 10.5 Jumper Setting for Sync Signal Systems

TP9 VD(trigger)

TP7 O/E ODD EVEN

.cnysetarapesdnacnysetisopmocfonoitceleS.DVdnaDH/CNYSCfonoitceleS

2PJ*CNYSC:TROHS

DV/DH:NEPO

* Composite Sync : Video signal and CS (composite sync) use separate lines (8bit, SYNC x 1 line).

* Separate Sync : Video signal, HD, and VD use separate lines (8bit, SYNC x 2 lines).

NOTE : Be careful not to touch the lead of IC11 when changing the jumper setting of JP2.

(5) Adjusting serration ON/OFFPerform this setting with a register.

*: Default setting



(6) Adjusting the delaya) Purpose

Delay adjustment is to match the phase of the image pixel and sampling clock.

Image Signal

1 pixel

Correct density is obtained when sampled at this positionImage Diagram

Timing of Sampling (Startup)

Sampling position changes by changing delay

Sampling Clock

Set delay from the installation software with values from 0 to 15 in 1ns increment.

b) Adjusting method

Adjust video delay following the procedure below.

NOTE: Remove the oscilloscope probe from the board when making the adjustment.

1. Set the format to approx. 12 frames. If there are too many frames, the image size becomes small and will make it

difficult to find the optimum delay value.

2. Enter the Set Up screen of the modality controller which is to be adjusted.

Fig. 10.10 Set Up Screen



3. The screen will change to the maintenance screen by pressing the top left and bottom left corners simultaneously

for 1 second or longer. Then enter the Video Test screen by pressing the arrow key on the upper section of the

screen.

Fig. 10.11 Video Test Screen

4. The contents of the parameter are described below

• [INITIAL DELAYTIME] is the initial delay value. This value becomes the delay time for the first frame.

• [INTERVAL TIME] is the increased delay time per one store.

• [START] is a button to start the video test. When this button is pressed, the screen switches to the initial screen.

Different delay images are automatically stored one frame at a time, and is printed out when all images are

stored in one page.

5. Set the value for [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and [INTERVAL TIME].

The actual delay time is listed below.

For clock 1ns increment 0-15ns (Max)

To proceed with the test, first determine the [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and [INTERVAL TIME] so that they cover

the entire range of the pixel clock cycle, then print it out. Confirm the entire trend from the results, and find a delay

value with only a slight disturbance in the image. Next, change the delay value in detail near the value found in the

previous step, and print it out. Continue this procedure until an optimum delay value is found.

The following is an example:



c) Checking method

1. Check the pixel clock of the modality subjected to the video test. The value is set to 55MHz in the example.

2. Obtain the cycle of the pixel clock. The value is 18.2ns (55MHz-1) in the example.

3. Divide the cycle of the pixel clock by 12. (As the format is set to 12 frames,) The value is approx. 1.5ns in the

example.

4. Input the solution obtained in Step 3 as the value for [INTERVAL TIME]. [4]=2ns is the value in the example. If

this value becomes larger than [4], divide it into 2 sheets.

1st Sheet: [INITIAL DELAYTIME] = 0, [INTERVAL TIME] = 4

2nd Sheet: [INITIAL DELAYTIME] = 48 (4x12), [INTERVAL TIME] = 4

With this setting, delay has been set to the entire range.

5. Press the [START] button to start the video test. Be sure to remove the probe of the oscilloscope from the board

when conducting this test.

6. Find the optimum delay value from the printed image data.

7. If a sufficient image was not obtained, decrease the [INTERVAL TIME] and repeat the video test.

The relation between the print image data and delay value is described below.

For instance, when 4 is set as the [INITIAL DELAYTIME] and 5 as the [INTERVAL TIME] in a 12-frame format,

delay will be changed and stored as shown in the figure below when [START] is pressed.

Perform the video test for all video input modalities.

8. When an optimum delay value is found, set the value with the installation software.

4=2ns

19 24···

29

9=4.5ns

14=7ns



(7) Adjusting the PLLa) Adjusting the PLL-1

Apply a trigger (start up) at TP14(FA), and make adjustments by turning RV1(FIL1) so that the relation between

TP14(FA) and TP15(FB) is displayed in waveforms shown in the diagram below, and that the amount of jitters is held

to a minimum.

TP14 (FA)(trigger)

TP15 (FB)

TP14

TP15

Enlarge this range and adjust.

Set the time axis for the oscilloscope at a small value.

This deflection is called a jitter. Increase the brightness of the oscilloscope. This deflection causes skewed pixels.

Adjust at RV1(FIL1)(trigger)

Adjust RV1 (FIL1) so that the jitter of TP15 (FB) is the minimum value (2ns or less).

* If the jitter is not minimized, perform "b) Adjusting the PLL-2".

b) Adjusting the PLL-2 (For adjusting RV2 and RV3)

This adjustment is made when the jitters do not decrease even when performing the adjustment described in the prior

section.

a) Although difficult, a more detailed adjustment can be made.

NOTE: Sufficient adjustment can usually be made without applying this method. Please avoid using this

method when there is no problem.

This adjustment is made by changing the jumper and volume, but as there is no orientation to this adjustment, find the

optimum position by adjusting in various patterns indicated below.

Table 10.6 Setting the PLL Jumper

3PJ)2LIF(

*)k0233R(:1

)k00123R(:2

)2LIF2VRtsujdA(:3

4PJ)3LIF(

)k03324R(:1

*)k07414R(:2

)3LIF3VRtsujdA(:3

• Set JP3 to 2, adjust RV1 and check for jitters.

• Set JP3 to 3, adjust RV1, RV2 and check for jitters.

• Set JP4 to 1, adjust RV1 and check for jitters.

• Set JP4 to 3, adjust RV1, RV3 and check for jitters.

*: Default setting



If no improvement can be seen, set JP5, JP6 to Through Mode and adjust RV4. If this does not solve the problem, return

the setting to the original setting as there may be a different problem.

(8) Adjusting the position of the imageProcedures are the same as that described in Chapter 8. Refer to Chapter 8.

(9) Adjusting by through modeThis adjustment is made by turning the volume and changing the duty ratio of the clock, as in the previous LI7-DV.

1. Set the jumper pins as indicated below.

JP5: 2-3 short

JP6: 2-3 short

2. Apply a trigger at TP6 (CLK1), turn RV4 (DUTY) so that TP2 (D0) is set in a waveform shown in the figure below.

TP6(CLK1)

Td

Td/2

TP2(D0)

• Adjust the phase of the clock in advance.• Adjust RV4 so that the startup of the waveform is steep.

NOTE : The R20 resistor becomes extremely hot during clock adjustment. Be careful not to burn your finger.

Blank page

Blank page

11. Setting the Video HG I/F


11.1 ConfigurationVideo HG I/F Unit : 1pc. (consists of 2 boards)

11.2 SpecificationsInputSignal CompositeVideo

Video + Composite Sync

Video + Separate Sync

Pixel Clock 80-135MHz

Horizontal Frequency 60-80kHz


Read Image Size Max. 2048 x 1024 (in 4 pixel increments to the horizontal direction)

Memory 2MB x 1 side

Jitters 2ns or less

Clock Delay Max. 7.5ns in 0.5ns increments. (Comes with function to reverse the phase.)

Resolution 8bit

S/N Ratio 42dB (±1 digit) or above

Bus Configuration PCI Bus 32bit

11.3 Block Diagram11.3.1 Block diagram of the board

Video SignalSync Signal

Analog PLL

A/D Converter32bit Converter

Frame Memory2MB

Memory Controller

Memory Board

PCI I/F

PCI Bus32bit

Fig. 11.1 Block Diagram of the Video HG I/F



11.4 Description of Each Part and Its Setting

11.4.1 Silk diagram(1) Video HG I/F Analog Section Parts Layout Diagram ... Fig. 11.3

(2) Video HG I/F Analog Section Silk Diagram ... Fig. 11.4

(3) Video HG I/F Digital Section Parts Layout Diagram ... Fig. 11.5

(4) Video HG I/F Digital Section Silk Diagram ... Fig. 11.6

11.4.2 Connectors


J1 (VS) ... Video Signal Input Connector

* 0.5-2.0Vp-p

J2 (CS/HD) ... CS (Composite Sync) Input (during composite sync)

HD (H Sync) Input Connector (during separate sync)

* TTL level (75Ω)

J3 (VD) ... VD (V Sync) Input Connector (during separate sync)

* TTL level (75Ω)

J1 J2 J3



Video HG I/F Analog Section Parts Layout Diagram (Check Pins / Jumper Pins /Volume)

Fig. 11.3 Parts Layout Diagram (Video HG I/F Analog Section)

Check Pins

Jumper Pins (default setting)

Volume

LED

Connector for Video HG-Digital board

J1 Inputs video signals

J2 CS/HD

J3 VD



Video HG I/F Analog Section Silk Diagram

Fig. 11.4 Silk Diagram (Video HG I/F Analog Section)



Video HG I/F Digital Section Parts Layout Diagram (Check Pins)

Fig. 11.5 Parts Layout Diagram (Video HG I/F Digital Section)

Check Pins

Connector for Video HG-Analog board



Video HG I/F Digital Section Silk Diagram

Fig. 11.6 Silk Diagram (Video HG I/F Digital Section)


Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USAVer.1.3 2002.01 11-7

11.4.3 LED(1) Checking the board operation

D12 (POWER) Green : Power source (+5V)

(2) Checking the video capture operationD13 (NO VIDEO) Red : Lights when no sync signal is input.

D14 (PLL LOCK) Yellow : Lights when PLL is locked.

D15 (A/D START) Yellow : Lights one time (approx. 0.5sec) when image data is stored.

11.4.4 Jumpers

(1) Setting performed according to different sync signals Set jumpers according to different sync signals as indicated in the table below.

Table 11.1 Jumper Setting of the Sync Signal System

.oNPJslangiScnyS

9PJDH

11PJDV

7PJDH.E

8PJCNYS

01PJDV.E

oediVetisopmoC TNI TNI SV

cnySetisopmoC)-(suniM TNI TNI RON PES

)+(sulP TNI TNI TNI PES

cnySetarapeS

)-(sunimDH TXE RON PES

)+(sulpDH TXE TNI PES

)-(sunimDV TXE PES RON

)+(sulpDV TXE PES TNI

)gnittesSV(gnitteStluafeD TNI TNI RON SV RON

NOTE:

* HD and VD in the table indicate silk on the board.

* Composite Video : Normal composite signal (composite signal x 1pc.).

* Composite Sync : Separate lines are used for video signal and CS (Composite Sync) (signal line x 1pc., SYNC x 1pc.).

* Separate Sync : Separate lines are used for the video signal, HD, and VD (signal line x 1pc., SYNC x 2pcs.).

Description of the above JPJP9 (HD) : Selection of INT (composite video or EXT (separate sync or composite sync) for HD.

JP11 (VD) : Selection of INT (composite video) or EXT (separate sync or composite sync) for VD.

JP7 (E.VD) : Selection of composite sync and separate sync (HD) polarity.

JP8 (SYNC) : Selection of composite video or composite sync for the sync signal.

JP10 (E.VD) : Selection of separate sync (VD) polarity.



(2) Settings according to the condition of the signal

Table 11.2 Setting Jumpers According to Video Signal Conditions

ytiralopkcolcfonoitceleS.desaercnisi1*yaledfotnuomaehtnehwdesreveR

1PJ*RON

VNI

langisoedivehtfognilpuocCD/CAfonoitceleSsdeecxeegatlovlevelkcalbehtnehwgnilpuocCAotteS ± .V4.0

3PJ*)GNILPUOCCD(*CD

)GNILPUOCCA(*CA

retlifesionehtesUtoNoD/esU.retliflanigiroehtnistsixeesionnehwesU

4PJ5PJ2*

*)esUtoNoD(RID

)esU(LIF

NOTE : DC and FIL in the table indicate silk on the board.

*1 The amount of clock delay is in a range of 0-7.5ns in 0.5ns increments. For signals with low frequency, a broader variable capacity can be

obtained by reversing the clock. (Max. 15ns)

*2 Be sure perform the same setting to JP4 and 5. (Set both to either DIR or FIL.)

Example: The clock width (width of 1 pixel) for an 80MHz signal is 12.5ns.

1. Set the delay to 0-7.5ns for the NOR setting.

2. Capture is delayed half a pixel (6.25ns) worth when set to INV. Therefore, a delay of 6.25ns can be considered.

7.5ns 12.5ns

Timing of capture (startup) is skewed half a pixel.

7.5ns

Total 13.75ns

INV

NOR

3. When delay is set to 0-7.5ns in INV, the actual range becomes 6.25-13.75ns.

–> Considering (1) and (3) above, 0-13.75ns can be set.

(3) Other jumpers

Table 11.3 Setting Other Jumpers

6PJ *nepO )desuton(tnemtsujdarofdesuniP

*: Default setting

*: Default setting



11.4.5 Descriptions of volumes

RV1 (WHT) : Adjusts the white level of the AD conversion signal.

RV2 (CMP) : Adjusts the comparator level of sync separate.

RV3 (BLK) : Adjusts the black level of the A/D conversion signal.

RV4 (SHP) : Adjusts the phase of the clamp pulse.

RV5 (SHW) : Adjusts the width of the clamp pulse.

RV6 (CPW) : Adjusts the width of the clamp pulse for sync separation.

RV7 (HDW) : Adjusts the width of the HD pulse.

RV8 (FIL) : Adjusts the filter of PLL.

11.4.6 Descriptions of test pins

(1) Power sourceTP2, 19, 24 - 30 : GND

TP20 (+5.5V-PL) : +5.5V PLL power source

TP21 (-5V-PL) : -5V PLL power source

TP31 (+5V) : +5V digital

TP32 (+12V) : +12V

TP33 (+5VA) : +5V analog

TP34 (-12V) : -12V

TP35 (-5VA) : -5V analog

TP36 (-2V) : -2V digital (ECL)

TP37 (-5VD) : -5V digital (ECL)

(2) SignalsTP1 (IN) : Input signal

TP3, 4, 5, and 7 : For checking circuits

TP6 (A/D) : A/D conversion signal

TP8 : Comparator input signal

TP9 (CMP) : Sync separate comparator level

TP10 (CP) : Clamp pulse

TP11 (SCP) : Clamp pulse for sync separate

TP12 (EXT HD) : Separate sync HD

TP13 (EXT VD) : Separate sync VD

TP14 (HD1) : Hsync signal

TP15 (VD) : Vsync signal

TP16 (SYNC) : Sync signal

TP17 and 18 : For checking a PLL circuit

TP22 (FA) : Signal that divides oscillation frequencies

TP23 (FB) : Standard signal of PLL



11.5 Checking the Operation When Abnormalities Occur on the Board

11.5.1 Checking the operation (checking the LED)Refer to Section 11.4.3 and check the LED.

(1) D12 (POWER) GreenExtinguished ... +5V signal is not supplied to the board.

1. Check the power source voltage of the main Printlink unit.

2. Check the power source of the board (TP31).

(2) D13 (NO VIDEO) RedLit ... Cannot detect video signal / Lights when HD signal is not present.


2. Check the setting (jumper setting of separate sync, etc.)

3. Check the HD1 (TP14) of the original signal. Check the Hsync level, waveform, and HD waveform of the original signal.

4. Check the COM level (TP9).


(3) D14 (PLL LOCK) YellowExtinguished ... Cannot lock PLL (Cannot read the image data).

1. Check the presence of a signal.

2. Check the setting of the installation software and board (jumper, etc.).


4. Check the waveform (the presence of Hsync and serration, etc.).

(4) D15 (A/D START) YellowLights one time (0.5sec) at the start of image input ... Normal.

Does not light at the start of image input ... Cannot read the image data.





11.5.2 Checking the Power Source+5V, -5V, +12V, -12V, -5.2V, and -2V are necessary for Video HG I/F.

Since there are many points to check, follow the order below to check TPs on the board.

1. Power supplied from the main Printlink unit

TP31(+5V) ... +5.15V±0.25V

TP32(+12V) ... +12V±0.36V

TP34(-12V) ... -12V±0.6V

2. Voltage that is converted on the board

TP33(+5VA) ... +5V±0.2V

TP34(-2V) ... -2V±0.15V

TP35(-5VA) ... -5V±0.2V

TP37(-5VD) ... -5V±0.25V

3. PLL Power source

TP20(+5.5V-PL) ... +5.5V±0.32V

TP21(-5V-PL) ... -5V±0.32V

• If there is an abnormality with the power source, check to see if the traces are short-circuited on the board.

• If there is an abnormality with TP described in 1., the power source of the main Printlink unit may have a problem. Check the

power source of the main Printlink unit and other boards.

• If there is no abnormality with TP described in 1, but an abnormality with TP described in 2. and 3., the parts on the board may

have a problem.

Fig. 11.7 Parts Layout Diagram (Video HG I/F Analog Section)

TP31(+5V)TP32(+12V)TP33(+5VA)TP34(-12V)TP35(-5VA)TP36(-2V)TP37(-5VD)

TP21(-5V-PL) TP20(+5V-PL)



11.5.3 Remedy for Error(1) V_HG I/F A/D Timeout (AC1A)

When it takes over 1 second to load data after it has been stored. (Problem with the hardware.)


• Check to see if separate sync is connected properly.

2. Check the settings.

• Settings of jumpers.

• Contents set in the installation software.

3. Abnormalities at the input section.

• Check that the PLL is locked.

• Check that the signal level of TP6 (A/D) is stable.

• Check that HD1 (TP14) and VD (TP15) are properly output.

4. Abnormalities in video signals (original signal).

• Check that the signals are stable.

• Check that Hsync and Vsync are properly output (whether they are stable without jitters).

(2) V_HG I/F signal unrecognized (AC19)When video signals are not being input. (When they cannot be recognized.)

When errors occur by the presence of an HD signal.


2. Check the settings (Jumper setting for the separate sync, etc.).

3. Check the original signal and HD1 (TP14).

The level of Hsync -> Adjust the sync separation circuit.

The waveform of Hsync -> Change TP9 by adjusting the sync separation circuit.

4. Exchange the board.



11.5.4 Turbulence of the image(1) Check the waveform of the video signal.

• Check the waveform of Hsync and Vsync (jitter, noise). -> Use a filter (JP4, JP5).

Readjust the sync separation circuit.

• Check the signal level (DC level variance, voltage amplitude). -> Set the AC/DC coupling of input (JP3).

• Readjust the board (jumper, volume).

(2) Loss of dots• Exchange the I/F.

• Check the memory.


(3) Noise• Use the filter on the board by exchanging the jumper (JP4, JP5).

• Use an external noise filter such as a humkiller.

• Change the delay and select a location with less noise.

(4) Crushed or skewed image• Check the setting (H-SIZE, V-SIZE, H-TOTAL).

• Check the signal (Hsync, Vsync).



11.5.5 Set modality I/F data (HG Video) dialog box For HG Video In.


I/O ... Indicates either input or output.

IF Type ... Indicates the IF type.


Pixel Aspect Ratio ... Set the pixel aspect ratio.

Output Pixels ... Set either 8bit or 12bit for the output pixel.

H Delay ... Set the sync delay in the horizontal direction.

For internal clock: A max. of 7.5ns can be set in 0.5ns increments.

H-Total ... Set the number of all images in the horizontal direction.




Back Porch H+Sync ... Input the total of the horizontal sync signals and horizontal back porches.


Store Delay ... Input the time from receiving a store command from the controller to sending a reply.

Interlace ... Set interlace or no interlace.

Interlace : Every other line of the image data will be sent .

No Interlace : Image data will be sent in order.


Normal: Does not reverse the line.

Reverse: Reverses the line.

Set Reverse ... Set whether or not to reverse the image data.

Normal: Does not reverse.

Reverse: Reverses the image data.




11.6.1 Procedure for the adjustment upon the installationFollow the procedure below for installation.

The number in each block corresponds to the number of item (the number in Section 11.6.2).

(1) Check original signals.

(2) Set jumpers.

(3) Adjust levels.

(4) Check or (adjust) sync separation signals.

(5) Check PLL.

(6) Adjust delay.

(7) Adjust the position of images.

Check images.

End

When the level of Hsync of the original signal is 0.2V or less

Turbulence of images such as jitters

Proper image quality

Fig. 11.9 Flow Chart for the Adjustment upon the Installation



11.6.2 Adjusting contents

(1) Checking the original signal1. Connect the video image signal to J1 (VS) and check that the input signal level of TP1 (IN) is 1V p-p.

Note: The input of signals can be made up to 0.5-2V p-p.

2. Measure the potential of black level (back porch) of the video signal.

If the potential is not within 0V±0.4V, JP3 should be AC-coupled.

3. Measure the potential difference of GND between the video HG I/F and the Printlink.

4. Check the level of Hsync (Composite video signal).

If the level is 0.2V or less, adjust the sync separation circuit.

(2) Setting jumpersCheck the original signal in the following points and set the jumpers according to Section 11.4.4 (1) and (2).

1. Composite video / separate SYNC (JP7 to 11)

2. Polarity of the SYNC signal (JP7 to 11)

3. DC level of the video signal (the voltage of black level) -> Setting the DC / AC coupling (JP3)

4. Noise of the video signal -> Setting the filter (JP4, JP5)

(3) Adjusting the levelApply a trigger at TP6 (A/D) and adjust the black level to +4VDC at RV3 (BLK) while checking the waveform. Then, adjust

the white level to +2VDC with RV1 (WHT).

Adjust the black level to +4V with RV3 (BLK), and adjust the white level to +2V with RV1 (WHT).

+4V · · RV3 (BLK)

+2V · · RV1 (WHT)

TP6(A/D)



(4) Adjusting (checking) the sync separation circuit

When the level of Hsync is 0.2 V or less, make this adjustment.

Connecting TP23 (FB) with the SYNC input on the oscilloscope, adjust RV2 (CMP) so that the relation TP9 (CMP) and TP8

become as shown in the figure below.

Make the same settings of the oscilloscope at TP9 and TP8. Especially, be sure to set the same level of the voltage range and

the GND level.

TP8 (Input waveform of the comparator)

Adjust RV2 (CMP).

TP9 (Threshold voltage of the comparator)

Note: This adjustment will affect other settings. Therefore, make readjustments for delay, and check the PLL lock.

Adjust RV2 so that the threshold voltage of TP9 is at approx. one-third from the peak of the SYNC waveform of TP8.



(5) Checking PLL

Adjusting PLL is not required under normal operations. However, when the signal speed is too slow (approx. 90MHz), re-

adjusting PLL may be needed. Therefore, be sure to check the signal speed.

Apply a trigger (startup) at TP23 (FB), and display TP23 (FB) and TP 22 (FA) as shown in the figure below.

If the jitter is 2ns or more, adjust RV8 (FIL) so that the jitter becomes 2ns or less.

TP23 (FB)(Trigger)

TP22 (FA)

TP23(Trigger)

TP22

Enlarge this area and adjust it.

Decrease the value of the time axis of the oscilloscope.

This deflection is called a jitter. Increase the brightness of the oscilloscope. This deflection is the reason for skewed pixels.

Adjust RV8 (FIL).

Adjust RV8 (FIL) so that the jitter of FA is minimized (2ns or less).



(6) Adjusting delayThe delay value of the video HG I/F is determined with the setting value of the install software and the setting of the JP1 clock

(NOR/INV).

Delay value = (Setting value of install software x 0.5ns)

Install software : 0-7.5 (0-7.5ns)

JP1 setting : NOR/INV (phase reverse function)

Delay value : 0-7.5ns (JP1 NOR)

7.5-15ns (JP1 INV)

For more detailed information on the delay value, refer to *1 in Section 11.4.4 (2).

a) Procedure

1. Check that JP1 is set to "NOR".

2. Set the format to approx. 12 frames. If the format is set to too many frames, a small image appears, which makes

it difficult to find a proper delay value.

Note: For an image with many pixels, it is difficult to check the image. So, set the small number of the

frame.

3. Touch the upper-left corner and the lower-left corner on the Set Up screen simultaneously over 1 sec. to switch into

the Maintenance screen. Then, touch the arrow key on the upper portion of the screen to enter the VIDEO TEST

screen.

On this screen, the frames can be stored while the delay values are changed automatically.

Set the delay value and touch [START] to store the frame while the delay value is increased automatically one-frame

by one-frame.

Fig. 11.10 VIDEO TEST screen

The following shows the description of each parameter.

• "INITIAL DELAYTIME" shows the delay value of the first frame.

•"INTERVAL TIME" shows the increased value of the delay value for each frame.

• Touching [START] switches into the normal screen, and stores the frames on one page automatically while the

delay value is increased one-frame by one- frame, then prints the stored frame.



4. Set "INITIAL DELAYTIME" to "0" and "INTERVAL TIME" to "1" and touch [START] to print the stored frame.

This sets the delay to 0-6ns (0.5 x 12 frames / 0.5ns increments).

* If the image is hard to see, decrease the number of the frame to make one frame larger.

5. Set JP1 to "INV".

6. Set "INITIAL DELAYTIME" to "0" and "INTERVAL TIME" to "1" and touch [START] to print the stored frame.

This sets the delay to 6-12ns (0.5 x 12 frames / 0.5ns increments).

7. Continue printing out images with the settings of JP1 and DELAYTIME, and the delay value is set up to 10ns for

100MHz (For 130MHz, 1/130MHz = 7.7ns).

8. Check the printed image with a magnifying glass, and set an optimum delay value of the frame with the install soft-

ware. Do not change JP1. Write the value of JP1 in [Memo] in the install software.

(7) Adjusting the position of the image

The printed image may be skewed as shown in Fig. 11.11. In this case, set the value of [H.Bp+H.Sync] and [V-backporch]

with the install software again, referring to the figure below. (Refer to 11.5.5.)

Print out the image repeatedly until the image appears properly.

Fig. 11.11 Improper position of image

H.Bp+H.Sync

Area of printed image

V-backporch

Large

Large

Small

Small



11.6.3 Checking and adjusting items under abnormal conditionsCheck and adjust the following items only when a proper image is not obtained after the adjustment is made upon the installation. It

is not necessary to do under normal conditions.

(1) Checking and adjusting clamp pulse

a) Pulse width of TP23 (FB) and TP11 (SCP)

Apply a trigger (fall time) at TP18, and check that the relation between TP23 (FB) and TP11 (SCP) is as shown in the

figure below. If it is not, adjust it.

• Check that the width of TP23 (FB) is narrower than that of Hsync. If it is wider, adjust RV7 (HDW) so that the

width of TP23 (FB) is narrower than that of Hsync.

• Check that the width of TP11 (S.CLAMP) is narrower than that of TP23 (FB). If it is wider, adjust RV6 (CPW)

so that the width of TP11 (S.CLAMP) is narrower than that of TP23 (FB).

TP6 (A/D)

TP23 (FB)

TP11 (SCP)

Hsync

This should be narrower than the width of Hsync.

This should be narrower than the width of TP23 (FB).

Adjust this width with RV6 (CPW).

1.0 *

1.2 *

*: Default setting

Adjust this width with RV7 (HDW).



b) Pulse of TP10 (CP)

Apply a trigger (fall time) at TP23, and check that the relation among TP23 (FB), TP10 (CP), and TP6 (A/D) is as

shown in the figure below. If it is not, adjust it.

• Check that TP10 (CP) starts up in 0.3µs or more after TP23 (FB) falls. If it starts up within 0.3µs, adjust the start-

up of TP23 (FB) with RV4 (SHP).

• Check that the Hi period of TP10 (CP) is within the back porch period of TP6 (A/D). If it is not, adjust the width

of TP10 (CP) with RV5 (SHW).

Hsync

1 *

0.3 * Adjust the startup of TP10 (CP) with RV4 (SHP).

Adjust the pulse width with RV5.

The Hi period of TP10 (CP) should be within the back porch period. (It should be as wide as possible.)

TP6 (A/D)

TP10 (CP)

TP23 (FB)

*: Default setting

Blank page

Blank page

12. Setting the Output I/F



12.1 Common Items for All OutputThe following shows the common items for all output.

• Channel/Printer Name : Input the name of a connected device.

• Connect Image : Set an imager of an output device.

• Film Type 1 : Set a film type of upper tray of the output imager.

If there is only one tray in the output imager, this setting is not valid.

• Film Type 2 : Set a film type of lower tray of the output imager.

This setting is for the output imager with only one tray.

• Stretch Base : Select the image size.


PageMax : The image size is adjusted to the largest size within one film.

Install : The image size is adjusted to the size set with the input channel (same as

the test pattern size).

• Stretch Mode : Select the method of interpolation.






12.1.1 Setting the format data fileThe format that can be selected with the Printlink controller is determined depending on the model of the currently used output imager.

The format data file for Li-7/7A/8, Li-10A, Li-21, Li-62P, Li1417D/DH, and DRYPRO722 comes with the Printlink install software

(FORMATKC.DAT).

1. Check the format that each imager connected to the Printlink can receive.

Set the format file for Li-10A and Li-21 so that the imager can receive all the formats of the image size of 640 x 512. Set the

default value for Li-7/7A/8.

2. Search a maximum image size in the modality that is input into the Printlink.

• When Li-7/7A/8 is included within the output imager;

(Maximum image size x Number of frames) > Memory capacity comes with the digital I/F of the Li-7

In the case above, the set number of frames cannot be received.

• When Li-7 is not included within the output imager;

The image data can be received as the contents of the format file that is created with MKFF12.

3. When multiple imagers are connected, only the format that all the imagers can receive can be selected. ("and" for all the

imagers should be left out.)

If the format data that Imager B can receive, but Imager A cannot, is transferred into Imager A while Imager A is used for back-

ing up Imager B, the data that Imager A cannot receive is not output. In order to prevent such case, this limitation is needed.

Click the [FORMAT] while the Change Channel Data dialog box appears.

The Set Format Data dialog box will be displayed.

Fig 12.2 Set Format Data Dialog Box



When clicking the [DEFAULT], the default format data that is set for each model of the imager on the previous screen is called.

Remove the checkmarks from the unused formats if you use the backup imager, etc.

Make the same setting for channels 2, 3, 4, and 5.

Click the [CUSTOM FORMAT] when you wish to set the custom format while Li-62P is connected.

The Set Custom Format Data dialog box will be displayed.

Fig 12.3 Set Custom Format Data Dialog Box

Note: For the setting method of the custom formats, contact the factory.



12.1.2 Setting error converting dataThe error converting data is for setting the conversion table. It is used when error codes are different when other company's imager is

connected. If you do not use other company's imager, use the default settings.

Click the [ERROR CODE] while the Change Channel Data dialog box appears.

The Set Error Code dialog box will be displayed.

Fig 12.5 Change Error Code Dialog Box

Fig 12.4 Set Error Code Dialog Box

In order to change the settings, click the number to be changed and click the [CHANGE].



12.2 Output SettingsIn order to make output settings, select the setting in the [Protocol Name] in the Change Channel Data dialog box.

1. Display the Change Channel Data dialog box.

Click the [Channel (C)] in the [Set (S)] menu in the Printlink Maintenance window.

Fig. 12.6 Set (S) menu in the Printlink Maintenance window

2. Set Toshiba IN to Channel 1.

Click Channel 1 and select [Toshiba IN] for the [Protocol Name] in the Change Channel Data dialog box. Select the protocol

in the Protocol Name that matches the connection.


Note: The Protocol is a procedure or agreement that is required for communicating with other devices. For Printlink,

one protocol is allocated to one channel.

For more detailed information on the procedure, refer to the following sections.

• 9. Setting the Digital I/F

• 12.3 HSTP Output Settings

• 12.4 DICOM PRINT Output Settings

• 12.5 DICOM STRAGE Output Settings



12.3 HSTP Output SettingsConfirm the following items with the network manager before installation.

• The IP address of the connected device

1. Set the HSTP OUT Protocol.

Setting the HSTP OUT Protocol activates the [SET] in Change Channel Data dialog box.

Click the [SET] to display the Set HSTP Data dialog box.

Fig. 12.8 Set HSTP Data Dialog Box

2. Set the item associated with the entire DICOM.

• Max Image Size H, V : Set the image display maximum size of Li-1417D/DH by the "cm".

Leave it at its default.

• Sheet Type : Leave it at its default.

• LUT Select : Leave it at its default.

• Interpolation : Leave it at its default.

• Tag Type : Leave it at its default.

• Pixel Size : Leave it at its default.

• Curve Type : Leave it at its default.

• Density Max : Leave it at its default.

• Density Min : Leave it at its default.

• Window Start/End : Leave it at its default.

• Pivot Density : Leave it at its default.

• Pivot Gray Level : Leave it at its default.

• Contrast : Leave it at its default.

• Curve Shoulder/Toe : Leave it at its default.

• Brightness : Leave it at its default.



• Nega/Posi : Leave it at its default.

• Rotate : None ... Without rotate format.

: Right ... With rotate format (right rotation).

: Left ... With rotate format (left rotation).

• Version : Set the type of Li-1417D.

Li-1417D, Li-1417DH

• TTO Retry : Leave it at its default.

• Retry Interval : Set it according to Table 12.1.

• Retry Count : Set it according to Table 12.1.

• Request Status : Set it according to Table 12.1.

Table 12.1 Retry Request Setting Examples

emanmetIseciveddetcennocforebmuN

stinu3ot1 stinu21ot4

HD7141-iL

sutatStseuqeR ces06 ces06

lavretnIyrteR ces04 ces06

tnuoCyrteR semit01 semit01

D7141-iL

sutatStseuqeR ces06 ces06

lavretnIyrteR ces41 ces41

tnuoCyrteR semit051 semit003



12.4 DICOM PRINT Output SettingsConfirm the following items with the network manager before performing the setting.


• The AE title and port number of the other party if the output source is other than Printlink.


Prohibited ports: 10, 5400, 5401, 5316, 5317

1. Set the DICOM PRINT OUT Protocol.

Setting the DICOM PRINT OUT Protocol activates the [SET] in Change Channel Data dialog box.

Click the [SET] to display the Set DICOM Data dialog box.



• Port No.: Input the port number designated by the connected device.

• PDU Size: Set the PDU size.

• Size H/V: Set the maximum value of one frame image size upon output. This is used to check the format validity.

• AE Title (SCP): Input the AE title of the connected device. A maximum of 16 characters can be set.

• AE Title (SCU): Input the AE title of your own device. If the connection is between Printlinks, the default can be used.

However, if some other devices are connected to more than one Printlink, it should be changed when a unique AE title is

required.

• Modality: Set the type of diagnostic device that is connected.

• Socket Buf: Set the socket buffer. (Default is 2048.)

• Private Data: Set whether or not to transmit the Konica private tag.



3. Perform the settings for DICOM PRINT.

• N-EVENT Port No.: When the connected device is Printlink-OD or Li-62P DICOM, perform the same setting as the N-

EVENT Port No. of the other party.

• Max Density: When the imager is directly connected to the DICOM, set the maximum density of the film.

• Output Kind: When the connected device is Konica's imager, set to BIN_XX. When connecting to other company's device,

select Processor.

• EK Mode: Set this item when the connected device is EK's imager, etc.

4. When all settings are completed, click the [OK] to return to the Change Channel Data dialog box.

This will complete setting for DICOM Print Out.

5. For information on the connection of other company's DICOM, refer to Section 7.4.2.




12.5 DICOM STORAGE Output SettingsConfirm the following items with the network manager before performing the setting.


• The AE title and port number of the other party if the output source is other than Printlink.


Prohibited ports: 10, 5400, 5401, 5316, 5317

12.5.1 DICOM STORAGE output settings1. Set the DICOM STORAGE OUT Protocol.

Setting the DICOM PRINT OUT Protocol activates the [SET] in Change Channel Data dialog box.

Click the [SET] to display the Set DICOM Data dialog box.




• Port No. : Input the port number designated by the connected device.

• PDU Size : Set the PDU size.

• Size H/V : Set the maximum value of one frame image size upon output.

This is used to check the format validity.

• AE Title (SCP) : Input the AE title of the connected device. A maximum of 16 characters can be set.

• AE Title (SCU) : Input the AE title of your own device. A unique AE title is required.

• Modality : Set the type of diagnostic device that is connected. (Refer to "Specifying Diagnostic Device Type" in

Appendix for the diagnostic type that can be used.)

• Socket Buf : Set the socket buffer. (Default is 2048.)

• Private Data : Set whether or not to transmit the Konica private tag.

3. Set the items for DICOM STORAGE.

• Conversion Type : Set an original type of output images. (This is fixed at output device.)

DV : Digitized video

DI : Digital interface

DF : Digitized film

WSD : Work station

• Image Type : Set a type of image. (This is fixed at output device.)

ORIGINAL : Original image

DERIVED : Derived image

PRIMARY : Primary captured image

SECONDARY : Secondary captured image

Set the combination above.

• Secondary Capture Device : The name of the device that converts images.

• Video Image Acquired : Original signal format of the acquired video image.

• Digital Image Manufacture : Manufacturer of capture devices

• Digital Image Acquired : Additional information of digital I/F that is used for acquiring images.

• Institution Name : The name of an institution

• Institution Address : The address of an institution

Enter the parameters above using alphanumerics (single-byte).

It is not necessary to enter the parameters that the system does not require (e.g. The parameter is fixed at the imager server).

• Output VOI LUT : Set to Cancel under normal conditions.

If set to Go, LUT data other than image data are transmitted.

• Output Name : Check the settings of the connected device, and select "ASCII Only" when the multi-byte is

not used for entering the patient name.

Note: The multi-byte is for the Japanese version only.

Select \ISO 2022 IR87\ISO 2022 IR 13 for the multi-byte.

• OCR Other 1 Use

OCR Other 2 Use : These settings are valid only when "Other 1" and "Other 2" are set to "recognized" when the

character recognition is set. These settings determine which data is allocated to the recogni

tion result. Refer to the operation of Other 1 and 2 described in Section 12.5.4.

4. When all settings are completed, click the [OK] to return to the Change Channel Data dialog box.

This will complete setting for DICOM PRINT OUT.

5. For information on the connection of other company's DICOM, refer to Section 7.4.2.



12.5.2 DICOM multi-byteSince the DICOM is a developed model from the ACR-NEMA, the valid parameter is only ASCII characters. In Japan, in order to use

Kanji or Kana, the DICOM multi-byte is devised. The following shows the procedure for using Kanji and Kana.


1. Register sets of characters.

Register characters that you wish to use in an association (each command) in advance. The default setting is ASCII charac-

ters only. To use single-byte Kana, set ISO 2022 IR13 and to use Kanji, set ISO 2022 IR87. Characters can be registered as

many as you wish, but each set of characters should be separated by "\" as a character string. Various kinds of character sets

are defined in the DICOM standards.

2. Change the sets of character (registered characters) used for each tag and output them.

Change the sets of character with the ESC sequence. When you start to enter the data of tag, the ASCII code is always select-

ed. So, if you want to use Kanji, output ESC 04 02 and then output Kanji in JIS code. If necessary, the type of characters can

be changed as frequently as you wish in each tag.

3. Since the name such as Patient Name is special, the forms below are followed.

The name should be described using three sets of characters shown below, connecting them by "=", and are output as one char-

acter string.

(Name described using a single byte) = (Name described using ideographic characters) = (Name described using phonetic char-

acters)

If the output device does not support the multi-byte output, an error occurs. So, be sure to check that the output device sup-

ports the multi-byte output before operation. The Printlink input supports the multi-byte.

12.5.3 Checking items associated with Storage upon character recognitionCheck the following items associated with DICOM Storage upon character recognition.

• Configuration of entire system

• Operation/limitation of the receiving devices

• Handling recognition errors

The following explains the checking items above.

(1) Configuration of entire systema) Which device does the Printlink output data into ?

-> Check the image viewer, manufacturer of the server, and version in order to confirm that the connection test with

the Printlink has been performed.

b) What does a user wish to do ?

-> Confirm what a user wish to do. Do not make more settings than a user expects.

A user just wants to save the data in the image server:

Search keys at the server (e.g. Only patient ID is required, etc.)

With what does a user want to search ?:

Check the usage, exposure date, reception number, and name, and set only the necessary items.

A user just wants to see with a viewer:

Recognition errors on parameters may not be a problem.

Re-exposure is required or not, etc.



(2) Operation/limitation of the receiving devicesa) What is required as a search key of data ?

-> Confirm with a manager of an image server, etc. Or ask a person in charge at a hospital what is set as a search key.

The search key should be included in patient ID, Name, and Other 1, 2.

b) Is there necessary items or parameters at the image server (viewers, etc.) ?

-> If the image is not transmitted, check to see if there are any items that work improperly at the server. Also, check

the contents of the parameters (e.g. the number of data bytes, type of characters, and special character strings, etc.).

Then, check if those contents are matched to the character recognition results.

c) Is the re-exposed image transmitted from the server ?

-> Since the parameter of the Print conditions are affected by the settings of the network controller as shown in the

previous section, perform the test to check that a proper image is output.

In order to change the Print conditions for each image, it is necessary to change them with the network controller.

d) Is LUT data needed at the image server ?

-> If necessary, set OUTPUT VOI LUT to Go with the Storage output CH.

e) Is a comparison made ?

-> Check the parameters for comparison and set them with the Printlink.

Check the operation when a comparison error occurs. Refer to (3).

f) Is the multi-byte output necessary or not ?

-> If necessary, set this item. After setting, be sure to perform the test.


g) How to deal with Study ?

-> Is there anything that can be complied into Study ? : Check the patient ID, patient name, reception number, and

association unit of DICOM.

What is a condition to change Study ? : Check the time and others when the Patient ID is changed.

(3) Handling recognition errorsa) Can output character strings contain "?" upon recognition errors ?

-> Confirm with an image server. The operations performed when the output character string contains "?" should be

clarified (e.g. The image cannot be saved; The image is integrated with other error images; No problem; Reception

is not possible until a user changes the data, etc.)

Check to see that there is no problem considering the system or a user demand.

b) How to deal with the system upon recognition errors ?

-> When recognition errors cannot be allowed:

Recognize only reliable items, such as ID. Or operate with controller input of only ID.

Even if a recognition error occurs, it can be changed before operation:

Check the result when it is stored, and change it with the controller.

Do not mind even if a recognition error occurs:

The data can be changed at the server, or a user does not mind an error since it is a viewer.



12.5.4 Operation of Other 1, 2 (Ver. 1.10)The characters are recognized at four points in a film from Ver. 1.10. In order to recognize two points except ID and NAME

properly and perform DICOM output (Storage), it is necessary to set the Printlink install software and OCR install software

properly.

Set the character recognition of Other 1, 2.

Use the same method as the recognition of ID and NAME.

Set Other 1, 2 of the DS_OUT channel of the Printlink install software.

Select the tag on the DICOM into which the recognized result is input.

Important: Since the Printlink outputs the recognized character strings as they are, the character strings should be

matched to the output form of each tag of the DICOM.

(1) Algorithm of outputUnlike the ID and NAME, the character strings in Other 1, 2 are not output as they are recognized. The internal Printlink out-

puts data in the following order (concept).

a) When the result of the recognized characters is matched to the DICOM standards;

-> Outputs the recognized result.

b) When the result of the recognized characters is not matched to the DICOM standards;

-> Outputs only the tag. (The actual data is not output.)

c) When the characters are not recognized (Character recognition: OFF), and the tag set in Other 1, 2

is always the same as the tag output from the Printlink (e.g. Study Date, etc.);

-> The data added with the Printlink is inserted into the concerned tag, and output. Currently there is a tag of fixed

output with no data (length=0). (The same operation when "None" is set into Other 1, 2.)

d) When the characters are not recognized (Character recognition: OFF), and the tag set in Other 1, 2

is the one that is not usually added with the Printlink (e.g. Accession Number, etc.):

-> Outputs only the tag. (The actual data is not output.)



(2) Operation of selectable parametersThe table below shows the output character strings.

noitingocerretcarahCsutats

sgnittesllatsnikniltnirP)2/1rehtO(

retcarahC:noitingocer

FFO

:noitingocerretcarahC)tamrofMOCID(NO

:noitingocerretcarahC)tamrofMOCID-noN(NO

DIydutS .sgatylnostuptuOdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO

.sgnirtsretcarahc.sgatylnostuptuO

rebmuNnoisseccA .sgatylnostuptuOdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


rebmuNseireS .sgatylnostuptuOdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


DInoissnimdA .sgatylnostuptuOdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


)emiT(etaDydutSemit/etadmetsyS

gnitnirpnehwdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


etaDhtriBs'tneitaP .sgatylnostuptuOdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


xeSs'tneitaP .sgatylnostuptuOdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


egAs'tneitaP .sgattuptuotonseoDdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


ecivreSgnitseuqeR .sgattuptuotonseoDdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


naicisyhPgnitseuqeR .sgattuptuotonseoD

dezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO.sgnirtsretcarahc

ehtrofsietyb-itlumehT:etoN.ylnonoisrevesenapaJ

.sgatylnostuptuO

s'naicisyhPgnirrefeRemaN

.sgatylnostuptuO

dezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO.sgnirtsretcarahc

ehtrofsietyb-itlumehT:etoN.ylnonoisrevesenapaJ

.sgatylnostuptuO

denimaxEtraPydoB .sgattuptuotonseoDdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


emaNnoitutitsnI ataddellatsnIdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


rebmunredrOrecalP .sgattuptuotonseoDdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO


rebmunredrOretliF .sgattuptuotonseoDdezingocerehtfotluserehtstuptuO




(3) Standards of each parameterThe table below shows the DICOM standards of the character recognition for each parameter. The character recognition com-

plies with both the DICOM standards below and the settings of the Printlink.

*1: Only the following character strings are valid.

SKULL, CSPINE, TSPINE, LSPINE, SSPINE, COCCYK, CHEST, CLAVICLE, BREAST, ABDOMEN, PELVIS, HIP, SHOULDER, ELBOW,

KNEE, ANKLE, HAND, FOOT, EXTREMITY, HEAD, HEART, NECK, LEG, ARM, JAW

sepytretcarahcdilaV eziS noisserpxE

DIydutS lobmyS/sciremunahplA sselrosetyb61 noitatimiloN

rebmuNnoisseccA lobmyS/sciremunahplA sselrosetyb61 noitatimiloN

rebmuNseireS -,+,9-0 sselrosetyb21 noitatimiloN

DInoissnimdA lobmyS/sciremunahplA sselrosetyb46 noitatimiloN

etaDydutS .,9-0 dexifsetyb8 ylno)etad,htnom,raey(ddmmyyyy

emiTydutS .,9-0rosetyb61rodexifsetyb8

sselaro)dnoces,etunim,ruoh(ssmmhh

xxx.ssmmhhfosetyb61mumixam

etaDhtriBs'tneitaP .,9-0 dexifsetyb8 ylno)etad,htnom,raey(ddmmyyyy

xeSs'tneitaP ylnoO,F,M dexifetyb1 )rehtO(O)elameF(F)elaM(M

egAs'tneitaP Y,M,W,D,9-0 dexifsetyb4ro,Mnnn,Wnnn,DnnnfoenoynA

,etad=D,999-000=nnn.ylnoYnnnraey=Y,htnom=M,keew=W

ecivreSgnitseuqeR lobmyS/sciremunahplA sselrosetyb46 noitatimiloN

naicisyhPgnitseuqeR lobmyS/sciremunahplA46(sselrosretcarahc46)"="hcaerofsretcarahc

noitatimiloN

emaNs'naicisyhPgnirrefeR lobmyS/sciremunahplA46(sselrosretcarahc46)"="hcaerofsretcarahc

noitatimiloN

denimaxEtraPydoB sciremunahplA sselrosetyb61 1*

emaNnoitutitsnI lobmyS/sciremunahplA sselrosetyb46 noitatimiloN

rebmunredrOrecalP lobmyS/sciremunahplA sselrosetyb61 noitatimiloN

rebmunredrOretliF lobmyS/sciremunahplA sselrosetyb61 noitatimiloN

Blank page

Blank page

13 Additional Functions

Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USA Ver. 1.1 2001.3 13-1

13.1 Multi-clients ( Modality Connections)The multi-clients function allows Printlink-IN and Printlink-OD make multiple input/output into/from Toshiba Ether and DICOM

PRINT IN. However, the limitations below have to be followed.

Limitations1. A maximum 8 channels of input and output combined is made for Printlink-IN, and 17 channels for Printlink-OD.

2. Toshiba Ether, DICOM PRINT IN and DICOM STORAGE IN cannot be used together.

3. For other company's diagnostic device, only the device that supports the multi-connection can be used. Refer to "DICOM

Connection Results Table" in the home page to see whether the device supports the multi-connection or not.

4. Printlink version should be 1.04 or later.

13.1.1 Toshiba EtherThis section shows the example of the following system.

Fig. 13.1 Example of Toshiba Ether Multiple Input System

In the system of the Printlink, determine which imager the input diagnostic device outputs the data into. Table 13.1 shows the

system example above.

Table 13.1 Setting Example

TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TOSHIBA

DRYPRO722-1

DRYPRO722-2

R1 CT1 CT2

192.168.2.10 192.168.2.11 192.168.2.12 192.168.2.13

192.168.2.20 192.168.2.21

Multi-clients setting

PRINTLINK

: Flow of data

eciveD gnitirWehtfosserddA

ecivednwoELTITEA locotorptupnI locotorptuptuO

ecivedtuptuOtrop/sserddA

IR — -/01.02.861.291 — — NIABIHSOT 31.02.861.291

1TC — -/11.02.861.291 — — NIABIHSOT 31.02.861.291

2TC — -/21.02.861.291 — — NIABIHSOT 31.02.861.291

NI-kniltnirP enoN -/31.02.861.291 UCS_KNLP_CKNIABIHSOT

)enoylnO(

TNIRPMOCIDTUO

TNIRPMOCIDTUO

0206/02.2.861.2910206/12.2.861.291

1-227ORPYRD — 0206/02.2.861.291 100P_ORPD_CKTNIRPMOCID

NI— —

2-227ORPYRD — 0206/02.2.861.291 200P_ORPD_CKTNIRPMOCID

NI— —



(1) Setting channelsIn the system example on the previous page, only one channel is used to receive from multiple clients as shown in the figure

below, instead of using three channels. Even when multiple Toshiba modalities are connected, only one channel is used.

Even when multiple Toshibamodalities are connected,only one channel is used.

Address is not required.

Fig. 13.3 Change Route Data Dialog Box Fig. 13.4 Set Route Data Dialog Box

Fig. 13.2 Set Channel Data Dialog Box

(2) Setting routesWhen multiple Toshiba modalities are connected, it is not necessary to set the address of the routes.



13.1.2 DICOM PRINT INThis section shows the example of the following system.

Fig. 13.5 Example of DICOM System

In the system of the Printlink, determine which imager the input diagnostic device outputs the data into. Table 13.2 shows the

system example above.

Table 13.2 DICOM System Example

192.168.20.12192.168.20.11

192.168.2.5

192.168.20.13

Multi-clients (Modality) setting

Printlink

: Flow of data

192.168.20.20 192.168.20.21

Printlink Printlink

-IV -IN-ID

Modality 1SOMATOM

Modality 2GCA901

Modality 3Othercompany'sDICOM

DRYPRO722-1

DRYPRO722-2

eciveD gnitirWehtfosserddA

ecivednwoELTITEA locotorptupnI locotorptuptuO

ecivedtuptuOtrop/sserddA

MOCID — -/5.2.861.291 TNIRP_MOCID — NIABIHSOT 1006/31.02.861.291

DI-kniltnirP desU -/11.2.861.291 10UCS_KNLP_CK — NIABIHSOT 2006/31.02.861.291

VI-kniltnirP desU -/21.2.861.291 10UCS_KNLP_CK — NIABIHSOT 3006/31.02.861.291

NI-kniltnirP enoN1006/31.02.861.2912006/3006/

10PCS_KNLP_CK20PCS_KNLP_CK30PCS_KNLP_CK

NITNIRPMOCIDNITNIRPMOCIDNITNIRPMOCID

TNIRPMOCIDTUO

TNIRPMOCIDTUO

0006/02.02.861.2911006/12.02.861.291

1-227ORPYRD — 00P_ORPD_CK NITNIRPMOCID — —

2-227ORPYR 09 00P_ORPD_CK NITNIRPMOCID — —

UPiasevoli

192.168.20.20/6000

UPiasevoli

192.168.20.21/6100



(1) Setting channelsFor the system example in the previous page, three channels are set for each input modality.

Fig. 13.6 Set Change Data Dialog Box

(2) Setting routesSet the output device for each input when multiple output devices are set as shown in the figure below.


13.2 Network Controller Default FunctionPurpose of use: Using the controller, set the parameters that are not transmitted from the modality of the other party with Toshiba Ether

or DICOM protocol.

Default setting items (The settings with the controller are valid when the parameters are not transmitted.)

• Priority, Medium Type, Film Destination (output place), Film Size, Smoothing Type, Border Density Trim, Configuration

Information (LUT), Contrast, Density, Glossy, and Polarity

For example, with Toshiba Ether protocol, Medium Type, Film Destination, Contrast, Density, and Glossy are not transmitted. So, the

settings with the network controller are valid.

Note: Refer to "DICOM Connection Results Table" for more detailed information on DICOM.

Multiple input channels are set in the Route setting.

Set multiple DICOMs.


Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USAVer.1.2 2001.10 13-5

13.3 Printlink-OD Backup (redundency)Purpose of use: The figure below shows the system in which the imagers of Li-10A and Li-21 serve as backups. In this

system, when a problem with Li-10A occurs while Printlink-OD-1 outputs, the queues that are accumulated in Printlink-OD-

1 are output via another route. Therefore, the Printlink-OD supports network 16 outputs (DICOM PRINT OUT, HSTP) and 1

digital output and has a maximum of 17 channels for input and output combined.

Fig. 13.8 Backup System Example

192.168.20.10

192.168.20.20 192.168.20.21

: Flow of data

192.168.20.11

Printlink Printlink

-IV-ID

Printlink-

OD-1

Printlink-

OD-2LT-01A Li-21

Backup environment



(1) Setting channelsSelect DICOM PRINT or HSTP in the Printlink-OD as shown in the figure below.

2ch: Backup for Li-62P-2

5ch: Backup from Li-62P-2

Backup between OD

Backup route


Fig. 13.9 Set Change Data Dialog Box

(2) Setting routesIn the setting below, routes 4 and 5 are the backup routes.



13.4 Bit Conversion(1) Description

This function converts the length of data for input and output. This is added from the Printlink Ver. 1.04 and the install soft-

ware Ver.1.04. When the internal Printlink performs LUT processing while the imager with 12-bit input is installed, the set-

ting of input is converted to 12 bits.

When the DRYPRO722 is installed, You must set to 12 bits. The following shows how to set to 12 bits.

The setting is made when installing the software. Select 8bits or 12 bits in [Output pixels] of all input protocol of the install

software. When 12 bits is selected, 8-bit input data is converted into 12 bits, and 12-bit input data is processed as it is.

(2) Note: Caution on connection• Perform LUT upon input.

• When performing LUT in the Printlink, change the bit conversion from 8 bits to 12 bits.

• Save 12-bit data image as 12-bit data.

• Prepare an I/F or cable for 12-bit input of Li-8, 10A, 21, 62P.



(3) Method of settingsMake all the settings with the maintenance software except connecting cables, etc.

1. Set the LUT with the maintenance software.

2. Set the Convert LUT of the channel to ON.

3. Change the Output Pixels with the input channel to 12 bits.

Now the data is saved in the bit format specified in the Output Pixels. (When set to 8 bits, the data is saved as the 8-bit

data, and set to 12 bits, as the 12-bit data.) When the settings are made as shown in Fig. 13.11, the data in the Printlink of

Video IN is saved as 12-bit data, and the data in the Printlink of the DICOM PRINT IN is also saved as 12-bit data. When

"8 bits" is specified in the DICOM PRINT IN, the 12-bit receiving data is saved as 8-bit data, and some information will

be lost.

Set DICOM Data Dialog Box

Set Modality IF Data (Video) Dialog Box

Fig. 13.11 Setting Screen

PrintLink-IV

PrintLink-OD

Modality

LUT

Ethernet

12bit 12bitLi-8

Contents of settings Contents of settings



Fig. 13.12 Conversion from 8 bits to 8 bits

(4) Compatibility with earlier versionsIf the data in the Printlink Ver. 1.03 or earlier is read with the install software Ver. 1.04, the setting of "Output pixels" is the

default value, "8 bits". In this case, set "Output pixels" to 12 bits again, and install the Printlink.

(5) The reason why the bit conversion is needed:When performing the LUT conversion, if the data lengths for input and output are the same, this will lower the levels of the

gradation. Therefore, it is necessary to convert bits. However, the bit conversion is not needed for the linear setting.

Conversion from 8 bits to 8 bits

255(8bit)

Input

Magnified

Output

121

120

152

152

0 255 (8bit)

Even when the calculated value is 152.3, since 8-bits

system does not indicate the fractional portions of the number,

152.3 is considered 152. This value is the same as the one which is obtained when the

input value is 120.

Modality 1 Li-62p

DRYPRO722

Printlink

Modality 1 Printlink

Printlink

Modality 2 Printlink

Printlink

8 bits is selected.

12bit

12bit

12bit

12bit

12bit

12bit

8bit 12bit

When the setting is not changed;

Connection example



Conversion from 8 bits to 12 bits

Fig. 13.13 Conversion from 8 bits to 12 bits

Linear setting (from 8 bits to 8 bits)

Fig. 13.14 Linear Conversion

It is necessary to convert the bits when performing the LUT processing in the Printlink as shown in the figure above. Since

converting the bits will result in producing a 12-bit image, a 12-bit I/F and cable are needed for input.

255(8bit)

Input

Magnified

Output

121

120

2423

2426

0 4095

Since more precise conversion can

be made in 12-bit setting, different result values can

be obtained.

255(8bit)

Input

Magnified

Output255 (8bit)

121

120

0120 121

Those values are always

different in the linear setting.



Fig 13.16 New System

(6) Connection exampleWhen new imagers (DRYPRO722 and DH) are added to the existing Li-8;

Existing system

Fig 13.15 Existing System

New system

PrintLink-ID

PrintLink-OD

Modality

LUT

Ethernet

8bit 8bitLi-8

PrintLink-ID

PrintLink-OD

Modality

LUTEthernet

12bit 12bit

12bit

12bit

Li-8

12-bit digital cable

DRYPRO722

1417DH

12bitI/F

Change to 12-bit setting.



(7) Exceptional caseIf 12-bit kits for Li-8 cannot be prepared, it is possible to make 8-bit setting. In this case, however, the levels of the gradation

will be lowered.

Fig 13.17 System

PrintLink-ID

PrintLink-OD

Modality

LUTEthernet

12bit 12bit

12bit

Li-8

8 bit can be set.

DRYPRO722

12bitI/F

Change to 12-bit setting.



13.5 STRETCH (Equating different image sizes in the same page)(1) Function

When different image sizes are stored in the same page, the image sizes are equated and output.

(2) SettingsAll settings are performed in the maintenance software.

1. Select "OFF" for [Image Size Check] of the input channel.

2. Select the image size (Stretch Base) from the following three modes:


PageMax : The image size is adjusted to the largest size within one page.

Install : The image size is adjusted to the size set in the input channel (same as the test pattern size).

3. Select the Stretch Mode of the output channel from the following three modes:




The STRETCH function is executed when an output is produced. The settings above do not affect the stored image size. Each

output channel has a basic MODE.

Figure 13.18 Change Channel Data (DIGITAL IN) Dialog Box



Fig. 13.21 STRETCH (1280 x 1024)

Figure 13.19 Change Channel Data Dialog Box

(3) Stretch ratioIf the length-to-width ratio of the image before stretching is different from that after stretching, the smaller scaling factor is

selected.

• 512 x 512 -> 1024 x 1024

Width: The scaling factor is twice. (=1024/512)

Length: The scaling factor is twice. (=1024/512)

Both scaling factors are the same; therefore the image is magnified by twice.

Fig. 13.20 STRETCH (1024 x 1024)

• 512 x 512 -> 1280 x 1024

Width: The scaling factor is twice. (=1024/512)

Length: The scaling factor is 2.5 times. (=1280/512)

The smaller scaling factor, twice, is selected.

The image is centered longitudinally. The data of 00 is in the remaining space.

512

512

1024

1024

512

512

1280

1024

1024



13.6 Conversion from STORAGE to PRINTThe Printlink outputs the STORAGE input data to each imager.

This function is valid only when the Printlink-IN or -OD with the network input is used.

Fig. 13.23 Print Example

Fig. 13.22 Conversion from STORAGE to PRINT

(1) SettingsSet the STORAGE input channel and output channel and set them as the route settings.

Printlink automatically checks if those setting are set as the routes, and outputs them properly.

(2) Print timingSince there is no concept of format/print for STORAGE input, the following timing is considered as the separation of pages.

a) When the association of STORAGE input ends.

b) When all the formats set with the network controller are filled.

Timing for printing is the end of the association of the STORAGE input. Assuming that the Printlink operates with the

setting of one association equating to one study, when the one association ends, several pages are printed out.

Note: When the formats are sent from the Konica DICOM, they are ignored.

(3) Print conditionsThe print conditions are the ones set with the network controller.

Note: The conditions of Konica DICOM are ignored.

(4) Print example

STORAGE inputPrintlink-IN,OD

PRINT output (DIGITAL, HSTP, DICOM)

STORAGE inputPrintlink-IN,OD

PRINT output (DIGITAL, HSTP, DICOM)

First page Four frames

Second page Four frames

Third page Three frames

When the association ends, these are printed out together as a study.

One association = 11 imagesSetting of network controller = 2 x 2

Blank page



Setting the route means to set the input and output of a data, and it defines which channel data is input and which channel it is output.

The ratio of the route input and output is usually 1 to 1.

1. Display the Set Route Data dialog box.

Click [Route (C)] under the [Set (S)] menu in the Printlink Maintenance window.

2. Set the numbers for input and output.

Display the [Change Route Data] dialog box by double-clicking 1 for Route ID in the [Set Route Data] dialog box or by click-

ing [OK].

NOTE: The [Channel Set Data] dialog will appear along with the [Set Route Data] dialog box so that the set con-

dition of the channel could be confirmed upon setting the route.

Fig. 14.1 Channel Route Data Dialog Box

3. Individual settings

• Route ID

The route number is displayed.

• Route Name

Input the route name. The name is displayed in Output Modality of the controller.

• Input

Set the input channel. For network input, set the IP address of the other party.

• Output

Set the output channel. For network output, set the IP address of the other party.

NOTE: The second column in output is for setting 2 simultaneous outputs. This is not used normally, but it should

be set when filing while making an output with systems such as the filing system.



Fig. 14.2 Example of a Change Route Data Setting

4. Click [OK] when all setting are completed and return to the [Change Channel Data] dialog box.

The route setting has now been completed.

Input Channel

Output Channel

IP Address

Blank page

Blank page

15. Saving and Sending Data


15.1 Saving and Sending DataThe methods to save and send data are indicated below.

1. Save the installed data in a file when the settings are completed.

The [Save Data File] dialog box shown in Fig. 15.1 will appear by clicking [Save As (A)] under the [File] menu in the [Printlink

Maintenance] window. All installed data that have been set up to this point will be saved by inputting the name of the Save

Data File and clicking [Set].

Fig. 15.1 Save Data File Dialog Box

2. When the file is saved, send the set data to the main Printlink unit.

Click [PC-> Printlink (P)] under the [File] menu in the [Printlink Maintenance] window. A dialog box confirming the IP

address of the connected device and the direction of data transmission will appear.

Fig. 15.2 Confirmation Dialog Box

3. After confirming the IP address of the destination and distinguishing transmission or reception, click [OK].

Fig. 15.3 Sending Data Window

Setting data using an installation software has now been completed.

15. Saving and Sending Data


Set the output I/F and input I/F by leaving the installation software activated. Saving and sending the set data will result in the same

way as when doing them after the input I/F setting has been completed. However, if the installation software is closed without saving

and sending the data, the set data will be lost. Therefore, try to save and send every now and then.

15.2 Procedures for reinstallation1. Start up Plnkmtn.exe.

2. Select [Open (O)] in the [File] menu.

Fig. 15.4 Printlink File Menu

3. The previous data file will be loaded. Inputting a file name is required at this time.

4. Select [PC-> Printlink (P)] in the [File] menu, and send the data file to Printlink.

Blank page

Blank page

16. Controller (Keypad) Settings


In order to make various settings on the controller, it is necessary to connect the controller with the Printlink main unit and

to insert the input interface.

16.1 Setting jumpersOpen the controller and set the jumpers.

The upper portion of the controller (on the LCD side) is fixed with the two screws and the hooks near the front.

Table 16.1 Setting the Jumpers of the Controller

*1: The settings should be matched to the those of the diagnostic device. Refer to the manual for the diagnostic device.

*2: This is a default setting.

2PJC232-SR 2-1 2* rellortnocehtdnatinuniamkniltnirPehtneewteblevellangisehT

tonsignittesA224-SRehttahtetoN(.C232-SRehthtiwdexifsi).desuA224-SR NEPO

3PJC232-SR 2-1 2* sirellortnoctsohehtnehwdesusitahtlevellangisehtsteS

1*.detcennocA224-SR 4-3

16. Controller Settings


Fig. 16.2 SET UP Screen

16.2 Setting Parameters on the Maintenance Setup ScreenEnter the Maintenance Setup screen and make settings of various kinds of parameters.

(1) When the Printlink controller starts up properly, the READY (normal) screen shown inFig. 16.1 appears.

Fig. 16.1 READY Screen

(2) Touch SET UP to display the SET UP screen shown in Fig. 16.2.



(3) Touch the upper-left and lower-left corners on the SET UP screen simultaneously over1 second to enter the GENERAL SET UP screen shown in Fig. 16.2 above.Do not show a user how to enter the GENERAL SET UP screen.

1) GENERAL SET UP screen

Set the bin of the sorter, the smooth, the number of the film of the magazine.

*1: This setting is for MAXIMUM SORTER or MINIMUM SORTER.

The range of the number of the sorter bin to be used can be specified with the used controller.

Ex) In order to use only bins 2, 3, and 4 with the controller, set the parameters as follows:

MAXIMUM SORTER = 6 - Not yet avail. in USA

MINIMUM SORTER = 2

Note: Do not set that MINIMUM SORTER value > MAXIMUM SORTER value.

Bin numbers that cannot be used are shaded on the SET UP screen.

.oN )elpmaxE(yalpsiD noitpircseD

1 HTOOMSMUMIXAM .neercsNOITIDNOCTNIRPehtnoHTOOMSfoyalpsidforebmunehtteS

2 RETROSMUMIXAM 1*.desuebotnibretrosehtforebmunehtnotimilreppuehtteS

3 RETROSMUMINIM 1*.desuebotnibretrosehtforebmunehtnotimilrewolehtteS

4 YLPPUSRETNUOCro,D7141-iL,P26-iLehtnehW(.enizagamylppusehtnismlifforebmunehtteS

).edamebtonnacgnittessiht,rellortnocehtsadesusi12-iL

5 EVIECERRETNUOCro,D7141-iL,P26-iLehtnehW(.enizagameviecerehtnismlifforebmunehtteS


6 PUTESDI .neercsPUTESDIehtotnisehctiwsyekRCOehtgnihcuoT

7 KO .sraeppaneercsYDAERehtdna,ataddeyalpsidehtsezilaniF

8 LECNAC .egnahcerofebatadehtstesdnaataddeyalpsidehtslecnaC

9 –< .neercsTSETOEDIVehtotnisehctiwS

01 >– .neercsPUTESDAPYEKehtotnisehctiwS

Fig. 16.3 GENERAL SET UP Screen

Table 16.2 GENERAL SET UP Settings



2) ID SETUP screen

Make the various kinds of settings of the character recognition function.

*1: When the EDIT on the FUNCTION screen is set to ON, this setting takes effect.

*2: When the MESS (P-ID) on the PRINT CONDITION screen is set to ON, this setting takes effect. When the SELECT ID INPUT is selected,

this setting is fixed to ON. Note that the MANUALSTAMP ENABLE on the ADDITION SETUP screen is set to ON, the setting can be changed.

*3: The setting can be made from 1 to 64. The set value can be set up to the maximum number of the format frames. When the OCR on the FUNC-

TION screen is set to ON (any other than OFF), this setting takes effect.

Ex) When the format is six frames and the set value is 12, the sixth frame (the last frame) will be affected.

Fig 16.4 ID SETUP Screen

Table 16.3 ID SETUP Settings


1 TUPNIDITCELESDIneewteb)gnittesTUPNIDI(rellortnocehtmorftupniehtfognittesehttceleS

.EMANdna

2 TUPNIDIREHTONAtonsretcarahcehtsezingocertaht)tlusernoitingocerretcarahc("TLUSER"tceleS

1*."RAELC"ro1.oNnidetceles

3 EMANPMATSMLIF 2*.pmatsehttceffaEMANfotlusernoitingocerretcarahcehtsekaM

4 DIPMATSMLIF 2*.pmatsehttceffaDIfotlusernoitingocerretcarahcehtsekaM

5 RCONOREBMUNEMARFrellortnocehT.tlusernoitingocerretcarahcehtgniyalpsidrofgnimitehtteS

ehtforebmunehtretfatinuniamkniltnirPehtnotlusernoitingocerehtsyalpsid3*.derotssignittessihtnideificepssemarf

6 KO .sraeppaneercsPUTESLARENEGehtdna,ataddeyalpsidehtsezilaniF



3) KEYPAD SETUP screen

After the settings are complete, go to the next screen by pressing the arrow key on the portion of the screen, and con-

tinue setting. By pressing the arrow key, the settings are finalized.

Fig. 16.5 KEYPAD SETUP Screen

Table 16.4 KEYPAD SETUP Settings


1 EMITTIAW01ot0(neercsYDAERehtotneercspugnimrawehtmorfemitgnihctiwsehtteS

.).nim

2 .WSLACOL .rellortnocehthtiwdetcennocsiWSlacolehtnehwNOotteS

3 LANRUOJ .neercsATADLANRUOJehtotnisehctiwsRORREehtgnisserP

4 YALEDEROTSteS(.derotssiegamitxenehtnehwotderotssiegamiehtnehwmorfemitehtteS

).ecivedcitsongaidhcaerofmetisiht

5 YALPSIDV/H

sihtnehW.tceffesekatgnittessiht,enolatigidasiF/IdetcennocehtnehwylnOehtfoeziseht,neercsYDAERehtnoderotssiegamiehtdnaNOottessignittes

.rellortnocehtnodeyalpsidsiderutpacebotegami.noitallatsnitademrofrepsitsetanehwylnognittessihtesU:etoN

6 THGILKCAB .thgil-kcabehtfossenthgirbehtslortnoC



9 –< .neercsPUTESLARENEGehtotnisehctiwS

01 >– .neercsPUTESNOITIDDAehtotnisehctiwS



4) JOURNAL DATA (error log) screen

This screen shows historic records when a synchronous error (I/F TIMEOUT, etc.) occurs.

Up to 5 synchronous errors that have occurred during the past 10 days are displayed in order of occurrence (filled from

the left).

Up to 5 synchronous errors that have occurred before the past 10 days are displayed in order of occurrence (filled from the

left).

Table 16.5 JOURNAL DATA Setting

Fig. 16.6 JOURNAL DATA Screen


1 KO .neercsPUTESDAPYEKehtotnisehctiwS



5) ADDITION SETUP Screen

Since this setting is different from the original specification, make this setting only when a user requests.


tinue setting.

Fig. 16.7 ADDITION SETUP Screen Fig. 16.8 ADDITION SETUP 2 Screen

Table 16.6 ADDITION SETUP Settings

*1: Select from 03, 05, 10, 20, and 30 sec.


1EUNITNOC

LANGISRRE.tceffesekatgnittessiht,NOottesnehW.ylsuounitnocpeebrorrenasdnuoS

2 EMITLAVRETNIRREEUNITNOCnehW.ylsuounitnocpeebrorrenagnidnuosfolavretniehtteS

1*.tceffesekatgnittessiht,NOottessiLANGIS

3EGAPRAELC

RORRENO

ehteteledottonrorehtehwgnimrifnocneercsehtyalpsidottonrorehtehwteSEGAPSIHTFFORAELC",NOottesnehW.sruccororrenahcihwniegap

yltceridsikniltnirPehtnehW.FFOsignittestluafedehT.deyalpsidsi"ON/SEYgnittessiht,ecivedtuptuokniltnirPehttuohtiwretnirpMOCIDehthtiwdetcennoc

.NOottessi

4 REZZUBEMARFDNEsiyekemarftsalehtnehwdednuossihcihw,peebaetarapesottonrorehtehwteS

eht,NOottesnehW.dnuospeebehtgnignahcybspeeberotsrehtomorf,tupni.degnahcsi,derotssiemarftsalehtnehwdednuossitahtpeeb

5 YCNEGREMEniylnodesusignittessihT.tratstoh/dlocehtsmrofreprorellortnocehtsezilaitinI

.ycnegremena

6PMATSLAUNAM

ELBANE

EMAN/DIPMATSMLIFehtfognittesFFO/NOehtekamottonrorehtehwteSsiht,NOottesnehW.FFOsignittestluafedehT.dilavneercsPUTESDIehtno

.tceffesekatgnittes

7EVASGOL

EDOM

htiwnoitacinummocehtfosdrocercirotsihehtgnivasrofedomdnammocehtteS.tinuniamkniltnirPehtnirellortnoctsoheht

.1signittestluafedehT).dnammocGOLehteussitonseoD(.sdrocercirotsihehtevastonseoD...FFO

.atadynasierehtfi.nim1yrevednammocGOLehtseussI...1







6) EMERGENCY SETUP screen

This function is used in an emergency, such as when the Printlink main unit does not work due to some reason.

Note: Touching all the keys over 1 sec. makes them take effect.

Fig. 16.9 EMERGENCY SETUP Screen

Table 16.7 EMERGENCY SETUP Setting


1 TRATSDLOC .niagakniltnirPehtpustratsdnaegapehtllasraelC

2 TRATSTOH .niagakniltnirPehtpustratsdna,egaptnerrucehtfollasraelC

3 RAELCMARehtpustratsdna,).tluafedehtotteseraseulavtesehtllA(rellortnocehtsezilaitinI

.niagakniltnirP



7) VIDEO TEST Screen

This screen is used to find an optimum delay value when the video I/F is installed. If you do not wish to make a test,

go to the next screen by pressing the arrow key on the portion of the screen , and continue setting. By pressing the

START key, the video test starts.

Fig. 16.10 VIDEO TEST screen

Table 16.8 VIDEO TEST Settings


1 YALEDLAITINI .emarftsrifehtfoeulavyaledehtteS

2 EMITLAVRETNI .erotshcaerofyaledehtfoeulavdesaercniehtteS

3 TRATS

.stratstsetoedivadna,neercsYDAERehtotnisehctiwssihtgnihcuoT.ecnavdanitamrofehtteS•

.yllacitamotuaderotseraemarfhcaerofyaledtnereffidehthtiwsegamiehT•.yllacitamotuatuodetnirpsiti,derotssiegapenonoegamiehtretfA•



6 .neercsPUTESNOITIDDAehtotnisehctiwS

7 .neercsPUTESLARENEGehtotnisehctiwS–>

<–



Fig. 16.12 SET UP Screen

16.3 Setting Parameters on the Maintenance Setup Screen of the Network Controller

Enter the Maintenance Setup screen and make settings of various kinds of parameters.

(1) When the Printlink controller starts up properly, the READY (normal) screen shown inFig. 16.11 appears.

Fig. 16.11 READY Screen

(2) Touch SET UP to display the SET UP screen shown in Fig. 16.12.



(3) Touch the upper-left and lower-left corners on the SET UP screen simultaneously over1 second to enter the GENERAL SET UP screen shown in Fig. 16.13.Do not show a user how to enter the GENERAL SET UP screen.

1) GENERAL SET UP screen

Set the bin of the sorter, the smooth, the number of the film of the magazine. After the settings are complete, go to the

next screen by pressing the arrow key on the portion of the screen, and continue setting.

*1: This setting is for MAXIMUM SORTER or MINIMUM SORTER.

The range of the number of the sorter bin to be used can be specified with the used controller.

Ex) In order to use only bins 2, 3, and 4 with the controller, set the parameters as follows:

MAXIMUM SORTER = 4

MINIMUM SORTER = 2

Note: Do not set that MINIMUM SORTER value > MAXIMUM SORTER value.

The bin numbers that cannot be used are shaded on the SET UP screen.

Fig. 16.13 GENERAL SET UP Screen

Table 16.9 GENERAL SET UP Settings


1 HTOOMSMUMIXAM .neercsNOITIDNOCTNIRPehtnoHTOOMSfoyalpsidforebmunehtteS

2 RETROSMUMIXAM 1*.desuebotnibretrosehtforebmunehtnotimilreppuehtteS

3 RETROSMUMINIM 1*.desuebotnibretrosehtforebmunehtnotimilrewolehtteS

4 YLPPUSRETNUOCro,D7141-iL,P26-iLehtnehW(.enizagamylppusehtnismlifforebmunehtteS


5 EVIECERRETNUOCro,D7141-iL,P26-iLehtnehW(.enizagameviecerehtnismlifforebmunehtteS


6PSDHSERFER

LAVRETNI01ot1morfsutatstnirproerotsehtgniwenerrofyalpsidehtfolavretniehttceleS

.ces



9 .neercsPUTESYALPSDYEKehtotnisehctiwS

01 .neercsPUTESDAPYEKehtotnisehctiwS–>

<–



2) KEYPAD SETUP screen

Make the various kinds of settings of the controller. After the settings are complete, go to the next screen by pressing

the arrow key on the portion of the screen, and continue setting.

Fig 16.14 KEYPAD SETUP Screen

Table 16.10 KEYPAD SETUP Settings


1 EMITTIAW01ot0(neercsYDAERehtotneercspugnimrawehtmorfemitgnihctiwsehtteS

.).nim

2 .WSLACOL .rellortnocehthtiwdetcennocsiWSlacolehtnehwNOotteS

3 PUTESDI .neercsPUTESDIehtotnisehctiwsRCOehtgnisserP

4 YALEDEROTS.derotsebnacegamitxenehtnehwotderotssiegamiehtnehwmorfemitehtteS

).ecivedcitsongaidhcaerofmetisihtteS(

5 YALPSIDV/H .dedahssitI.rellortnockrowtenehthtiwedamebtonnacgnittessihT

6 THGILKCAB .thgil-kcabehtfossenthgirbehtslortnoC



9 .neercsPUTESLARENEGehtotnisehctiwS

01 .neercsPUTESNOITIDDAehtotnisehctiwS–>

<–



3) ID SET UP Screen

Make the various kinds of settings of the character recognition function.

*1: When the MESS (P-ID) on the PRINT CONDITION screen is set to ON, this setting takes effect.

Fig 16.15 ID SET UP Screen

Table 16.11 ID SET UP Settings


1 EMANPMATS 1*.pmatsehttceffaEMANfotlusernoitingocerretcarahcehtekamotNOotteS

2 DIPMATS 1*.pmatsehttceffaDIfotlusernoitingocerretcarahcehtekamotNOotteS

3 KO .sraeppaneercsPUTESDAPYEKehtdna,ataddeyalpsidehtsezilaniF



4) ADDITION SETUP Screen


tinue setting.

Fig. 16.16 ADDITION SET UP Screen

Table 16.12 ADDITION SET UP Settings


1 LANGISRREEUNITNOC .tceffesekatgnittessiht,NOottesnehW.ylsuounitnocpeebrorrenasdnuoS

2 EMITLAVRETNIRREEUNITNOCnehW.ylsuounitnocpeebrorrenagnidnuosfolavretniehtteS

.tceffesekatgnittessiht,NOottessiLANGIS

3 RORRENOEGAPRAELC

ehteteledottonrorehtehwgnimrifnocneercsehtyalpsidottonrorehtehwteSEGAPSIHTFFORAELC",NOottesnehW.sruccororrenahcihwniegap

yltceridsikniltnirPehtnehW.FFOsignittestluafedehT.deyalpsidsi"ON/SEYsiht,ecivedtuptuoehtfomuidemehttuohtiwretnirpMOCIDehthtiwdetcennoc

.NOottessignittes


5EMITQNELAVRETNI

)CES(ehtfolortnocnoitacinummocehtniYDAERotYSUBmorfeulavtuo-emitehtteS

).snoitidnoclamronrednugnittestluafedehtesU(.tinuniamkniltnirP

6 TNUOCQNELAVRETNItluafedehtesU(.evobatuo-emitehtretfayrterehtgniussirofeulavtnuocehtteS

).snoitidnoclamronrednugnittes

7 .neercsPUTESYALPSDYEKehtotnisehctiwS

8 .neercsPUTESDAPYEKehtotnisehctiwS–>

<–



5) KEYDSPLAY SETUP screen

This function sets the key of the print condition setting of the controller to enable or disable. This screen can disable

the print conditions that can be set from the input modality connected in the network for each item.

By pressing each item, it is highlighted and disabled. After the settings are complete, go to the next screen by press-

ing the arrow key on the portion of the screen, and continue setting.

Fig. 16.17 KEYDSPLAY SETUP Screen

Table 16.13 KEYDSPLAY SETUP Setting


1 YTILADOMTUPNIPUTESehtnoteseratahtkrowtenehtniseitiladomtupniforebmunehtteS

.neercs


3 .neercsPUTESNOITIDDAehtotnisehctiwS

4 .neercsPUTESLARENEGehtotnisehctiwS–>

<–

Blank page

17. Host Controller Settings


17.1 Parts Required For Installation(1) Host controller kits

a) File for operating the host controller for download

The files are different depending on the manufacturers and models of the diagnostic devices connected to the Printlink.

The following shows the types of the file. (The number followed "v" shows the Version No.)

• Host I/F Toshiba toshiv110.bin

• Host I/F X-TENSION xtenv110.bin - also Toshiba

• Host I/F Hitachi hitav110.bin

• Host I/F SHIMADZU shimav110.bin

• Host I/F YOKOGAWA ymsv110.bin - GE

• Host I/F Siemens smsv110.bin -spci set to Li10a or Li21a camera

• Host I/F Konica kcpv110.bin -connect to Konica CR

• MP host I/F232C/422A mpv110.bin -3M 831 & 952

b) Host internal cables

The cables are different depending on the communication specifications of the connected diagnostic devices. The fol-

lowing shows the cable types.

• Host 232C internal cable

• Host 422A internal cable

• MP Host 232C internal cable

• MP Host 422A internal cable

(2) Extension cablesThe extension cables to be required change depending on the types of the kits.

(3) Male/female converterSome diagnostic devices require a male/female converter.

(4) Bushing receptor for the host controllerThis part comes with the controller.

(5) Binding bandThis band is for protecting the host cables.



17.2 How To Connect Cables and Set Jumpers This section describes how to open the upper cover of the Printlink controller and to set the jumpers.

Note: The upper cover of the Printlink controller (on the LCD side) is fixed with the two screws at the rear of the main

unit and the hooks near the front.

At the bottom of the controller, the board shown in Fig. 17.1 is attached.

Fig. 17.2 How To Remove the Bushing Receptor

Fig. 17.1 Controller Board and Connectors

1. Remove the screws that fix the bushing receptor as shown in Fig. 17.2, and detach the bushing receptor from the Printlink con-

troller enclosure. Note that it is necessary to remove the cable connected to the Printlink from the bushing receptor before

removing the bushing receptor. In order to remove the cable from the bushing receptor, press the claw on the bushing attached

to the cable.

J4(HOS232C)

Host controller cable232C connection

Host controller cable422A connection

Setting the jumpers:232C: Pins 1 and 2 should be short-circuited.422A: Pins 3 and 4 should be short-circuited.

10

9

1

1

1 23

4

J3(HOS422)

JP3

Screws

DIPSW1(Refer to 15.3.4.)

DIPSW2(Refer to 15.3.4.)

Controller

Remove the bushing receptor.

Remove the screws.

Press the claws.

Bushing receptor

Bushing



Fig. 17.5 Bushing Receptor

2. Pass one end of the host controller cable (for both RS-232C and RS-422A) that is attached to the ground cable through the

right hole on the Printlink controller (viewed from the internal controller). (See Fig. 17.3.)

Fig. 17.3 Cable Passed Though the Right Hole

3. Attach the binding band at the position approx. 3mm away from the heat-shrinkable tubing. If the binding band is not attached,

the signal lines come out of the controller, or they rub against the bushing when the cable is pulled. So, be sure to attach the

binding band.

Fig 17.4 Binding Band and Heat-Shrinkable Tubing

4. Pass the cable connected to the Printlink through the left hole on the bushing receptor for the host controller (viewed from the

internal Printlink), and pass the host controller cable (for both RS-232C and RS-422A) through the right hole.

Host controller cable

Width: approx. 3mm

Heat-shrinkable tubing

Binding band

Signal lines

On the controller side(Inside)

Busing receptor viewed from the side

Note: Check the orientation of the bushing receptor.Busing receptor

(Outside)



Fig. 17.8 Bushing Receptor and Enclosure

5. Hook the claw at the bushing on the bushing receptor as shown in Fig 17.6. In order to do so, press the bushing from the out-

side into the inside. Orient the claw sideways when pressing the bushing; otherwise, (e.g. when the claw is in a vertical posi-

tion, etc.) the bottom of the claw may not hook on the receptor.

Fig. 17.6 Bushing Receptor

6. Slowly pull the host controller cable (for both RS-232C and RS-422A) from the outside of the controller so that the binding

band contacts the bushing. Pull the cable connected to the Printlink in a similar manner.

Fig 17.7 Cable and Bushing Receptor

7. Attach the bushing receptor through which the two cables pass, to the controller enclosure as shown in Fig 17.8 and tighten

the screws.

Bushing

ClawPressed

The claw should be hooked on the right and left sides of the receptor.

They should be contacted each other.

Tighten the screws.

Bushing receptor



8. Connect the connector to the controller board.

i) When the host controller cable for RS-232C (with 10 pins) is used;

Connect the cable to the connector of the silk HOS232C on the board, and fix the ground cable with the screw. Short-

circuit pins 1 and 2 of the jumper (JP3). (Default Setting)

Fig 17.9 Connection of RS-232C Host Controller Cable

ii) When the host controller cable for RS-422A (with 9 pins) is used;

Connect the cable to the connector of the silk HOS422A on the board, and fix the ground cable with the screw. Short-

circuit pins 3 and 4 of the jumper (JP3). (Default Setting)

Fig 17.10 Connection of RS-422A Host Controller Cable

9. Attach the upper cover and fix it with the screws.

10. Connect the extension cable for the host controller to the host controller cable, and connect the cable to the diagnostic device

to be used.

11. Do not exchange the ROM. By downloading the file for operating the host controller, the file is transferred to FLASH ROM.

This will complete the connection of the host controller cable and the settings of the jumper.

1 23

4

Connect to this connector.

Tighten the screw (fixing the ground cable).

123

4

Connect to this connector.

Tighten the screw (fixing the ground cable).



17.3 Configuration of Host Controller17.3.1 ConfigurationThe configuration of the host controller differs depending on the device to be connected. The host controller is connected to the diag-

nostic device via the controller as the connection of the imager.

The following is required for each host controller kit.

(1) Controller internal cable• For RS-232C

• For RS-422A

(2) Host extension cable• For RS-232C

• For RS-422A

Some other parts may be required for some types of the diagnostic device.

For switching between RS-232C and RS-422A, use the jumper (JP3).

(3) Bushing receptor for the controller (For two harnesses)Comes with the controller as standards.

17.3.2 Connection

Fig.17-11 Host Controller Connection

J2

J3

J1

J4JP2

JP3

DIPSW1

DIPSW2

EPROM

Host RS-232C cable

Host RS-422A cable

Host extension cable

RS-422A extension cable Diagnostic

device

Diagnostic device

I/F board

Image data cable

Selectable between

RS-232C and RS-422A



17.3.3 Assignment of pins(1) Host RS-232C

Table 17.1 Assignment of RS-232C Pins

(2) Host RS-422ATable 17.2 Assignment of RS-422A Pins

17.3.4 Settings of DIPSW/jumpers(1) DIPSW1 Default setting: Mode B (S-1: ON)

Table 17.3 List of DIPSW1 Settings

(2) DIPSW2 Default setting: Mode B (S-3, 4: ON)Table 17.4 List of DIPSW2 Settings

(3) Jumper pin settingsTable 17.5 List of Jumper Pin Settings

*1: EPROM is not mounted.

*1: The KEYPAD control is only for RS-232C. (RS-422A cannot be used.)

langisdraoB DxT DxR DNG RTD RSD C.N 1WS SW2 W3S DNG

rotcennocdraoB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01

rotcennocbusD 2 3 7 6 02 .C.N 41 51 61 71

langisdraoB +DxT -DxT +DxR -DxR +RTD -RTD +RSD -RSD .G.S

rotcennocdraoB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

rotcennocbusD 61 71 41 51 32 42 12 22 7

hctiwSedoM

1-S 2-S 3-S 4-S krameR

A FFO FFO FFO FFO 1*edomtoobMORHSALF

B NO FFO FFO FFO edomlamron/daolnwoD

C FFO NO FFO FFO edomypocHSALF>-MOR

D FFO FFO FFO NO edomgubeD

hctiwSedoM

1-S 2-S 3-S 4-S krameR

A NO FFO FFO FFO edomtset-flesrellortnoC

B FFO FFO NO NO edomlamroN

metignitteS gnitteS gnittestluafeD

1PJpukcabyrettaBNO detiucric-trohS O

FFO nepO

1*2PJlortnocDAPYEK C232-SR detiucric-trohS O

A224-SR nepO

3PJlortnoctsoH C232-SR detiucric-trohs2dna1 O

A224-SR detiucric-trohs4dna3

Technical Support

For Remote FootSwitch operation Connect to SW2 and GND on Host RS-232c connector J4 (pins 8 & 10)



17.3.5 Checking operationsCheck the following points when a problem occurs during the operation of the host controller.

• Check the connection.

• Check the settings of the controller on the Maintenance Setup Screen.

• Check the connection of the line monitor. (Refer to the next section when RS-422A is used.)

How to connect the line monitor when the communication level is RS-422A:

The settings and jigs below are needed when the communication level is switched into RS-422A.

(Note that this connection method can be used only when the line monitor LE-1000, 2000, and 3000 made by SEKISUI is

used.)

(1) Jigs• Adapter for RS-422A (With the monitor cable and relay cable)

OP-2B (Made by SEKISUI)

• Converting cable for RS-422A line monitor (Refer to the figure below for the pin layout.)

Fig. 17.12 Cable Pin Layout for RS-422A Line Monitor Converting Cable

(2) SettingsThe same procedure should be followed for both the host cable and the controller cable.

• Cable layout

Fig. 17.13 Connection of Cables

• Setting the line monitor

1. Power the line monitor and press the MENU.

2. Select the CONDITION in 3.

3. Go to the condition menu, and select the OPTION PORT SELECT in 4.

4. Since the port is set with RS-232C when RS-232C is used, the setting of the OPTION will be selected.

Any operation procedure other than the above is the same as that with RS-232C.

D sub 25-pin femaleD sub 25-pin male

D sub 9-pin male D sub 9-pin female

+12V 10 10 +12V +12V 11 11 +12VGND 18 18 GNDGND 19 19 GNDSG 7 7 SGRXD+ 14 14 RXD+RXD- 15 15 RXD-TXD+ 16 16 TXD+TXD- 17 17 TXD-

7 6 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5

D sub 25-pin

Note: D sub 25-pin is connected to the OPTION side.

Male FemaleD sub 25-pin

Male Female

MaleFemale

MaleFemale

Relay cable

Relay cable

D sub 9-pin

D sub 9-pinMonitor cable

422A Adapter(OP-2B) Line monitor



17.4 Printlink Host Controller Settings(1) Enter the Maintenance Setup screen.

From the SETUP screen ,Touch the upper-left and lower-left portions on the Setup screen simultaneously over 1 sec.

to enter the Maintenance Setup screen.

(2) Make the host controller settings on the HOST TYPE SETUP screen and the HOSTSETUP screen.After the settings are complete, touch OK on the upper-right position on the screen to return to the READY screen. Now you

can operate the Printlink controller with the renewed settings. In order to make other settings, touch the arrow key to change

the screen, then continue making the settings. By touching the arrow key, the settings are finalized.

After making the setting for each parameter, go to the SETUP 2/2 screen, and click ON for the HOST CONTROL.

Fig. 17.14 SETUP screen

AUTO PRINT Must be OFF when using Host Control.



• Host setup setting contents (common items)

Table 17.6 HOST TYPE SETUP/HOST SETUP Settings

PUTESEPYTTSOHehtfoMORfoepytehtnognidnepedsegnahcsihT(

).rellortnoctsoh

sasevrestahtecivedcitsongaidehtfosgnitteS.rellortnoctsoheht

ehtfoepytehtotdehctamebdluohssihT.ecivedcitsongaid

PUTESTSOH YTIRUCES syekelbarepoehtfosnoitatimilehtfosgnitteS.elbarepoerasyekehtllA.1

.elbarepotonsiyekEROTSehT.2tonerasyekTNIRPdnaEROTSehT.3

.elbarepoerasyekVERPdna,TNIRP,EROTSehT.4

.elbarepoton

YALED ehtmorfnoitpecererotsehtfolavretniehtteSotnoissimsnarterotsehtotecivedcitsongaid

)sm001:tinU(.regamieht

ETATOR ehtotstuptuoehtllaehtnehwNOotteS."etator"otteseraregami

ehtotstuptuoehtllaehtnehwFFOotteS."etator"ottestoneraregami

ERONGINOITPOTSOH ehtfodnammocgnittesehtrofFFO/NOtceleS,tuL,ytisneD,tsartnoC(snoitidnoctnirp

citsongaidehtmorf)redroB,mirT,isoP/ageN.ecived

selbasiD:NO).delbaneerarellortnocehtfosgnittesehT(

selbanE:FFO).delbasiderarellortnocehtfosgnittesehT(

ERONGIEZISMLIF fodnammocgnittesehtrofFFO/NOehttceleS.ecivedcitsongaidehtmorfezismlifeht

selbasiD:NOselbanE:FFO

ERONGIEPYTEZISMLIF ehtdnaezismlifehterongitonrorehtehwteS.ecivedcitsongaidehtmorfdeificepsepyt

)selbasiD(serongI:NOepytehtdnaezismlifehtswolloF:FFO

)selbanE(.ecivedcitsongaidehtmorfdeificeps

LATAFRORREENIZAGAM rorreenizagamadnestonrorehtehwteS.ecivedcitsongaidehtoteciton

).snoitidnoclamronrednutessiFFO(.ecitonasdneS:NO

.ecitonadnestonseoD:FFO



17.4.1 Printlink host I/F Toshiba (Ver. 1.10) settings

Fig. 17.15 HOST TYPE SETUP Screen Fig 17.16 HOST SETUP Screen

• Communication conditions

Baud rate 9600

Stop bit 1

Data bit 7

Parity even

• Applied model

X-Force

X-Peed

X-X Vigon

X-X isio

AUKLET

FLEXAERT

VISART

• Host setup

Set the Delay value to 03.

Set the CT.

Set the MR.




Baud rate 9600

Stop bit 1

Data bit 8

Parity even

• Applied model

Toshiba X-TENSION ... Set the X-TENSION. -CT

17.4.2 Printlink host I/F X-TENSION (Ver. 1.10) settings




17.4.3 Printlink host I/F Hitachi (Ver. 1.10) settings



Baud rate 4800

Stop bit 1

Data bit 8

Parity even

• Applied model

W-2000

W-3000

W-950SR



17.4.4 Printlink host I/F SHIMADZU (Ver. 1.10) settings



Baud rate 2400

Stop bit 2

Data bit 8

Parity odd

• Applied model

SCT-3000,4000 -CT

SCT-4800 -CT

SCT-5000 -CT

IDR-1000 -RF

Set the SIMADZU.



17.4.5 Printlink host I/F YOKOGAWA - GE (Ver. 1.10) settings



Baud rate 1200

Stop bit 2

Data bit 8

Parity odd

• Applied model

Prospeed

Lemage

Vertex

Lumimex

Eµ

Set the YOKOGAWA.



17.4.6 Printlink host I/F Siemens (Ver. 1.10) settings


Fig 17.27 HOST SETUP 2 Screen

HOST SETUP 2 Screen

You can convert the setting of Sharp/Medium Smth/Smooth of the device to the Smooth value of the controller.

For example, when you set the Sharp to 2, Medium Smth to 3, Smooth to 4, and you set the Medium Smth from the device,

the Smooth value of the controller will be 3. Likewise, when the Sharp is set to 2, the Smooth value will be 4.

When Df is set, the setting value of the controller always takes effect.

ROTATE

Takes effect when the FILM SIZE IGNORE is set to ON.

ON ... ROTATE for all.

OFF ... Disables ROTATE for all.

MAGAZINE ERR TO HOST

Set whether or not to send a notice of the errors associated with the magazine such as the film empty, etc.

ON ... Sends a notice.

OFF ... Does not send a notice.

PRINT COPY INTERVAL

The default setting is 20 sec.

The settings above are set to the default when the applied model is selected on the HOST TYPE SETUP screen.




Baud rate 2400

Stop bit 2

Data bit 7

Parity odd

• Communication conditions (PICKER/SHIMADZU POLARIS/ECLIPSE)

Baud rate 9600

Stop bit 1

Data bit 8

Parity NONE

• Applied model

MAG/PLS4 ... MAGNETOM series

SOMATOM series

SOMATOM-AR series

SOMATOM-PLUS4

MAGIC-VIEW

FLUROSPT ... FLUROSPT series ... Set the FLUROSPT.

SOM-PLUS ... SOMATOM-PLUS (old type) ... Set the SOM-PLUS.

PICKER ... PICKER/SHIMADZU ECLIPSE

Note: When the host controller is started up with this version, the RESET key is displayed on the SETUP key on the

READY screen. This key changes the HOST from OFF to ON on the SETUP screen automatically (re-con-

nection of the communication circuit). The communication with the host cannot be made when the RESET key

is highlighted. (This key is not used under normal conditions.)

Set the MAG/PLS4.



17.4.7 Printlink host I/F KONICA (Ver. 1.10) settings


• Communication conditions (MIU, REGIUS, FO-20)

Baud rate 9600

Stop bit 1

Data bit 8

Parity even

• Communication conditions (SCT-7000, DAR3000 (DIGTEX-PRO))

Baud rate 2400

Stop bit 1

Data bit 7

Parity even

• Applied model

MIU ... Set the MIU.

DICOM PRO ... Set the MIU.

REGIUS ... Set the REGIUS - Konica CR

FO-20 ... Set the FO-20.

SHIMADZU SCT-7000 ... Set the SCT-7000.

If you wish to set the ROTATE with this setting, select the ROTATE (1x1) on the format setting screen

in advance.

SHIMADZU DAR-3000 ... Set the DAR-3000. (DIGITEX-PRO) If you wish to set the ROTATE with this setting, select the

ROTATE (1x1) on the format setting screen in advance.

Printlink-OD ... Set the PRINTLINK.

Li-62P ... Set the BKUP-62P.



17.4.8 Printlink MP host I/F 232C (Ver. 1.10) / 422A (Ver. 1.10) settings 3M


Fig 17.32 HOST SETUP 2 Screen


Baud rate 1200

Stop bit 1

Data bit 8

Parity even

FORMAT IMAGE

LANDSCAPE

ASYNC ERROR

SEND TO HOST

RQS STATUS

ALWAYS RDY

SEPARATOR

FMT FILM

JOURNAL

... When set to ON, the image will be in landscape orientation.

This function converts from 3 x 4 to 4 x 3, and the format of 4 x 3 is taken effect with the install soft-

ware.

... Set whether or not to send a notice of asynchronous error to the device. When set to ON, a notice is sent.

... Set whether or not to fix the reply for the RQS command to "RDY". When set to ON, "RDY" is always

selected.

... Leave it at its default setting.

... Refer to Section 17.4.9.

... In order to switch into the JOURNAL DATA screen (14.6), touch the ERROR/OPERATE.



• Applied models

MP952 ... GE Advantage Windows V1.2.6

Signa Horizon Hispeed

Signa Advantage

Signa Contour/Profile

Horizon LX

Advantage Windows SG

Advantex DRS, DSX, DLX

Hispeed Advantage SG QXI

ADVANCE PET

SHIMADZU PRISM 2000/3000

MP831 ... Toshiba EPS

Hitachi DRS-1000X

MPPHI ... PHILIPS EASY VISION

GYROSCAN

Hitachi DFA-ViR

AIRIS II

GE Precio DRS, DSX

SHIMADZU CTS-20SP DYNAVISION

MPHSA ...GE Hispeed Advantage RP/SP

MPOTH ...GE Advantage Windows EK version

ADW2.0 ...GE Advantage Windows Ver.2.0 / 3.1

Advantage Workstation

DR 2000 ...Hitachi DR-2000 (HIPACS)

Note: Set DR2000 only when Li-62P and DICOM are connected.

When the connection of the Printlink-ID-> Printlink-OD-> Li-62P is made, MP952 should

be selected.



17.4.9 Hitachi HIPACS/DR2000H Host Controller Settings(1) Preliminary checking

Confirm the image size, the number of the frames, and the ON/OFF of gray scale (GS) of the device with a user. According

to those, select the necessary custom format files from Table 17.7 in the installation settings of the Printlink.

Table 17.7 Custom Format and File Name

Fig 17.33 Data Area of Image File

For example, when the image size is set to 512, the number of frame is set to 1, 2, 4, and 6, and the gray scale is set to ON,

you should select "DR1.DAT" as a file name.

Note that any combination of the formats other than the above cannot be set.

emaneliFtamrofmotsuC

ezisegamIB215,B023,B652

ezisegamIB4201

ezisegamIB8402

)SG,DI(TAD.1RD)DI(TAD.2RD

02,21,6,4,2,1 02,21,6,4,2,1 6,4,2,1


02,21,6,4 02,21,9,6,4,2,1 9,6,4,2,1

)SG,SI(TAD.5RD)DI(TAD.6RD

02,21,9,6 02,21,9,6,4,2,1 9,6,4,2,1


02,21,9,6,4 21,9,6,4,2,1 9,6,4,2,1

Image area Image area

ID GS ID

*ID,GS *ID



Fig. 17.34 HOST TYPE SETUP Screen

(2) Settings with Printlink install softwarei) Set the "Connect Imager" to "Li-62P DICOM" in the Change Channel Data dialog box.

ii) Click the DEFAULT in the Set Custom Format Data dialog box, then click Browse, and select the

target custom format file name (e.g. DR1.DAT).

iii) Select the PC->Printlink in the File menu and transfer the data to the Printlink.

(3) Setting the controlleri) Enter the Maintenance Setup screen (by touching upper-left and lower left portions on the Setup

screen simultaneously over 1 sec.). Select DR2000 on the HOST TYPE SETUP screen.



ii) Set the FMT SETUP on the HOST SETUP screen.

Fig. 17.35 HOST SETUP Screen

Set the FMT SETUP according to the target custom format file name. In the example, since "DR1.DAT" is selected,

"01" should be set in the FMT SETUP field with "-" and "+". It is not necessary to set others.

iii) Finally, set the HOST to ON on the SETUP screen, then the setting of the host controller will be

complete.

(4) CautionsIf the file name set with the Printlink install software and the number set on the controller do not match, an error will occur or

abnormal image will be obtained. Therefore, be sure to set correct data. After setting, output all the formats and confirm that

they are set properly.

Blank page

18. System Layout Example


Fig. 18.1 System Layout Example

This section describes the system layout example, assuming that the three input and four output systems are connected.

192.168.2.20

Printlink-installed PC

Printlink-IV

Printlink-ID

Printlink-IN

Printlinkcontroller

Printlinkcontroller

Diagnostic deviceGCA901

Diagnostic deviceSOMATOM

Printlinknetwork controller

Digital signal

Video signalDiagnostic device

FLEXART

192.168.2.10 192.168.2.11 192.168.2.12 192.168.2.13

192.168.2.17192.168.2.16192.168.2.15192.168.2.14Printlink

-OD

Li-21

Li-62pDICOM

Li-1417DHLi-21 controller

Filingsystem



18.1 Set the Route for Input Printlink, Imager, and Filing DeviceThis section describes how to determine the imagers or filing devices into which the input diagnostic device (in the example, GCA901,

SOMATOM, FLEXART) outputs the data. The output destination should be the imagers: one is used under normal conditions and the

other that serves as backup.

In the example on the previous page, the imagers that receive the image sent from GCA901 should be as follows:

Normal conditions : Li-21 (Printlink-OD)

For backup : Li-62P (DICOM), Li-1417DH

For filing : Filing device

The imagers that receive the image sent from SOMATOM should be as follows:

Normal conditions : Li-62P (DICOM)

For backup : Li-21 (Printlink-OD), Li-1417DH

The imagers that receive the image sent from FLEXART should be as follows:

Normal conditions : Li-1417DH

For backup : Li-21 (Printlink-OD), Li-62P (DICOM)

The table below shows the results above.

Name Protocol IP address Port No.

Printlink-IV Input GCA901 VIDEO_IN

192.168.2.10 Output 1 Li-21 DICOM_PRINT_OUT 192.168.2.14 6100

Output 2 Li-62P DICOM_PRINT_OUT 192.168.2.15 6100

Output 3 Li1417DH HSTP_OUT 192.168.2.16

Output 4 Filing DICOM_STORAGE_OUT 192.168.2.17 6100

Printlink-ID Input SOMATOM DIGITAL_IN



Output 3 Li1417DH HSTP_OU 192.168.2.16

Printlink-IN Input FLEXART TOSHIBA_IN 192.168.2.13



Output 3 Li1417DH HSTP_OU 192.168.2.16

Printlink-OD Input 1 GCA901 DICOM_PRINT_IN 192.168.2.10 6100

Input 2 SOMATOM DICOM_PRINT_IN 192.168.2.11 6101

Input 3 FLEXART DICOM_PRINT_IN 192.168.2.12 6102

Output Li-21 DIGITAL_OUT



For Printlink -IV, the setting should be made as follows:


Printlink-IV Input GCA901 VIDEO_IN



Output 3 Li-1417DH HSTP_OUT 192.168.2.16

Output 4 Filing DICOM_STORAGE_OUT 192.168.2.17 6100

1. Click [1] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE].

2. Enter "GCA901" of a diagnostic device name in the [Channel/Printer Name].

3. Click the [VIDEO IN] on the list in the [Protocol Name] box.

4. Enter the default data that is printed on the film in the [Stamp Message] box.

Ex) A hospital name and a diagnostic device name


The above settings can be made for only the input modalities.

A maximum of 52 characters (single-byte) can be entered. The stamp description set here will be displayed on the Printlink con-

troller. The stamp description set in the install software cannot be changed on the ID input screen of the Printlink controller.

The number of characters that can be entered on the Printlink controller is (32characters) — (the number of characters set in the

install software). In the above example, since 15 characters (Konica Hospital) are entered, the number of input characters on the

Printlink controller will be 17 characters ((32characters) — (15characters)).

Note that the stamp description set here cannot be transferred to the Li-10A as the Li-10A cannot receive it. The stamp descrip-

tion set in the Li-10A will be output.



If you wish to set the LUT of the imager to the linear and perform the LUT processing with the Printlink, click the [ON] for the

[Convert LUT]. Click the [OFF] if you wish to select the basic operation. When set to [ON], multiple imagers can be connected,

which makes it easier to set the LUT upon backup. For more detailed information, refer to the later part of this section.

• OCR Default NAME (Valid when the Character Recognition is set to ON):

Enter the default name of the result of the character recognition.

• OCR Default ID (Valid when the Character Recognition is set to ON):

Enter the default ID of the result of the character recognition.

• OCR Study (Valid when the Character Recognition is set to ON):

Set the ON/OFF setting of Study by the Character Recognition.

• OCR Study Timeout (Valid when the Character Recognition is set to ON)

Set the Study Timeout by the Character Recognition. During Study, this is a waiting time for the next store. Register the queue

in Timeout.

5. Click the [SET] and place a checkmark in the box of the [COM2] of the [Serial Port].


For settings of the other video input parameters, refer to Chapter 8.

6. Click the [OK].



7. Likewise, set channels 2 to 5.

• Click [2] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE].

• Click the [DICOM PRINT OUT] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box.

• Click the [Li-21] in the list in the [Connect Imager] box.



• Click the [DICOM PRINT OUT] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box.

• Click the [Li-62P DICOM] in the list in the [Connect Imager] box.


• Click the [HSTP OUT (Li-1417)] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box.



• Click the [DICOM STORAGE OUT] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box.


For setting output protocol, refer to "12. Setting the Output I/F".

Since the Printlink-ID and -IN are the input devices, make the settings for them in the same way as for Printlink-IV.



Since the Printlink-OD is an output device of the Printlink, it serves a print server with multiple inputs and one digital output.

For Printlink -OD, the setting should be made as follows:


Printlink-OD Input 1 GCA901 DICOM_PRINT_IN 192.168.2.10 6100

192.168.2.14 Input 2 SOMATOM DICOM_PRINT_IN 192.168.2.11 6101

Input 3 FLEXART DICOM_PRINT_IN 192.168.2.12 6102

Output Li-21 DIGITAL_OUT

1. Click [1] in the [Channel], then click the [CHANGE].

2. Enter "GCA901" of a diagnostic device name in the [Channel/Printer Name].

3. Click the [DICOM PRINT IN] on the list in the [Protocol Name] box.

4. Since the [Stamp Message] is set with the input device of the Printlink, it is not necessary to set.

5. It is not necessary to set the [Convert LUT], [OCR Study], [OCR Study Timeout], [OCR Default ID], [OCR Default NAME],

like [Stamp Message].

6. Click the [SET] and place a checkmark in the box of the [COM2] of the [Serial Port]. For settings of the other DICOM para-

meters, refer to Chapter 12.

7. Click the [OK].

8. Likewise, set channels 2 to 4.


• Enter "SOMATOM" of a diagnostic device name in the [Channel/Printer Name] box.

• Click the [DICOM PRINT IN] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box.


• Enter [FLEXART] of a diagnostic device name in the [Channel/Printer Name] box.

• Click the [DICOM PRINT IN] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box.


• Click the [DIGITAL OUT] in the list in the [Protocol Name] box.


9. Click the [SET] and place a checkmark in the box of the [COM1] of the [Serial Port]. For settings of the other DIGITAL OUT

parameters, refer to Chapter 12.



18.2 Route ID SettingsThis section describes how to set the Route ID. The Route ID means the data flow from an input channel to an output channel defined

by the channel number of the input/output and the IP address.

1. When the diagnostic image is output from the GCA901 to the Li-21 in the example, the input/output channels are 1 and 2.

INPUT: 1

OUTPUT1: 2 192.168.2.14

OUTPUT2: 0

The channels above are the route by which the image is output from the GCA901 to the Li-21. Multiple output imagers from

the input modality can be defined.

Likewise, from GCA901 to Li-62P

INPUT: 1

OUTPUT1: 3 192.168.2.15

OUTPUT2: 0

Likewise, from GCA901 to Li-1417DH

INPUT: 1

OUTPUT1: 4 192.168.2.16

OUTPUT2: 0

Likewise, from GCA901 to Filing

INPUT: 1

OUTPUT1: 5 192.168.2.17

OUTPUT2: 0

Likewise, from GCA901 to Li-21 and Filing 2 output

INPUT: 1

OUTPUT1: 2 192.168.2.14

OUTPUT2: 5 192.168.2.17

2. From the output imagers determined in Step 1, select one to be set as the default after installation, and make its route an "active

route".

3. Name each route determined in Step 1. A maximum 8 characters (single-byte) can be set for the route name. This name will

appear as "OUTPUT Imager" when the output destination is switched on the Printlink controller. Therefore, the name that is

easy to understand for a user (the name of the output imager, etc.) should be given. In the example, the output imager name

is given to the route name.



Fig 18.5 Set Route Data Dialog Box

Fig 18.6 Change Route Data Dialog Box



Set the Route ID for the Printlink-OD.

1. Multiple input devices can be defined for an output imager.

From GCA901 to Li-21

INPUT: 1 192.168.2.10

OUTPUT1: 4

OUTPUT2: 0

From SOMATOM to Li-21

INPUT: 1 192.168.2.11

OUTPUT1: 4

OUTPUT2: 0

From FLEXART to Li-21

INPUT: 1 192.168.2.13

OUTPUT1: 4

OUTPUT2: 0

2. From the input modalities determined in Step 1, select one to be set as the default after installation, and make its route an

"active route".

3. Name each route determined in Step 1. A maximum 8 characters (single-byte) can be set for the route name. This name will

appear as "INPUT Modality" when the input device is switched on the Printlink controller. Therefore, the name that is easy

to understand for a user (the name of the modality, etc.) should be given. In the example, the modality name is given to the

route name.

Fig. 18.7 Change Route Data Dialog Box

4. Send the setting data above to the Printlink. This will complete the setting of the system.

Blank page

19. Setting the Character Recognition


19.1 Character RecognitionThe character recognition means that the name and ID described on the film that is read from the input modality such as the video,

digital and network, or the information (Other 1 and 2) that can be set with the DICOM STORAGE, are read from the image data. The

read data is affected on the stamp on the film, and is used as the directory name for saving images in the system or as a search key for

searching the image.

19.2 Algorithm of Character RecognitionIn order to perform the character recognition, it is necessary to register the bit patterns of the alphanumerics, symbols, and Kana char-

acters as a dictionary file in advance. (The Kana characters are for the Japanese version only.) Since the background and characters

have to be separated on an image, a pixel value (threshold) for separating those should be also registered. This is called a binary logic,

and the background and the characters are converted into the data values of 0 and 255 using this threshold. The character recognition

routine is performed as 8-bit data. Therefore, a 12-bit image is converted into an 8-bit image.

There are some methods to separate characters from the image data. Basically, when there is a spacing of more than one pixel between

characters, the spacing is recognized as a character. When the bit patterns on the input image data is matched to those in the dictio-

nary, characters are recognized properly.

Since the positions of characters on the film are fixed, it is necessary to register this position data in advance.

The file that contains the data to be registered in advance for the character recognition is called the character recognition install data

(mji file). This file is set with the character recognition install software, and is transferred with the Printlink maintenance software.

19.3 Limitations of Character RecognitionSome errors may occur upon the character recognition due to the following reasons: characters cannot be separated from other images

because of overlapping; similar characters such as ' I 'and ' 1 ' are set to the same bit pattern; there is noise of video signals.

Basically, the character string to be recognized is one line. Therefore, the character recognition may not be performed properly when

a character string has multiple lines. In order to make the character recognition properly, these limitations should be considered, and

the preliminary research such as the type of font, position, and the usage of the character recognition results should be conducted.



19.4 Configuration of Character Recognition Install Data19.4.1 Character recognition install data (mji file) The character recognition install data is configured as shown in the figure below. The modality data and the dictionary data can be

saved individually. If the saved data is kept in a library, it can be used when the same system and modality are set for the character

recognition.

Fig. 19.1 Configuration of Character Recognition Install Data

Since there are multiple dictionaries, it is possible to set different dictionaries for each of image size, name, ID, and Other 1 and 2.

Conversely, even when the image size, name and ID are different, there is only one dictionary in the install data if the fonts are the

same. The install data is set for referring to only one dictionary.

Supports each dictionary.

The comment, the number of modalities, the number of dictionaries and others for Printlink-ID and -IV

Data of CH01Image size, the position of the frame to berecognized, the position of the character string to be recognized, the dictionary to be used, and comments, etc.

x n pcs. (Max: 5)

Dictionary 1Dictionary size, dictionary data, and comments,etc.

Dictionary 2Dictionary size, dictionary data, and comments, etc.

Dictionary 3Dictionary size, dictionary data, and comments, etc.

Entire install data

Modality dataThis portion and all the dictionary data can be written and kept in a library.

Dictionary dataImage size, name, and IDDictionaries can be changed for each of Other 1 and 2.The dictionary data can be written on the dictionary data directory and kept in a library.



19.4.2 Modality data and dictionary dataIt is necessary to set the following parameters.

Modality data: It is possible to register 5 items: Image size, the position of the frame to be recognized, the position of names,

the position of ID, Other 1 and 2, the dictionary to be used. These are called character recognition patterns.

Dictionary data: The status of the font is registered.

Fig 19.2 Character Recognition Setting Parameters

1 film

Frame to be recognized

Name

Font dictionary

(50, 10) – (70, 200)

TARO

F

X

Y

ID1234

ID

90.01.15

(510, 10) – (530, 200)

(50, 1000) – (70, 1200) (500, 1000) – (520, 1200)

13 ID1234

Font dictionary

OTHER 1 (Birthday)

OTHER 2 (Sex)

Binary threshold(Character / Background)

1 2

3 4



19.5 Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software Operation Description

19.5.1 Main windowStarting up OCRinst.exe will display the main window.

Fig. 19.3 Main window

• Settings (S) (Next screen) Goes to the Settings window,

The data can be selected if there is any data being edited.

• Stored directory Directory of PC Displays the stored directory that is currently selected.

• No. 01-16 Displays the channel number. By clicking, the channel to be edited can be changed.

• Modality Name Character strings Displays the description and the name of modalities.

• Settings xx/xx Displays the current data setting registration (the number of registration / the size).

The number of registration:

When the NAME-ID is set to recognition in the Settings window, "1" is added to the

value of numerator.

The size: It shows the size for each modality.

• Coordinates xx/xx Displays the current coordinate data setting registration (the number of registration

/ the size).

The number of registration:

When the coordinates of NAME-ID are set in the Coordinates window, "1" is added

to the value of numerator.

The size: It shows the size for each modality.

• Size of image Character strings Set the image size of the modality. A maximum of 5 image sizes can be registered.

• Size-directory Character strings Displays the directory configuration.

• Dictionary of modality and size

Character strings Displays the dictionary name for each of NAME, ID, OTHER 1 and 2.



19.5.2 Menu of main windowThe contents of the pull-down menu on the upper portion of the main window show as follows:

File (F) menu

• File-Open-Overwrite (O) Reads the saved data file. Use an existing directory configuration.

• File-Open-New (N) Reads the saved data file. Create a new directory configuration.

• File-Close (C) Cancels the data file saved in the memory, and returns the status just after startup.

• File-Save (S) Saves the data file in the memory.

• File-Print (P) Prints out the saved data file. (Not support.)

• File-Environment Settings (K) Sets the operation environment parameters for the software.

• File-Exit (E) Ends the OCR install software.

Image (G) menu

• Image-Stored Directory (D) Sets the directory to store the image data.

• Image-Import Image (T) Receives the image data from the Printlink. It is necessary to set the image directory

in advance.

Item (I) menu

• Item-Add Size (A) Adds patterns.

• Item-Delete Size (D) Deletes patterns.

• Item-Delete Modality (M) Deletes modalities.

Help (H) menu

• Help-Search Topic (T) Search a topic. (Not support.)

• Help-Version Information (A) Displays the version information.



19.5.3 Detailed Settings - Settings windowClicking the [Settings (S)] in the main window will switch into the [Detailed Settings] window, and clicking the [Settings] on the upper

portion of the window will display the [Settings] window.

Fig. 19.4 Settings Window

• No. 1-8, 9-16 Set the channel number to be edited.

• Size of image 9999x9999 Set the image size to be edited. A maximum of 5 image size can be registered.

• Select no. << >> Switches the channel number to be edited between 1-8 and 9-16.

• modality’s name Character strings Displays the modality name.

• Location NAME, ID Set character strings to be recognized. They are selected for each of Name and ID.

OTHER1, OTHER2

• Study NAME, ID Set a character string as a key of Study. Either Name or ID can be set.

• Frame Set the frame number to be recognized. A maximum of two places can be set.

• Direction No rotation Set the orientation of the characters to be recognized. They are selected for each of

Name and ID.

• Dictionary comment Character strings Displays the dictionary name for each of Name and ID.

• Coordinates (99,99)-(99,99) Displays the display position on the film (Upper-left coordinate) – (Lower-right

coordinate) for each of Name and ID.

• Initialize(A) Deletes only the saved data of the current channel and size, and initializes.

• Change modality name(H) Changes the modality name of the current channel.

• Modality library -Read(R) Reads the modality information saved before into the current channel.

• Modality library -Write(W) Saves the saved data of the current channel as a modality information file.

• Modality library -Delete(E) Deletes the modality information file.



19.5.4 Detailed Settings - Coordinates windowClicking the [Settings (S)] in the main window will switch into the [Detailed Settings] window, and clicking the [Coordinates] on the

upper portion of the window will display the [Coordinates] window.

Fig. 19.5 Coordinates Window



• Select no. << >> Switches the channel number to be edited between 1-8 and 9-16.

• modality’s name Character strings Displays the modality name.

• Display area Displays the display area of the image data being currently edited. Displays the

green frame of the recognized area when the positions of the Name and ID are set.

• magnification x4,x2,x1,x1/2,x1/4 Set the scaling factor of the image display.

• Select image 99/99 Select the image file (the display image / the number of files of all images).

• Location NAME, ID Set the character frame to be recognized. Select between Name and ID.

• operation Mouse, Keyboard Set the method of selecting the character frame to be recognized (enclosing with the

mouse or entering from the keyboard).

• Coordinates (99,99)-(99,99) Displays the (Upper-left coordinate) – (Lower-right coordinate) of the character

frame to be recognized. Displays according to the settings of the [Location].



19.5.5 Detailed Settings - Dictionary windowClicking the [Settings (S)] in the main window will switch into the [Detailed Settings] window, and clicking the [Dictionary] on the

upper portion of the window will display the [Dictionary] window.

Fig. 19.6 Dictionary Window



• Select no. <<, >> Switches the channel number to be edited between 1-8 and 9-16.

• Modality's name Character strings Displays the modality name.

• Location NAME(N), ID(I) Changes the clipped image to be displayed.

OTHER(O)1, OTHER(P)2

• Hide frame Changes the display of the frame of the clipped characters.

• Display image Displays the clipped image. Displays according to the settings of the [Location].

• Next,prev. char. <, > Moves to the next character.

• Magnification x4,x2,x1,x1/2,x1/4 Set the scaling factor of the image display.

• Threshold level 1-255 Changes the binary threshold of the characters


• Display result Character strings Areas to display the recognized and entered characters.

• Dictionary comment Character strings Name of the dictionary being currently used. Displays according to the settings of

the [Location].

• Advanced(V) Goes to the [Advanced setting] dialog box.

• Char. code Alphanumerics, symbols, Kana (Kana is for the Japanese version only.)

The table of characters that can be registered. Allocate the bit pattern on the image

to the character by clicking the concerned character.



• Create new (A) Create a new dictionary. The existing dictionary will be deleted.

• Change comment(H) Change the comments and template size of the dictionary being currently used.

• Delete text (S) Switches into the mode for deleting the set characters.

(The character deletion will end.)

• Save Bitmap(B) Saves the bit pattern of the characters that are registered in the currently used dic

tionary as a bit map file.

• Dictionary library -Read(R) Writes the dictionary file that has been saved on the currently used dictionary.

• Dictionary library -Write(W) Saves the data into the dictionary file being currently edited.

• Dictionary library -Delete(E) Deletes the dictionary file.



19.5.6 Detailed Settings - Dictionary - Advanced settings dialog boxClicking the [Advanced (V)] in the [Dictionary] window will display the [Advanced] dialog box.

Fig. 19.7 Advanced Settings Dialog Box

• Pattern hit ratio Set the hit ratio.

It is not necessary to change under normal conditions.

• Recognition of space character Set the space character.

• None.: Does not insert a space.

• One space in the maximum.: Inserts one space.

• Two spaces in the maximum.: Inserts two spaces.

• Recognition of character color Set the character color.

Set to Auto. under normal conditions, but set to ON when images are inserted into

the recognition area.

• Recognition of smaller region Set the method of recognizing a smaller region.

• Not treat as a character.: Does not treat the small area as a character.

• It treats as a character.: Treats the small area as a character.

• A cutting method Set the cutting method.

• Normal.: Used when there is a character space.

• Fixed width.: Used when there is no character space and the width of characters is

constant. Specify the width in the [columns].

• Character's width: Used when there is no space between characters (no space of 1

dot or over between characters) and the width of characters is not constant. The

default setting of the [Fusion] is 0 and it is not needed to change.

• Divied characters Set the method of processing the divided characters.

• Nothing.: Used when Katakana is not used.

• Exist in dictionary.: Used when Katakana is used.

Set the maximum strokes of characters in the [Number of division].

(This item is for the Japanese version only.)

• Excludes bigger region on the edge Set the method of excluding the bigger region on the edge.

• It does not exclude it.: Does not exclude the image.

• Left edge.: Excludes the image on the left edge.

• Right edge.: Excludes the image on the right edge.



19.5.7 Detailed Settings - Check windowClicking the [Settings (S)] in the main window will switch into the [Detailed Settings] window, and clicking the [Check] on the upper

portion of the window will display the [Check] window.

Fig. 19.8 Check Window


• size of image 9999x9999 Set the image size to be edited. A maximum of 5 image size can be registered.

• Select no. <<, >> Switches the channel number to be edited between 1-8 and 9-16.

• modality's name Character strings Displays the modality name.

• Display image Displays the image data being currently edited.

Displays the green frame of the recognized area when the positions of the Name and

ID are set.

• magnification x4,x2,x1,x1/2,x1/4 Set the scaling factor of the image display.


• Display result Character strings Displays the recognized results in the current image file.

• threshold level 1-255 Displays the binary threshold of the character data.



19.6 Procedure for Settings of Character RecognitionFollow the procedure below to make the settings of the character recognition.

Fig. 19.9 Procedure for Settings of Character Recognition

Outline of the preliminary research of the character strings to be recognized and the settings of the character recognition system

(Refer to Section 19.7.)

Settings for the Printlink (Refer to Section 19.8.)

Settings of the environment of the character recognition (OCR) install software (Refer to Section 19.9.)

Settings of the data with the character recognition (OCR) install software (Refer to Section 19.10.)

Returning the environment of the Printlink


Setting and operating the controller


End of settings



19.7 Outline of Preliminary Research of Character Strings To Be Recognized and Settings of Character Recognition System

19.7.1 Preliminary research of character strings to be recognized(1) Confirmation items with the server when performing the DICOM STRAGE output to

the server, etc.Refer to the chapter of Storage.

(2) Confirmation items with a hospitala) Confirmation items on ID, Name, Other 1 and 2

• What parameter to be character-recognized ? Ex) ID only ? Both ID and Name ?, etc.

• The number of characters ?

• What type of characters ? Ex) Number + hyphen for ID, and alphabets only for Name, etc.

b) Confirming of the frame positions to be recognized

• Can the frame to be recognized easily be specified ? Or can the image be taken so that it is easily recognized ?

The frame that is recognized easily means the one in which the image does not go into the recognized area, or the

image rarely goes into the recognized area. Therefore, if the image does not go into the recognized area, this will

improve the recognized ratio of specifying the frame.

(3) Confirmation items with a diagnostic devicea) Are the output sizes the same ?

The size of WS and others may change. When the sizes changes, the font may change.

b) Position of the ID, Name, Other 1 and 2 data corresponding to the image size above

c) Font corresponding to the image size above

Alphanumerics only ? Is there Kana ? (Kana is for the Japanese version only.)

Since it is necessary to register the bit patterns of all the characters, check if it is possible to load all the characters to

be used for ID, Name, Other 1 and 2 in the modality into the image data easily.

d) Alphanumerics, symbols, Kana only ?

Kanji cannot be registered. (This is for the Japanese version only.)

e) Are images and characters overlapped each other ? (Recognizing with the maximum number of

the characters)

When images and characters overlapped each other, can they be separated ?

f) Does a character string have one line ? Does a character string start from the left ?

When a character string has multiple lines, only one of the lines can be recognized. If a character string start from the

right, an unnecessary character, "?", may be inserted preceding the recognized result.

g) Are multiple patterns needed ?

A maximum of 5 recognized patterns can be registered. This includes the patterns for the other image sizes.

h) Is there video noise ? Does the video noise change with the time ?

If there is video noise, characters may not be recognized. So, be sure to adjust it so that jitter does not appear. An

error will occur when the bit pattern of the character differs with each store. Be careful for the change of the video

noise with the time.



i) Method of using the recognition result

Currently, the recognition result is printed on the stamp area of the film, or it is used as name and ID data upon the

DICOM output and a tag for others.

j) Confirming the study method

Set whether or not to use the study function. If it is used, select Name or ID as the target parameter for the study func-

tion.

k) Default name, ID in printing without the character recognition

Set the confirmed contents with the Printlink install software.



19.7.2 Outline of the settings of the character recognition systemFig. 19.10 shows the system example that consists of one channel of digital input, one channel of video input, two channels of DICOM

output (imager, filing system).

In the example, the characters of the image data input from the digital and video channels are recognized, and are output to the imager

and filing system. Making various settings other than the character recognition settings and obtaining the IP address are assumed to

be already completed. (Refer to Chapter 5.)

The digital and video input channels of the Printlink-ID and -IV should be usually set to the first channel.

The same PC and IP address that are used for installing the Printlink are used for installing the character recognition software. The

settings of character recognition need to be made only for the input devices, Printlink-ID and -IV. It is not necessary to make the set-

tings for the output device, Printlink-OD.

Fig. 19.10 System Example

Printlink controller

Printlink controller

The same PC used for installing the Printlink are used for installing the character recognition software

Diagnostic device

Digital Video

Printlink–IVPrintlink–ID

192.168.2.12192.168.2.11192.168.2.20

192.168.2.17192.168.2.15

Diagnostic device

Character recognition

No settings for output device

DICOM imager Filing system



19.8 Settings for PrintlinkIn the example, the settings of the system is assumed to be already made.

Fig. 19.11 System at the Installation of the Character Recognition

19.8.1 Change of settings of the Printlink main unitMake the following settings on the [Change Channel Data] dialog box in the Printlink install software.

(1) Make the settings associated with the character recognition with the input channel.

1. Check if the LINEAR setting exists in the LUT.

If it does not, set the Convert LUT to OFF. If it is already set to OFF, do not change it.

Note: When the Convert LUT is set to OFF, return it to the original position after setting the character recognition.

2. Set the parameters.

• OCR Default Name and ID

When the character recognition is set to OFF on the controller, set the Name and ID used for transferring the image to the next

system. Enter the name, such as "Printlink test film" and "Konica HP", that is easy to understand that the character recogni-

tion is not performed yet. Ask a user of the modality at each institution what name and ID should be given.

• OCR Study

Set to ON when the Study function is set to valid.

Select the target parameter for the Study from Name and ID with the character recognition install software.

Printlink controller Printlink controller

Diagnostic device(e.g. Regius) Diagnostic device

Additional output to the Li-1417D

DICOM imager Filing system Li-1417D(Character recognition-software-installed PC)

Digital Video


192.168.2.12192.168.2.11

192.168.2.17 192.168.2.20192.168.2.15



• OCR Study Timeout

When the next page is not determined in the set timeout, printing starts. The unit of the timeout is "second". Ask a user of

the modality for this timeout, and set it.

(2) Set the character recognition software-installed PC as the output device for the Printlink-ID and-IV.

The same protocol of the character recognition software is used as that of the Li1417D. Therefore, select the HSTP (Li-1417)

for the output protocol. Set other settings to the default.

Important: Be sure to adjust the signals for the model that requires the adjustment of the input signal, such as Printlink-IV. If the

adjustment is not proper, this will decrease the recognition rate.

19.8.2 Change of the settings of Printlink controller1. Change the output device to the OCR output.



19.9 Settings of Environment of Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software

19.9.1 Startup environment1. Although the character recognition install software operates under the same environment as the Printlink install software, a

mouse is needed. Since using only the keyboard is limited to some operations, be sure to check that a mouse is connected.

2. The necessary files are the following four files. Place them in the same directory.

• OCRInst.exe

Entire character recognition install software

• OCRRecv.exe

Image data reception software (This does not operate by itself, and it should be used from the OCRInst.exe.)

• OCRfcv.exe

Change the character recognition install software from Ver. 1.0X to 1.1X.

• OCR.ini

Character recognition install software setting file

Note: The installer does not exist. Copy the software with the Explorer upon distribution.

19.9.2 Directory configurationThe directory configuration is set as shown in the figure below. (The configuration is already set before distribution.) Select a drive

with the most free space (approx. 200 to 300 MB is needed) as a destination (when operating with C drive).

Fig. 19.12 Character Recognition Install Directory Configuration

C:\OCR

Modality

Dic

Mji

Data

Konica HP_ID

Konica HP_IV

Yamada HP

Hashima HP

CH01

Directory for store1024_1024

512_512

The reception image is stored in this directory.

This is created automatically upon the reception of the image.

All the character recognition install software is installed in this directory.Copy the necessary 4 files into the directory.

This directory is for saving modality data and keeping it in a library.

This directory is for saving dictionary data and keeping it in a library.

This directory is for character recognition install software.

This directory is for image file data, and install software.

This directory is for data operation for each hospital, Printlink-ID, -IV.Each Printlink has one directory.

Channel 1 directoryReading image directory (1024 x 1024)

Reading image directory (512 x 512)



The directories below OCR \ Data can be created with the character recognition install software. One directory should be allocated to

each of Printlink-ID and -IV. This directory is called a store directory.

The directories above the store directory are created with the Explorer, and those below the store directory are automatically created

with the character recognition install software. (The store directory can be created with both the Explorer and the character recogni-

tion install software.)

For the relation among the character recognition install data, modality data, and dictionary data, refer to Section 19.4.



19.9.3 Settings before startup of the character recognition install softwareThis section describes the settings of the OCR.ini file.

Fig.19.13 Settings of OCR.ini

It is not necessary to change the [FILE EXTENSION NAME] and [ETCETRA PARAMETER]. Set the [DIRECTORY] if necessary.

• [DIRECTORY] MODALITY

Specify the modality data directory. From the character recognition install data, only the setting data of the modality can be

placed in the library. Specify the directory for saving the data at that time.

• [DIRECTORY] DICTIONARY

Specify the dictionary data directory. From the character recognition install data, only the setting data of the dictionary can

be placed in the library. Specify the directory for saving the data at that time.

The [DIRECTORY] is a relative directory setting at shipment. Under normal conditions, this is not needed to change. This works

even with an absolute directory setting. However, if the character recognition install software is copied on another PC, since the direc-

tory configurations of individual PC are different, the software will not start up. In such case, check the settings and set properly again.



19.9.4 How to start upExecute the OCRInst.exe in the directory that contains the four files needed for startup. (Refer to Section 19.9.1.)

Ex) Working with C drive

c: \OCR\OCRInst.exe (return)

Or, by double-clicking the file above with the Explorer, the character recognition install software starts up.

Fig. 19.14 Main Window of Character Recognition Install Software



19.10 Settings of Data with Character Recognition (OCR) Install Software

With the character recognition install software, the data other than the described can be created. Be sure to follow the description and

procedure in this manual for installation.

Note: During operations, messages such as "Warning error" may appear. After checking it, click the [OK] to continue the

operations.

In the system example (refer to Fig. 19.11.), the character recognition install software should be installed on the Printlink-ID and -IV

individually. Therefore, it is necessary to make various settings that are associated with the installation individually. If multiple modal-

ities are connected, the settings should be made for them individually.

Follow the flow chart below to install the software and make the settings properly.

• Checking the system (the type of modalities) at installation.

When the position and type of the font is determined if the modality image size is set;

Fig. 19.16 Modality Checking Flow Chart

Fig. 19.15 Modality Checking Flow Chart

• Is there any data whose image size is the same, but position of name and ID or font is different in the modality ?

(Refer to Section 19.10.4.)

New system ?

The dictionary of the same modality is created at another institution. Want to use

that saved data ?

Want to use the saved data for another system

at the same institution ?



Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Are position and font different for the same

image size ?(Refer to Section 19.10.5.)

(Refer to Sections 19.10.1 to 19.10.4.)

Yes

No



19.10.1 For new systemEx) When the image size is set to 1024 x 1024 and 512 x 512 at Konica hospital;

Other conditions are as shown in Fig. 19.13 and in this example, the character recognition is set in the Printlink-ID. Only

alphabetic characters (capital) are used for name, and only numbers for ID. For the image of size of 512 x 512, the dif-

ferent fonts are used for Name and ID (Font A, B). For the image of size of 1024 x 1024, the same font is used for Name

and ID.

(1) Enter "Konica HP_ID" for the store directory.

(2) Start up the character recognition install software.

Fig. 19.17 Startup Window (Main Window) of the Character Recognition Install Software

Cautions at startup of the install software

• During the operations, the dialog box confirming "OK" and "CANCEL", etc. may appear. In such case, be sure to confirm

them in the dialog box, then perform another operation.

• Although the window frame may be skewed, the internal device operates normally. If you wish to correct the skewed frame,

enter the [CHECK] window, then return to the Main window.



(3) Enter the name of the store directory. Select the [Stored directory (D)] from the [Image (G)], then enter the name. In this

example, since the store directory is "Konica HP_ID", select "c:\Ocr\Data\Konica HP_ID". If "Konica HP_ID" does not exist,

enter the directory name.

Fig. 19.18 Store Directory Setting Dialog Box

(4) Read the image data. Select the [Import imager (T)] from the [Image (G)] and click [OK]. This will make the status in which

the image can be read. "Image not Ready" on the Printlink controller will disappear in approx. one minute.

Fig. 19.19 Image Reading Mode Dialog Box



(5) Follow the procedure below to store the image from the modality.

1. Set the image size in the modality. In this example, the image size is set to 1024 x 1024.

2. In this example, first read the font used for name. When only ID is recognized, read the font of the ID.

3. In this example, the font of the name is set to alphanumerics and symbols only.

4. Enter the characters of the data above with the modality.

5. Since the character recognition is not completed in only one time, the following procedure should be repeated until all the nec-

essary fonts are read.

Fig. 19.20 Procedure for Reading Fonts

The image should be stored repeatedly until all the characters are sent. For example, for the first time "ABCDEFGHIJK" are sent,

and for the second time, "LMNOPQRSTUV", and for the third time, "WXYZ....".

• Be sure to enter the maximum number of the characters that can be entered for one time. This allows the device to check

the character input area that can be recognized in the image.

• In the example, although only alphanumerics and symbols are entered, all the Kana can be read with the character recog-

nition install software if necessary. (This is for the Japanese version only.)

• When the image data is read, the directory with a name of the image size will be automatically created. If the size is 1024

x 1024, the directory of "1024 x 1024" is created. In the example, the directory of "Konica HP_ID\CH01\1024_1024" is

created.

Cautions on reading images

Check if there is a character space (more than 1 dot) after reading the image one time. If there is not, the reg-

istration cannot be made as individual character cannot be recognized. Therefore, output the image with a

space to the output device.

6. After reading all the characters used for the name, read the font of ID. Follow Steps (3) to (5) to do so. However, if the size

and position of the name and ID are different but their fonts are same, it is not necessary to send the font again. Enter char-

acters at maximum only one time and send them. This is for checking the difference of the position of character strings and

the maximum area.

7. After transferring the image with the name and ID, perform Steps 1 to 6 for other image sizes.

8. When the reading of all the different size data is completed, the image reading ends. Click the [Quit Import] to return to the

Main window.

Input the image with the modality (several times).

Output the image.

Read the image with the character recognition install software.



For example, after reading the image in order to recognize the characters on the image of size of 1024 x 1024 and 512 x 512,

the main window will appear. The captured size will be displayed in the [Size-directory] on the right side of the window.

Fig. 19.21 Main Window after Reading Images (CH01 and the captured image size are displayed.)

Add the captured image size by selecting the [Add Size (A)] from the [Item (I)] or double-clicking the blank field of the [Size

of image].

Fig. 19.22 Main Window with Image Added to the [Size of image]



(6) Create the font dictionary for each image size. First, create the font dictionary with the image size of 512 x 512. To do so,

click the 512 x 512 in the [Size of image] and click the [Settings] on the upper left of the main window to display the [Settings]

window.

Fig. 19.23 Settings Window

(7) Set the parameters.

• In the [Location], select the item to be character-recognized from Name, ID, and Other 1 and 2. (Multiple items can be select-

ed.) Before setting this parameter, confirm with a user (the person in charge at a hospital) which item is character-recognized.

In the example, the Name and ID are set to be recognized.

• In the [Study], select the Name or ID of the recognized result to make the Study function valid. Confirm this with a user of

each modality (the person in charge at a hospital) including whether or not to use the Study function. In this item, the para-

meters to see when the Study function is set can be set. The ON/OFF of the Study function is set with the install software of

the Printlink. In the example, the Study will be valid with the ID.

• In the [Frame], set the frame of the film in which the character recognition is performed. Confirm this with a user of each

modality (the person in charge at a hospital). If the image that is easy to recognize can be output into the same frame number

all the time, specify that number. If it cannot, or the image is inserted into the recognized area, set the "Multi frame". This

function can recognize all the frames in one format. The default is set to the "Multi frame".

The "Last frame" and "Last frame-1" can be also set in this item. The [Last frame] executes the character recognition when

the last frame in a film is stored. For example, in the 12th frame format, the character recognition is made in the 12th frame,

and in the fourth frame format, the character recognition is made in the fourth frame.



The [Last frame-1] executes the character recognition when the frame preceding the last one in a film is stored. For example,

in the 12th frame format, the character recognition is made in the 11th frame, and in the fourth frame format, the character

recognition is made in the third frame. These settings are convenient when a user always output the frame with the characters

in the end although the format always changes.

There are two fields for setting, be sure to set the [No recognition] in the right field. Specify the number of frame in the left

field. In the example, the character recognition is executed in the first frame.

(8) Click the [Change modality name (H)] and enter the modality name. Since the modality name is a guide for selecting the data

when the modality data is kept in the library, enter a name that is easy to understand later. Although the field for a channel

number appears when the modality name is entered, do not change the channel number. In the example, "Konica HP Regius"

is entered as the modality name.

Fig. 19.24 Settings Window After Settings

(The modality name is displayed in the upper-center of the window.)

(9) Click the [Initialize (A)] to return the modality data of the all image sizes to the default settings. Do not use this function under

normal conditions. Be careful not to click by mistake. The [Modality library] is used after the dictionary data is set. Refer to

Section 19.10.3 for the [Modality library].



(10) Click the [Coordinates] on the upper portion of the window to display the [Coordinates] window.

Fig. 19.25 Coordinates Window

(11) Set the maximum number of the name and ID character strings. First, set the maximum number of the name character. The

characters have to be entered at its maximum.

• Click the [NAME (N)]. (This cannot be clicked if the [NAME] is not set to the target character recognition in the [Settings]

window.) Then, click the [Mouse (M)]. It will be displayed in gray. Using the scroll bar on the image display area, move

the character strings to the center. Click the upper-left portion of the image, drag to the lower-right portion, and release

the mouse button so that the entered character strings are enclosed.

• When enclosing the characters, allow the margin of 2 to 3 pixels in the upper and lower, the right and left from the char-

acters. Too much margin will not be a problem, but do not set the character frame with no margin. Allow a sufficient mar-

gin in the right from the character as the length of the displayed characters changes depending on each character. (e.g.

"IIIII" and "WWWWW" have the same number of characters but the length of the displayed area is different.)

• When setting the character frame, do not include the diagnostic image area within the frame. (Refer to Fig.19.26.)



Fig. 19.26 Setting Character String Frame

(12) After setting the character frame, the [Mouse (M)] displayed in gray returns to the normal display. In order to set the charac-

ter frame again, click the [Mouse (M)] and repeat Step (11). Right-clicking before setting the frame returns the [Mouse (M)]

displayed in gray to the normal display. In such case, the character frame setting is not renewed. After setting the frame for

Name, execute the same procedure for the ID. Clicking the [NAME (N)] and [ID (I)] after setting the character frame displays

the set frame at the center of the screen immediately.

Fig. 19.27 Setting Character String Frame with Name and ID



(13) Click the [Dictionary] on the upper portion of the window to display the [Dictionary] window.

Fig.19.28 Dictionary Window

(14) The selected character strings and the clipped those characters (enclosed with a red or green frame) are displayed on the win-

dow.

(15) Create a dictionary file (dic file). First, change the dictionary name. The dictionary name, [NAME (N)], of the image size of

512 x 512 in Fig. 19.29 shows the default setting, "dic comment 01-512-512-NAME". Since the dictionary name is a guide

when it is used as the library, enter the name that is easy to understand later. In the figure below, the dictionary name is

"Regius-512512-NAME" which means the modality name + image size + type (NAME or ID). Click the [Change comment

(H)] on the lower portion of the screen, and set the dictionary name. The changed data appears in the set dictionary name dia-

log box. So, confirm if it is displayed properly.

Fig.19.29 Setting Dictionary Name Dialog Box



(16) Register the bit pattern of the character. The characters enclosed with the red frame in the character display area can be reg-

istered. In the figure below, "A" is a target character to be registered. The recognized result appears under the character dis-

play area. In the figure below, since no character exists in the dictionary, "?" is displayed. Then, select the same character as

the target character from the character icon at the center of the window. In the example below, "A" icon on the window should

be clicked. By clicking the [A], "?" is changed into "A". (Refer to Fig. 19.30.)

Fig. 19.30 Registering Bit Pattern "A"

Then, the next character (e.g. "B") becomes the target character (enclosed with the red frame). Likewise, register the bit pat-

tern of all the characters in the character display area. (Refer to Fig. 19.31.)

Fig. 19.31 Registering All the Bit Patterns



Note:Do not register more than one character as the same bit pattern.

Suppose that "1" icon is clicked for the registered target character "l" by mistake, then without deleting it, "l"

icon is clicked for the registered target character "l". In such case, "1" icon and "l" icon are registered for the

registered target character "l". When recognizing bit pattern "l" using this dictionary, the recognized result will

be "1", which is first registered. The icon that is registered later does not affect the recognized result.

If you set incorrect icon by mistake, click the [Delete Text (S)] to delete the registered character. (Refer to

(23) for the [Delete Text (S)].

(17) Register the bit pattern in the character display area in the dictionary. Click the [Register (J)] at the right-center of the win-

dow. This will correspond the bit pattern in the character display area to the character strings in the frame under it, and will

register it in the dictionary. The registered characters in the dictionary will be highlighted. (Refer to Fig. 19.32.)

Fig. 19.32 Registering Bit Pattern of All Characters in the First Page.

Note:Be sure to execute this procedure. Even if the character pattern is read into the character recognition install

software but it is not registered in the dictionary, the character recognition is not performed.

(18) After registration, register the characters for the images in the following pages in the same manner, and register all the char-

acters.



(19) In the example, only capital alphabetic characters are used for the Name. Fig.19.33 shows the window in which all the bit pat-

terns are registered.

After entering all the bit patterns, be sure to click the [Write (W)] in the [Dictionary library]. This will save the dictionary

with name "Regius-512512-NAME" in the library. Now you can call it whenever you want.

Fig. 19.33 Registering All Capital Alphabetic Characters (NAME)

(20) Check the registered characters.

Clicking the [Save Bitmap (B)] makes the registered character pattern bit-mapped. Enter a file name that is easy to understand

later. If the mji file exists, the character pattern can be bit-mapped again. So, it is not needed to save.

The contents of the saved bit-mapped file can be confirmed by opening with the Microsoft paint. (The characters appear in

the order of the character code, instead of the order of registration.)

Fig. 19.34 Bit-Mapped Character Data



(21) Register the characters for ID in the same manner if necessary. In order to change the target character to be registered to ID,

click the radio button of the [ID (I)] at the left-center of the window. In the example below, "Regius-512512-ID" is set as the

dictionary name of ID. Enter the name that is easy to understand later, like other data. In the example, the characters used for

ID are numbers only. Fig. 19.35 shows the window in which all the bit patterns are registered.

Fig. 19.35 Registering All Numbers (ID)

(22) Register the dictionary of ID in the library. Be sure to execute this procedure.

(23) When deleting the registered character or registering another bit pattern, click the [Delete text (S)] on the lower portion of the

screen. Then, click the character to be deleted.

Fig. 19.36 Deleting Character "0"



(24) After the dictionary registration and library registration for both name and ID are complete, click the [Settings] on the upper

portion of the window.

Fig. 19.37 Settings Window After Dictionary Registration of 512 x 512

(25) Perform the character string frame settings and dictionary registration for the image of size of 1024 x 1024 in the same man-

ner. Click the [1024 x 1024] on the left, then click the [Coordinates] and [Dictionary] to allow you to make the settings for

1024 x 1024.

(26) In the example below, since the font for the name and ID is the same, it is easy to affect the registered dictionary for Name on

the ID. In the example, "Regius-10241024-NAME" is entered as the name, and it is registered in the dictionary library. In this

case, click the [ID (I)] at the left-center of the same window to display the character strings for ID. (Refer to Fig. 19.38.)

Fig. 19.38 Displaying ID for 1024 x 1024



(27) Click the [Read (R)] in the [Dictionary library] to display the library of the dictionary files that have been registered. (shown

in Fig. 19.39.) In the example, since the font of ID is the same as that of name, "Regius-10241024-NAME" is selected. When

returning to the [Settings] window shown in Fig. 19.40, "Regius-10241024-NAME" is displayed for both Name and ID, which

means that the dictionary data is shared.

If you change the contents of registered dictionary (e.g. changing the bit patterns of the character, etc.), this change will affect

the dictionary of the name as the dictionary file is shared. So, be careful with changing the data when the dictionary is shared.

Fig. 19.39 Reading "Regius-10241024-NAME" Dictionary as ID Dictionary

Fig. 19.40 Settings Window After Registering Dictionary of 1024 x 1024



(28) After the settings for both image sizes are complete, return to the [Settings] window. Then, select the [Write (W)] from the

[Modality library], and register the modality library. In the example, "CH01 Konica HP Regius" that is displayed on the upper

portion of the window is registered as the name of the modality library. Enter a name that is easy to understand later, like other

data. The modality library in the example includes the dictionaries for images of size of 1024 x 1024 and 512 x 512 in the

"Regius".

(29) Click the [Close (C)] on the upper-right portion of the window to return the Main window at startup. On the Main window,

you can check the modality name and the dictionary name.

Fig. 19.41 Main Window After Settings

(30) Save the settings in the file. Selecting the [Save (S)] from the [File (F)] displays the file name input dialog box. Enter a file

name that is easy to understand later (e.g. the hospital name + the set Printlink). In the example, as the Printlink-ID is used,

"Konica HP Printlink-ID" is entered as the file name.

Fig.19.42 File Name Input Dialog Box



(31) Clicking the [OK] in the file name input dialog box displays the file save dialog box. Specify the same file name as the named

file and save it. You can give another file name, but be sure to give a file name that is easy to understand later. Always put

".mji" following the file name.

Fig. 19.43 File Save Dialog Box

(32) Send all the set data to the Printlink-ID.

Fig. 19.44 Sending Modality Library (mji file) with the Printlink Maintenance Software

After sending the data, restart the Printlink-ID. Setting the [OCR] on the controller to [AT] or "1, 2, 3, 4, 5" will start the char-

acter recognition. This will complete the install settings of the character recognition.



19.10.2 Setting the parameter of the character recognitionSet Step (1) in the [Dictionary] window (refer to Fig. 19.6.), and set Step (2) or later in the [Advanced settings] dialog box (refer to

Fig. 19.7.).

(1) Setting thresholdsThe threshold separates the background from the characters in the image. Change of the threshold is needed when the image

is inserted into the character recognition area. A guide for setting the threshold is as follows. The default value is 128.

• When images are not within the character recognition area;

Leave the threshold at its default.

Note : The default value may not separate the characters from the background when the entire density of the

image is low, such as RI. In such case, change the threshold so that it can separate the characters from

the background.

• When images are inserted into the character recognition area, or they are likely to be inserted into the character recogni-

tion area;

Change the threshold.

a) When the pixel value of the characters is constant, such as digital input and the network input;

Set the threshold to the character pixel value. The character pixel value is the boundary between the character to be

recognized and the character not to be recognized. Find a character pixel value by changing the threshold.

1. Find a maximum value from the values at which the characters can be recognized.

Fig. 19.45 Dictionary Window with Threshold being 249



2. Find a minimum value from the values at which the characters cannot be recognized. When an error occurs upon

the character recognition, the dialog box below will be displayed.

Fig. 19.46 Changing Threshold to 250

(This dialog box appears when an error occurs upon the character recognition.)

3. In this case, at threshold 249, the characters can be recognized, but at 250 they cannot. So, set the threshold to

249.

b) When the pixel value of the characters is not constant, such as video;

Set the threshold to (the minimum value of the character pixel - 10). This is for the jitters of the video signal. Find a

minimum value of the character pixel as follows:

1. Read the image of 10 frames.

2. Click the checkbox in the [Hide frame] at the left-center of the window to hide the frame.

3. Find a value at which the characters are garbled and not garbled by changing the threshold by 5. Check all the

read frames (10 frames).

4. Find a value at which the characters are not garbled.

Fig. 19.47 Characters not Garbled (Threshold: 240)



5. Find a value at which the characters are garbled.

The recognized result includingthe space is displayed.

Fig. 19.48 Garbled Characters (Threshold: 245)

6. In this case, the minimum value of the character pixel is 240. Subtract 10 from that value, and set the threshold to

230.

* Considering the jitters of the video signals, 10 is subtracted from the minimum value of the character pixel.

However, if the amount of the jitters is large at some institutions, adjust the threshold.

Note: It is necessary to set the threshold again when the character pixel value is changed with the change of LUT

in the modality.

(2) Pattern hit ratioIt is not necessary to change this ratio under normal conditions. This ratio may be changed when few characters are registered.

The default value is 97.

(3) Recognition of space characterThis setting is for inserting a space between characters. If there is one place to be recognized, the widest space between the

characters is recognized as a space, and if there are two, the widest space and the second-widest place are recognized. After

setting the space, check the recognized result of the space in the [Check] window (by clicking the [Check]). The [Dictionary]

window does not display the space.

Fig. 19.49 Recognized Result of Space (Check Window)



(4) Recognition of character colorThis setting specifies the color of character. Basically, you can set to "Auto", but if images are inserted into the recognition

area, make this setting.

(5) Recognition of smaller regionSelect the following conditions to treat smaller regions. The smaller region means the region that is smaller than the width of

registered characters.

• Not treat as a character

• It treats as a character

Set to " It treats as a character" when registering characters, and set to " Not treat as a character" for other operations.

Note: The reason that " It treats as a character" should be selected when registering characters:

The window as shown in the figure below may appear. This is because "N" and "I" are smaller than the width

of the registered characters when the first character, "K" is registered while " Not treat as a character" is set.

In such case, before registering characters, set to " It treats as a character".

Fig. 19.50 Frame Does Not Appear



(6) A cutting methodThis setting is used when there is no space between characters.

• Normal: Select when there is a space between characters.

• Fixed width: Select when there is no space between characters (no space of 1 dot or over between characters) and the width

of characters is constant. Specify the width with the [Columns].

Ex)

Fig. 19.51 Recognizing Multiple Characters as One Character Without Space

(The width of characters is constant.)

When the width of characters (Character size is 10 for this font.) is constant, specify the width of characters in the [Columns].

Fig. 19.52 Recognizing One Character by One Character

• Character's width: This is used when there is no space between characters (no space of 1 dot or over between characters)

and the width of characters is not constant. The default setting of the [Fusion] is 0 and it is not needed to change.



Fig. 19.53 Recognizing Multiple Characters as One Character Without Space

(The width of characters is not constant.)

When setting to "Character's width", the window is as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 19.54 Recognizing One Character by One Character

(7) Divided characters(This item is for the Japanese version only.)

Set this when using Katakana.

• Nothing: Used when Katakana is not used.

• Exist in dictionary: Used when Katakana is used.

Set the maximum strokes of characters in the [Number of division].

Fig. 19.55 Japanese character, Katakana " " (Number of strokes: 4)

1 2 3 4



Fig. 19.56 Unregistered Character (Dictionary Window)

For Katakana, one character consists of multiple parts. Those parts are called strokes. In case of " ", the number of strokes

is 4. (Refer to Fig. 16.57.) Set the maximum number of strokes of concerned characters.

Registering divided Katakana

The settings of the [Divided characters] are assumed to be made.

Follow the procedure below to register the character that consists of multiple parts. This section describes the registration, tak-

ing " " (number of strokes: 4) for example.

The character that is not registered is displayed as follows:



Select the most-left part of the character, and click " " in this example.

Fig. 19.58 Selecting " " (Dictionary Window)

Fig. 19.57 Selecting the Most-left Stroke (Dictionary Window)

Select each of all the remaining parts and click " " on the lower-right of the window each time.



Press "Register" to register all the parts as one character.

Fig. 19.59 Register Parts as One Character (Dictionary Window)

Note: If the registered parts is not displayed as one character, the settings of [Divided characters] may not be

matched to the number of strokes. Check the settings again.



(8) Excludes bigger region on the edgeThis setting is used when it is likely that a image that is larger than the width of the registered characters is inserted into the

right and left edges of the recognition area.

• It does not exclude it:

• Left edge: Excludes the left edge of an image.

If an image is inserted into the character area when " It does not exclude it" is set, the image will also be treated as a target to

be character-recognized as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 19.60 Image in the Left Edge

When setting the [Left edge], the image in the left edge is ignored as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 19.61 Not Recognizing Image in the Left Edge as Characters

• Right edge: Excludes the right edge of an image.



19.10.3 Using the dictionary creating data at another institutionEx) Suppose this situation. An institution, "Konica hospital", created the dictionary data for the images of size of 1024 x 1024 and

640 x 512 in the Regius. Another institution, "KMS hospital", tries to use the data created at the "Konica hospital", and they

have the Regius in which the character recognition can be made for the image size of 1024 x 1024 and 1280 x 1024. The

"KMS hospital" has the Regius dictionary data (file name: "Konica HP Printlink-ID.mji") and other conditions are as shown

in Fig. 19.11. Now, create a new dictionary file in the Printlink-ID at the "KMS hospital".

1. Set the store directory to "KMS HP_ID".

2. Start up the character recognition install software, and set the IP address and the store directory for the Printlink-ID.

3. Read the image data of size of 1024 x 1024 and 1280 x 1024 from the Printlink-ID. Check that the following directories are

created.

C:\OCR

Modality

Dic

Mji

Data

Konica HP_ID

Konica HP_IV

Yamada HP

KMS HP_ID

CH01

Directory for store1024_1024

1280_1024

Channel 1 directory

This is created automatically upon the reception of the image.



Fig. 19.62 Configuration of Character Recognition Install Directories

4. Read the saved data file. Select the [Open-Overwrite (O)] from the [File (F)] and read "Konica HP Printlink-ID.mji". (Refer

to Fig. 19.63.)

5. Since the dictionary file for the images of size of 1024 x 1024 and 640 x 512 is registered in "Konica HP Printlink-ID.mji",

read this file. In this case, since 640 x 512 is not needed, delete it by selecting the [Delete (D)] in the [Item (I)] menu.



6. Since the modality name of the read file is "Konica HP Regius", change the modality name to "Konica HP Regius" on the

[Settings] window. If the modality name is not changed, the original data, "Konica HP Printlink-ID.mji", is overwritten when

this modality is placed in the library. So, be sure to change the modality name. (Refer to Fig.19.64.)

Fig. 19.63 Reading Saved Data Dialog Box

Fig. 19.64 Changing Modality Name Dialog Box



7. In the example, although the read data has the dictionary file for the image of size of 1024 x 1024, the detailed settings, such

as the target parameters for the character recognition (Name, ID, Other 1 and 2) and the position of character strings on the

image, may be different between "Konica Hospital" and "KMS Hospital". So, check the recognition results of character strings

on the [Dictionary] window if they are recognized properly. If re-settings or adjustment are needed, refer to Sections 19.10.1

and 19.10.2 to set them again.

8. No setting has been made for the dictionary file for the image of size of 1280 x 1024 yet. Make the settings from beginning

by referring to Section 19.10.1.

9. Save the set data after the necessary settings are complete. In the example, the set data is saved with the modality name being

"KMS HP Printlink-ID" and the character recognition file name being "KMS HP Printlink-ID.mji".

10. Send the saved data to the Printlink-ID, and this will complete the settings of the character recognition.

Fig. 19.65 File (F) Menu in Maintenance Window



19.10.4 How to read the set data from PrintlinkIn the example shown in Fig. 19.10, the set data can be read into the installed PC using the Printlink install software.

Note: In order to open the set data, the OCR install software is required. Before opening the set data, select the [Stored

Directory (D)] from the [Image (G)] menu, and specify the directory.

Fig. 19.66 Selecting Ocr Printlink -> PC (M) in File (F) menu in Maintenance Window



19.10.5 Settings when character string position and font are different for the same image size

When there are two patterns of character string position and font for an image of size of 1024 x 1024 in the Printlink-ID in the system

shown in Fig. 19.11;

Fig. 19.67 Two Patterns of Character String Position and Font for Same Image Size

1. Register two patterns of the same size.

Fig. 19.68 Registering Second Pattern

Name

Pattern 1

Y=1024 Y=1024

X=1024 X=1024

ID34

ID

TAROID12

Pattern 2



19.11 Returning Environment of PrintlinkFig. 19.69 shows the systems that perform the character recognition including the Printlink immediately after the character recogni-

tion is set. At this time, the character recognition installed PC is not required any more. So, remove it from the network. Li-1417D

output (the character recognition installed PC) is set in the Printlink-ID and -IV. So, return it to the original setting. If you have

changed the ConvertLUT at the installation, return it to the original setting. This will compete the setting of the character recognition.

Fig. 19.69 System After Setting Character Recognition

Printlink controller Printlink controller

Diagnostic device(e.g. Regius) Diagnostic device

Additional output to the Li-1417D

DICOM imager Filing system Li-1417D(Character recognition-software-installed PC)

Digital Video


192.168.2.12192.168.2.11

192.168.2.17 192.168.2.20192.168.2.15



19.12 Setting and Operating Controller 19.12.1 Correcting character recognition resultEDIT ON/OFF

ON: Corrects the character recognition result. Make the correction on the ID INPUT screen.

OFF: Does not correct the character recognition result. Does not allow you to enter the ID INPUT screen.

The recognition result is displayed following the install character strings on the ID display area on the upper portion of the basic screen

of the controller.

Note: The network controller does not have this function. The recognition result is not displayed.

19.12.2 Selecting character recognition operationOCR OFF/AT/1,2,3,4,5

OFF: Does not recognize characters.

AT: Recognizes characters with the pattern of matching the input image size to all the patterns set with the OCR install

software.

1,2,3,4,5: Corresponds to pattern 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, and operates only one pattern.

Fig. 19.70 FUNCTION Screen



(1) There are different image sizes in one modality;The data of the character recognition install is set as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 19.71 Character Recognition Install Data Setting Example

Table 19.1 Different Image Sizes in One Modality

Pattern 1 Pattern 2

Patterns 3 to 5 are not registered.

Y=1024

Y=512

X=512

X=1024

ID1234TARO ID12TARO

ezisegamI)lexiP(

sgnittesrellortnoC

TA 1 2 5~3

4201x4201 .1nrettaphtiwsezingoceR .1nrettaphtiwsezingoceR .ezingocertonseoD .ezingocertonseoD

215x215 .2nrettaphtiwsezingoceR .ezingocertonseoD .2nrettaphtiwsezingoceR .ezingocertonseoD

srehtO .ezingocertonseoD .ezingocertonseoD .ezingocertonseoD .ezingocertonseoD



(2) There are different font and recognition position for the same image size in onemodality;The data of the character recognition install is set as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 19.72 Character Recognition Install Data Setting Example

Table 19.2 Different Font and Recognition Position for Same Image Size in One Modality

Patterns 4 and 5 are not registered.

Pattern 1 Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Y=1024

Y=512

X=1024

X=512

Y=512

X=512

ID1234TARO

ID12TARO

ID12TARO

ezisegamI)lexiP(

sgnittesrellortnoC

TA 1 2 3 5,4

4201x4201htiwsezingoceR

.1nrettaphtiwsezingoceR

.1nrettap.ezingocertonseoD .ezingocertonseoD .ezingocertonseoD

215x215

htiwsezingoceR3dna2nrettap

ehtsyalpsid,eciwt.tluserelbailertsom

.ezingocertonseoD htiwsezingoceR.2nrettap

htiwsezingoceR.3nrettap

.ezingocertonseoD

srehtO .ezingocertonseoD .ezingocertonseoD .ezingocertonseoD .ezingocertonseoD .ezingocertonseoD



19.12.3 Forcefully ejecting STUDY queueNEXT STUDY

When setting the OCR STUDY to ON in the install software, the [STUDY OFF] of the controller will be changed to the [NEXT

STUDY]. Touching it will eject the study queue forcefully.

The STUDY registers the queue when the recognition result of the item (NAME or ID) set in the [STUDY] in the OCR install soft-

ware is different from the one in the previous page. The registered queue is called STUDY queue.

Note: The page that has STUDY queue is not counted as PRINT QUEUE on the FUNCTION screen. If the recognized data that has

been ejected forcefully or the recognized data in the current page are different from that in the previous page, it is counted.

Note: The network controller does not have this function.

Fig. 19.73 Ejecting Queue Screen

19.12.4 Selecting the display item of the recognized resultSELECT ID INPUT ID/NAME

ID : Displays the recognized result of ID on the controller.

NAME : Displays the recognized result of NAME on the controller.


19.12.5 Enabling or disabling the recognized resultANOTHER ID INPUT RESULT / CLEAR

RESULT: Enables the recognized result of the item that is not selected in the SELECT ID INPUT.

CLEAR: Disables the recognized result of the item that is not selected in the SELECT ID INPUT.




19.12.6 Affecting on film stampFILM STAMP NAME OFF/ON

OFF : Does not affect the recognized result of NAME on the stamp.

ON : Affects the recognized result of NAME on the stamp.

FILM STAMP ID OFF/ON

OFF : Does not affect the recognized result of ID on the stamp.

ON : Affects the recognized result of ID on the stamp.

Note: Basically, only the recognized result of the item (NAME or ID) that is selected in the [SELECT ID INPUT] is affected on the

stamp. However, it is possible to affect the recognized result of both NAME and ID on the stamp by setting both the NAME

and ID to ON on the screen below. The order of the stamp is ID first, then NAME. From the SETUP screen, enter the

Maintenance screen -> GENERAL SETUP screen-> ADDITION SETUP screen, and set the MANUAL STAMP ENABLE to

ON.

Note: The network controller has the same function in the screen below.

From the SETUP screen, enter the Maintenance screen -> GENERAL SETUP screen -> KEYPAD screen -> ID SETUP screen. The

contents are the same as those of controller.

19.12.7 Timing for displaying the controllerFRAME NUMBER ON OCR OFF/1 to 64

Specify the timing for the controller's receiving the recognized result from the Printlink main unit by a frame number. When the image

of the frame number set here is stored, the result of the recognition is affected on the controller.

Match the number to be specified here to the recognized frame number set with the OCR install software. Specify "2" or "3" for the

multi frame settings.


Select ID or NAME to be recognized.

Set whether or not affect the characterrecognized result on the film stamp.Set ID or NAME, and ON/OFF.

Set the frame in which characters arerecognized.

Blank page

Blank page

20. Upgrading Printlink


Fig. 20.1 File (F) Menu of Printlink Maintenance Window

20.1 Printlink Software OverviewConfiguration of distributed software of Printlink

VX.XX ContVX.XX ... Controller software

DeskTopDelivery ... Remote tool software

drivers VX.XX ... Driver software

Mainte VX.XX ... Maintenance software

MainVX.XX ... Printlink Main software

OcrVX.XX ... OCR install software

20.2 Upgrading/Downgrading Printlink Software20.2.1 Upgrading Printlink software

The methods of upgrading the Printlink software are different between Ver.1.05 or earlier and Ver.1.10 or later. Follow the pro-

cedure below to upgrade each version.

(1) The methods of upgrading the Printlink software of Ver.1.05 or earliera) Upgrading Printlink Service software

The Service software can be upgraded on the [Printlink Maintenance] window from Mainte Ver.1.04 or later. For Ver.

1.03 or earlier, it is necessary to upgrade manually.

1. When the PLNKMTN.exe starts up, select the [File (F)]. The window shown in Fig. 20.1 will appear. Then, select

the [Server Connection (B)].



2. Selecting the [Server Connection (B)] will display the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.2. Set the IP address of the

Printlink main unit to be installed, and click the [SET].


3. When the connection is made, select the [Service Upgrade (G)] (see Fig. 20.1) from the [File (F)] menu. Then,

select a file of new service version (Service VX.XX folder) from the directory tree box (see Fig. 20.3), and click

the [SET]. Upgrading the version will start.

Fig. 20.3 SERVICE & DRIVER File Upgrade Dialog Box

4. When upgrading the version is complete, the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.4 will appear.


Note:The Service software of Ver. 1.03 or earlier does not support the upgrading. The message shown in

Fig. 20.5 will appear. In such case, follow the procedure below to upgrade the software.

Fig. 20.5 Service Version Lower Dialog Box

When the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.5 is displayed, connect a display, a keyboard, and a mouse to the Printlink main

unit, and double-click D:\Itr\Itr\ServiceUp\ServiceVerUp.exe. Then, upgrading the version will start. Restart the

Printlink main unit, and if it starts up properly, the upgrading of the software is completed.



b) Upgrading Printlink Main software





3. When the connection is made, the status bar (Connect Server [ ]) of the window shown in Fig. 20.6 will appear.

Status bar

Display of the directory tree box

Specify the directory.

Fig. 20.6 Printlink Maintenance Window Box

4. Select the [File (F)] again, then select the [Main Upgrade (U)]. The dialog box shown in Fig. 20.7 will appear.

Select a directory of new version from the directory tree box, and click the [SET]. Upgrading the version will start.

Fig. 20.7 Exce.File Upgrade Dialog Box

5. During upgrading, the data contents to be written are displayed in the dialog box.

Upgrading:Copy from:C:\itr

Copy to:Z:\ITR\~

6. When upgrading the software is complete, the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.8 will appear.


7. After upgrading the Printlink main software properly, the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.4 will appear. If an error

occurs, repeat the procedure from Step 2.

After upgrading the software, the Printlink will automatically restart.

After restarting, the upgraded software starts to be executed. The software before upgrading is copied in the back-

up area.



(2) The methods of upgrading the Printlink software of Ver.1.10 or latera) Upgrading Printlink software

For the Printlink software of Ver.1.10 or later, the Main software and Service software can be upgraded at the same

time. For upgrading, select the [Main/Service Upgrade (G)].



Fig. 20.9 File (F) Menu of Printlink Maintenance Window


Printlink main unit (host name) to be installed, and click the [SET].


3. Select the [File (F)] again, then select the [Main/Service Upgrade (G)]. The dialog box shown in Fig. 20.3 will

appear. Select a directory of new version from the directory tree box, and click the [SET]. Upgrading the soft-

ware will start.

4. When upgrading the software is complete, the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.4 will appear.

Important: After upgrading to Ver. 1.10, you cannot downgrade to Ver. 1.05 or earlier.



20.2.2 Downgrading Printlink softwareThis section describes how to downgrade the software if a problem occurs with the Printlink main software, etc. When the

software is downgraded, the version of the Printlink main software area and of the software in the Printlink main software

backup area become the same, and the software of current version will be lost.

1. When the PLNKMTN.exe starts up, select the [File (F)]. The window shown in Fig. 20.1 will appear. Then, select the

[Server Connection (B)].

2. Selecting the [Server Connection (B)] will display the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.2. Set the IP address of the Printlink

main unit to be installed, and click the [SET].

3. Select the [Downgrade (T)] from the [File (F)] menu. The dialog box shown in Fig. 20.11 will appear. Select a version

to be used from the list box, and click the [SET]. Downgrading the software will start. (The software can be downgrad-

ed to two generations ago.)

Fig. 20.11 Exec.File Downgrade Dialog Box

4. During downgrading, the data contents to be written are displayed in the dialog box.

Downgrading:Copy from:\Z:\ITR\~\~

Copy to:\Z:\ITR\~

5. When downgrading the version is complete, the dialog box shown in Fig. 20.12 will appear.


6. After downgrading the Printlink main software properly, the [Printlink Maintenance] dialog box will appear. If an error

occurs, repeat the procedure from Step 3.

7. After downgrading the software, the Printlink will automatically restart.

After restarting, the downgraded software starts to be executed. The software before downgrading is copied in the back-

up area.

Current version

Version of one generation ago

Version of two generations ago


Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual USA Ver.1.1 2001.320-6

20.2.3 Upgrading the Printlink controller (Keypad)Before upgrading the controller, be sure to upgrade the Printlink software.

Note: Since the settings of the controller are initialized after upgrading, record the settings before upgrading.

Check the following points before upgrading. Be sure to power off the controller.

a) Does the ROM exist in the Printlink controller ?

b) The SW in the controller should be as follows:

SW 1: [ON OFF OFF OFF] (from the first)

SW 2: [OFF OFF ON ON] (from the first)





3. Select the [Controller Upgrade (T)] from the [File (F)] menu. The dialog box shown in Fig. 20.13 will appear.

Specify the directory.

Display of the directory tree box

Fig. 20.13 Upgrade Controller Dialog Box

4. Select a type of the controller (keypad).For PRINTLINK-ID, IV, DV, or HG, select the [Controller].

For PRINTLINK-IN, or OD, select the [Network Controller].

5. Select a directory of new service version from the directory tree box, and click the [SET]. Upgrading the controller

will start.

Controller file name: Pcontvxxx.bin or host connection file name

Network controller file name: Pnetvxxx.bin (PRINTLINK-IN and -OD only)xxx = version No.

6. During upgrading, "Upgrade:Connection Standby" is displayed on the dialog box, and "Now Down Loading xxx"

is displayed on the controller.

The time count is displayed on the controller. When this time count shows 0, the upgrading of the software will

be complete.

Note: Method of returning when an error occurs:

If the time count on the controller stops during upgrading, or "FLASH ROM ERROR" is displayed, follow the proce-

dure below to upgrade again.

1. Power the Printlink OFF, and set to mode C shown in Section 17.3.4 (ROM-> FLASH copy mode).

2. Power the Printlink ON, then copy the ROM on FLASH (when the interval of a beep becomes short, it will be com-

pleted.), and power the Printlink OFF.

3. Return the setting of DIPSW to mode B (download mode), then power the Printlink ON, and execute upgrading

operation again.

Blank page

Blank page

21. Error Code Table


21.1 Error Code OverviewThe following shows the basic points on errors, and understanding and handling errors are based on them. The corrective actions for

each error code are shown in the following page.

• When the first two digits of the error code is "00": the error from the imager (Li-10A, 21, 7, 7A, 8, 62P).

It is necessary to check the connection between the Printlink-OD and the imagers.

• When the first one digit of the error code is "A": the error of the Printlink internal IF board.

It is necessary to check the settings of the Printlink internal IF board, connection cable, and signals.

• When the first one digit of the error code is "B or E": the error of the Printlink main software or the error that occurs between

Li-1417D/DH and Li-62P DICOM in the network.

• The errors on the Printlink are recorded on the error log file.

• The operations in Printlink are recorded on the event log file.

21.2 Error Log and Event LogWrite the error log and event log with the Printlink install software.

Fig. 21.1 File (F) Menu of the Printlink Maintenance Window

• Execute the Printlink install software and select the Printlink to be connected in the [Server Connection (B)].



• Select the [Read Log (L)...] and click the [NEW STATUS] to display the history of the event log shown below.

• Click the [ID] of the time at the data to be saved. When you wish to select multiple times, specify them by pressing CTRL

and clicking at the same time.

Fig. 21.2 Event Log & Error Log Dialog Box

• Click the [SAVE LOG]. Then, the screen shown below will appear. Specify the directory for saving the log data in the

installed PC.

• After specifying the save directory, click the [SET].

Fig. 21.3 Save Directory Specifying Dialog Box

• The message below will appear after the reception of the log file is completed.

Fig. 21.4 Log File Reception End Dialog Box

The error log file (Err_log.txt) and the event log file (Event_logxxx.txt) are created in the specified directory. "xxx" shows the

specified log number. If the log number is not specified, the file is not created. If multiple log number are specified, multiple

files are created.



21.3 Recorded Contents of Log21.3.1. For Event LogThe event log is recorded as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 21.5 Event Log

21.3.2. For Error LogThe following items are recorded.

• Date of occurrence of errors

• Source of occurrence of errors

• Type of errors

• Error code

• Error IF No.

Errors can be handled by pressing the ERROR RESET button. When errors occur in the multiple concerned modalities for one cause,

such as errors from the imager or the disconnection of the output device, after handling errors, resetting the error in one modality will

automatically reset all the errors in the other modalities.



Error Code

Error MessageDescription Corrective action

0001[4161]

IMAGER Check film size

0005[4180•4181]

IMAGER AQU not complete

000A[300A]

IMAGER Supply unit err

000B[300B]

IMAGER Pinch roller

000C[300C]

IMAGER Transfer unit open

000D[300D]

IMAGER Transfer unit close

0014[3014]

IMAGER Jam in supply-print

0015[3015]

IMAGER Jam before print

0016[3016•3018]

IMAGER Jam in print unit

0018[3023]

IMAGER Jam in receive unit

0019[3019•301A]

IMAGER Supply MAG. set

Film size error

Improper acquiring of images

Suction Unit error

Pinch-roller does not work proper-

ly.

The transfer unit does not pinch a

film.

The transfer unit does not hold a

film.

A film stops between the supply

and print sections.

A film stops at the inlet of the print

section.

A film stops when it is transferred.

A film stops when it is received.

Supply magazine error

1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery of

the imager.

2. Press the ERROR RESET on the keypad of the

Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.

* Check the connection of the data cables.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.

Note: The code number inside [ ] shows the error code for Li-10A.



Error Code


001B[301B•301C]

IMAGER Receive MAG. set

001D

IMAGER Receive MAG. Full.

001E[301E]

IMAGER Film empty

001F[301F]

IMAGER Jam supply-print

0020[3020]

IMAGER Jam print-upper XFER

0021[3021]

IMAGER Jam in upper XFER

0023[3023]

IMAGER Jam in receive unit

0024[3024]

IMAGER Jam in print unit

0028[3028]

IMAGER Jam XFER-receive

0032[3032]

IMAGER Processor not ready

0033

IMAGER Sorter not ready

Receive magazine error

Receive magazine full error

No film is in the supply magazine.

A film stops between the supply

section and the inlet of the print

section.

A film stops between the inlet of

the print section and the outlet of

the transfer unit.

A film stops at the outlet of the

transfer unit.

A film stops when it is received.

A film stops when it is printed.

A film stops between the transfer

unit and the receive unit.

During preparation of the film

processor

During preparation of the sorter


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.



Error Code


0035[3035]

IMAGER DOCK. unit err

0036[3036]

IMAGER DOCK. unit err

0037[3037]

IMAGER Jam in DOCK.unit.

0038[3038]

IMAGER Jam in DOCK.unit

003C[303C]

IMAGER Polygon err

003D[303D]

IMAGER H. sync err

0040

IMAGER Print err

0046

IMAGER I/F err

0047

IMAGER I/F err

0048

IMAGER I/F err

0049

IMAGER I/F err

Docking unit sensor error

Docking unit sensor error

A film stops at the docking unit.

A film stops at the docking unit.

A problem with the polygon mirror

occurs.

No horizontal synchronization for

laser optical system

Improper print drum

Abnormal initialization of the com-

munication I/F

Timeout of the communication I/F

Abnormal signals for the communi-

cation I/F

Timeout of the communication I/F


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.



Error Code


004A

IMAGER I/F err

004B

IMAGER err

004C

IMAGER Not memory

0050

IMAGER Command err

0052

IMAGER err

0053

IMAGER Parameter err

0054

IMAGER Format err

0055

IMAGER Store err

0056

IMAGER Store err

0057

IMAGER Format err

0058

IMAGER Wait Format err

005A

IMAGER Disk err

Abnormal signals for the communi-

cation I/F

A problem with the laser power

Insufficient memory

Improper command

A syntax error

Improper parameter range

Improper format

Improper position of store / erase

Full position of store

Improper change of format

(The format that cannot be output

to the imager is selected.)

Improper change of format

(The format that cannot be output

to the imager is selected.)

Improper disk


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.


Printlink.

2. Check the image size and the memory of the

imager.

3. Consider the reduction of image size or the

memory expansion.


Printlink.

2. If the Printlink does not start up, power OFF the

Printlink and the imager, then ON again.


Printlink.




Printlink.




Printlink.




Printlink.




Printlink.



1. Install the Printlink properly.

1. Install the Printlink properly.


the imager.



Error Code


0062

IMAGER cannot _” copy stop_”

0063

IMAGER err

00a0

Film empty 8 x 10

00a1

Film empty 8 x 10 clear

00a2

Film empty 8 x 10 blue

00a3

Film empty 8 x 10 DR

00a4

Film empty 8 x 10 DR clear

00a5

Film empty 8 x 10 DR blue

00a6

Film empty 10 x 12

00a7


00a8


00a9


00aa


00ab


00ac

Film empty 11 x 14

00ad


00ae


00af


00b0


00b1


00b2

Film empty 14 x 14

00b3


00b4


"Copy stop" cannot be accepted.

Other errors

8 x 10 film is not set.

8 x 10 CLEAR film is not set.

8 x 10 BLUE film is not set.

8 x 10 DR film is not set.

8 x 10 DR CLEAR film is not set.

8 x 10 DR BLUE film is not set.
















1. Clear the error by referring the error recovery

("copy stop").


the imager.

1. Set an 8 x 10 film into the supply magazine.

1. Set an 8 x 10 CLEAR film into the supply mag-

azine.

1. Set an 8 x 10 BLUE film into the supply maga-

zine.

1. Set an 8 x 10 DR film into the supply maga-

zine.

1. Set an 8 x 10 DR CLEAR film into the supply

magazine.

1. Set an 8 x 10 DR BLUE film into the supply

magazine.

1. Set a 10 x 12 film into the supply magazine.

1. Set a 10 x 12 CLEAR film into the supply mag-

azine.

1. Set a 10 x 12 BLUE film into the supply maga-

zine.

1. Set a 10 x 12 DR film into the supply maga-

zine.

1. Set a 10 x 12 DR CLEAR film into the supply

magazine.

1. Set a 10 x 12 DR BLUE film into the supply

magazine.

1. Set an 11 x 14 film into the supply magazine.

1. Set an 11 x 14 CLEAR film into the supply

magazine.

1. Set an 11 x 14 BLUE film into the supply mag-

azine.

1. Set an 11 x 14 DR film into the supply maga-

zine.

1. Set an 11 x 14 DR CLEAR film into the supply

magazine.

1. Set an 11 x 14 DR BLUE film into the supply

magazine.



azine.


zine.



Error Code


00b5


00b6


00b7


00b8

Film empty 14 x 17

00b9


00ba


00bb


00bc


00bd


00c1

Cover Open

00c2

Check Chemistry

00c3

Chemicals Empty

AA00

V_IN I/F Device nothing

AA01

V_IN I/F Duplicate open

AA02

V_IN I/F Intr not happened

AA03

V_IN I/F Intr detect failed










The cover is open.

Check chemistry

Chemicals empty

No I/F board driver device

I/F board driver duplicate open

I/F board driver no interruption

I/F board driver fails to detect inter-

ruption.


zine.


magazine.


magazine.



azine.


zine.


zine.


magazine.


magazine.

1. Close the cover of the magazine.


the imager.


Printlink.


the imager.


Printlink.

1. Power OFF the Printlink, then ON again.

2. If an error occurs again, exchange the I/F board.



1. Check if there are any problems in the follow-

ing points.

• Connection of the cables

• Is the modality ready ?

• Is proper installation made ?

2. Press the store switch.


ing points.







Error Code


AA04

V_IN I/F Reg access failed

AA05

V_IN I/F Interrupt PCI abort

AA06

V_IN I/F PCI abort happened

AA07

V_IN I/F Header in timeout

AA08

V_IN I/F Header out timeout

AA09

V_IN I/F Phy mem get failed

AA0A

V_IN I/F Phy mem free failed

AA0B

V_IN I/F Phy mem get dupli

AA0C

V_IN I/F Phy mem illegal free

AA0D

V_IN I/F Parameter error

AA0E

V_IN I/F Illegal parameter

AA0F

V_IN I/F Illegal DMA

I/F board driver board register

access error

I/F board driver PCI abort interrup-

tion

I/F board driver PCI abort error

I/F board driver header input time-

out

I/F board driver header output

timeout

I/F board driver fails to allocate

Physical memory.

I/F board driver fails to free

Physical memory.

I/F board driver board allocates

Physical memory in duplicate.

I/F board driver fails to allocate and

free Physical memory.

I/F board driver parameter error

I/F board driver demands an

improper operation parameter.


improper DMA transfer.

1. Press the ERROR RESET.










ing points.






ing points.














ing point.





ing point.





ing point.






Error Code


AA10

V_IN I/F DMA time out

AA11

V_IN I/F Image type illegal

AA12

V_IN I/F Last Flag illegal

AA13

V_IN I/F Trans size illegal

AA14

V_IN I/F Illegal header req

AA15

V_IN I/F Illegal image in

AA16

V_IN I/F Illegal image out

AA17

V_IN I/F Image in timeout

I/F board driver DMA timeout

I/F board driver fails to specify

one/multiple frames.

I/F board driver fails to specify the

last frame flag.

I/F board driver fails to transfer

size.


improper header input/output.


improper image input.


improper image output.


out.


ing points.












ing points.


• Is the header data correct ?



ing points.






ing points.






ing points.






ing points.







Error Code


AA18

V_IN I/F Image out timeout

AA19

V_IN I/F signal unrecognized

AA1A

V_IN I/F A/D time out

AA1F

V_IN I/F Failed

AA20

V_IN I/F read size illegal

AA21

V_IN I/F read addr illegal

AB00

D_V I/F Device nothing

AB01

D_V I/F Duplicate open

AB02

D_V I/F Intr not happened

AB03

D_V I/F Intr detect failed


timeout.

I/F board driver fails to recognize

video signals.

I/F board driver A/D end timeout.

I/F board driver other errors.


size.


address.

I/F board driver fails to find a

device.

I/F board driver opened more than

once.



ruption.


ing points.






ing points.

• Are video signals output correctly ?

• Are video signals adjusted correctly ?


ing points.








ing points.





ing points.









ing points.






ing points.







Error Code


AB04

D_V I/F Reg access failed

AB05

D_V I/F Interrupt PCI abort

AB06

D_V I/F PCI abort happened

AB07

D_V I/F Header in timeout

AB08

D_V I/F Header out timeout

AB09

D_V I/F Phy mem get failed

AB0A

D_V I/F Phy mem free failed

AB0B

D_V I/F Phy mem get dupli

AB0C

D_V I/F Phy mem illegal free

AB0D

D_V I/F Parameter error

AB0E

D_V I/F Illegal parameter

AB0F

D_V I/F Illegal DMA


access error


tion



out


timeout


Physical memory.


Physical memory.




















ing points.






ing points.














ing point.





ing point.





ing point.






Error Code


AB10

D_V I/F DMA timeout

AB11

D_V I/F Image type illegal

AB12

D_V I/F Last Flag illegal

AB13

D_V I/F Trans size illegal

AB14

D_V I/F Illegal header req

AB15

D_V I/F Illegal image in

AB16

D_V I/F Illegal image out

AB17

D_V I/F Image in timeout





last frame flag.


size.


improper image input/output.






out


ing points.












ing points.





ing points.






ing points.






ing points.






ing points.







Error Code


AB18

D_V I/F Image out timeout

AB19

D_V I/F signal unrecognized

AB1A

D_V I/F A/D timeout

AB1F

D_V I/F Failed

AB20

D_V I/F illegal video IMG IN

AB21

D_V I/F IMG GET timeout

AB22

D_V I/F read size illegal

AB23

D_V I/F read addr illegal

AC00

V_HG I/F Device nothing

AC01

V_HG I/F Duplicate open


timeout


video signals.



I/F board driver inputs video of

improper size.

I/F board driver image acquiring

end timeout.


size.


address.


device.

I/F board driver duplicate open.


ing points.






ing points.




ing points.








ing points.






ing points.






ing points.





ing points.










Error Code


AC02

V_HG I/F Intr not happened

AC03

V_HG I/F Intr detect failed

AC04

V_HG I/F Reg access failed

AC05

V_HG I/F Interrupt PCI abort

AC06

V_HG I/F PCI abort happened

AC07

V_HG I/F Header in timeout

AC08

V_HG I/F Header out timeout

AC09

V_HG I/F Phy mem get failed

AC0A

V_HG I/F Phy mem free failed

AC0B

V_HG I/F Phy mem get dupli

AC0C

V_HG I/F Phy mem illegal free

AC0D

V_HG I/F Parameter error



ruption.


access error


tion



out


timeout


Physical memory.


Physical memory.







ing points.






ing points.















ing points.






ing points.














ing point.






Error Code


AC0E

V_HG I/F Illegal parameter

AC0F

V_HG I/F illegal DMA

AC10

V_HG I/F DMA timeout

AC11

V_HG I/F Image type illegal

AC12

V_HG I/F Last Flag illegal

ACB3

V_HG I/F Trans size illegal

AC14

V_HG I/F Illegal header req

AC15

V_HG I/F Illegal image in

AC16

V_HG I/F Illegal image out









last frame flag.


size.








ing point.





ing point.





ing points.











ing points.





ing points.






ing points.






ing points.







Error Code


AC17

V_HG I/F Image in timeout

AC18

V_HG I/F Image out timeout

AC19

V_HG I/F signal unrecognized

AC1A

V_HG I/F A/D time out

AC1F

V_HG I/F Failed

AC20

V_HG I/F illegal video IMG IN

AC21

V_HG I/F read size illegal

AC22

V_HG I/F read addr illegal

AD00

D_IN I/F Device nothing

AD01

D_IN I/F Duplicate open

AD02

D_IN I/F Intr not happened


out

21-18


timeout


video signals.



I/F board driver inputs video of

improper size.


size.


address.


device.


once.



ing points.






ing points.






ing points.




ing points.








ing points.




ing points.





ing points.












Error Code


AD03

D_IN I/F Intr detect failed

AD04

D_IN I/F Reg access failed

AD05

D_IN I/F Interrupt PCI abort

AD06

D_IN I/F PCI abort happened

AD07

D_IN I/F Header in timeout

AD08

D_IN I/F Header out timeout

AD09

D_IN I/F Phy mem get failed

AD0A

D_IN I/F Phy mem free failed

AD0B

D_IN I/F Phy mem get dupli

AD0C

D_IN I/F Phy mem illegal free

AD0D

D_IN I/F Parameter error

AD0E

D_IN I/F Illegal parameter


ruption.


access error


tion



out


timeout


Physical memory.


Physical memory.









ing points.















ing points.






ing points.














ing point.





ing point.






Error Code


AD0F

D_IN I/F Illegal DMA

AD10

D_IN I/F DMA time out

AD11

D_IN I/F Image type illegal

AD12

D_IN I/F Last Fla illegal

AD13

D_IN I/F Trans size illegal

AD14

D_IN I/F Illegal header req

AD15

D_IN I/F Illegal image in

AD16

D_IN I/F Illegal image out







last frame flag.


size.








ing points.






ing points.












ing points.





ing points.






ing points.






ing points.







Error Code


AD17

D_IN I/F Image in timeout

AD18

D_IN I/F Image out timeout

AD19

D_IN I/F signal unrecognized

AD1A

D_IN I/F A/D timeout

AD1F

D_IN I/F Failed

AD21

D_IN I/F read size illegal

AD22

D_IN I/F read addr illegal

AE00

D_OUT I/F Device nothing

AE01

D_OUT I/F Duplicate open

AE02

D_OUT I/F Intr not happened


out


timeout.


video signals.




size.


address.


device.


once.



ing points.






ing points.






ing points.




ing points.








ing points.





ing points.









ing points.







Error Code


AE03

D_OUT I/F Intr detect failed

AE04

D_OUT I/F Reg access

AE05

D_OUT I/F Interrupt PCI abort

AE06

D_OUT I/F PCI abort happened

AE07

D_OUT I/F Header in timeout

AE08

D_OUT I/F Header out timeout

AE09

D_OUT I/F Phy mem get failed

AE0A

D_OUT I/F Phy mem free failed

AE0B

D_OUT I/F Phy mem get dupli

AE0C

D_OUT I/F Phy mem illegal free

AE0D

D_OUT I/F Parameter error

AE0E

D_OUT I/F Illegal parameter


ruption.


access error


tion



out


timeout


Physical memory.


Physical memory.


Physical memory more than once.







ing points.















ing points.






ing points.














ing point.





ing point.






Error Code


AE0F

D_OUT I/F Illegal DMA

AE10

D_OUT I/F DMA timeout

AE11

D_OUT I/F Image type illegal

AE12

D_OUT I/F Last Flag illegal

AE13

D_OUT I/F Trans size illegal

AE14

D_OUT I/F Illegal header req

AE15

D_OUT I/F Illegal image in

AE16

D_OUT I/F Illegal image out

AE17

D_OUT I/F Image in timeout







last frame flag.


size.








out


ing point.





ing points.












ing points.





ing points.






ing points.






ing points.






ing points.







Error Code


AE18

D_OUT I/F Image out timeout

AE19

D_OUT I/F signal unrecognized

AE1A

D_OUT I/F A/D timeout

AE1F

D_OUT I/F Failed

B001

Disk full

B002

Frame header full

B003

Page header full

B004

I/F Image size error

B010

Disk error

B011

Disk full (cannot recover)

B021

Cannot change supply mag

B106

Cannot change imager

B108

No Previous page

B109

No Previous page

B10A

Previous page used

B10B

Previous page printing


timeout.


video signals.



Fails to acquire a next page.

Frame control data is full.

Page control data is full.

Images of different size are stored

in one page.

Disk access error

(Fails to access the work file.)

Disk access error

(Fails to access the image file.)

The supply magazine is changed

while the output images remain.

The route of the destination imager

is not defined.

The previous page does not exist.

(Not wait for the previous page.)

The previous page is a blank page.

The previous page is demanded

while it is processed.

During outputting the previous

page.


ing points.






ing points.



ing points.















ing points.

• Does an imager start up ?

• Is the connection with the imager correct ?

• Are there enough space in the concerned channel ?


1. Return the imager to the original supply maga-

zine.


1. Is the installation correct ?





2. Wait for a while and execute Previous again.



Error Code


B200

IMAGER busy

B201

Film size

B202

Fomat illegal

B300

dictionary file not found

B301

Image data error

B302

Image data size error

B303

dictionary data error

B304

no memory

B305

Image data read error

B306

Time out

B307

OCR header read error

B308

OCR Not found modality

Imager busy

Film size error

Format problem

No dictionary file

The characters are not clipped.

Improper image size

Improper dictionary data

Fails to allocate memory needed

for character recognition.

Fails to read the original image.

Recognized timeout

Fails to read the header information

(Character recognition).

Fails to find the modality





When the concerned page is output without charac-

ter recognition every time;

1. Re-install the dictionary file, and power ON the

Printlink, and then OFF.



















1. Increase the value of "ID_LIMIT=" with the

terminal software. Or Set to "0 (infinite)", and

power ON the Printlink, and then OFF.















Error Code


B309

OCR entry dictionary

B310

OCR open parameter error

B311

OCR Not read dictionary file

B312

OCR character dic open error

B313

OCR Not open dictionary

B314

OCR character dic recog error

B315

OCR open image file error

B316

OCR Pixel Wide error

B317

OCR read image file error

B318

OCR load file error

B319

OCR Nothing dictionary

Fails to register the dictionary data


The dictionary is opened.

Improper parameter (Character

recognition).

Not read the dictionary yet


An error occurs in the character

recognition function (set_dic_data)


Not open any dictionaries yet


An error occurs in the character

recognition function (Recog)


Fails to open the specified image

file (Character recognition).

The specified pixel width is incor-

rect (Character recognition).

Fails to clip and read the characters

in the image file (Character recog-

nition).

An error occurs in the dictionary

file reading function (Character

recognition).

Fails to open the dictionary as the

dictionary data is not registered in

the specified coordinate of the size
















































Error Code


B320

OCR Dictionary data read error

D001

TTO-empty

D002

SF not present

D003

Jammed

D004

Fatal error

D005

Off-line

D006

Sheet resend

D007

Sheet reject

D008

IMAGER Error

D103

PDU Receive Error

D104

PDU Send Error

D106

ASSOCIATE Error

D109

Illegal command received

D10C

Dcm sop class

D10D

Dcm sop instance

D10E

dcm tag

E000

Environment variable

E001

Get Thread ID

E002

Get Process ID

E003

Mutex create

Fails to read the dictionary data.

Receives "TTO Empty" in the sta-

tus check.

Receives "SF not present" in the

status check.

Receives "Jammed" in the status

check.

Receives "Fatal Error" in the status

check.

Receives "Off-line" in the status

check. Or Fails to communicate

with the imager.

Receives "SHEET_RESEND" or

no response in 3 min. or more as

the replay of sheet data.

Receives "SHEET_REJECT" as the

replay of the sheet demand.

Fails to transfer the image due to

timeout, etc.

Fails to receive PDU data.

Fails to transmit PDU data.

Fails to establish the association.

Receives improper command.

Receives improper SOP class.

Fails to find SOP instance.

Improper tag data

Fails to set the environment vari-

ables.

Fails to obtain the thread ID.

Fails to obtain the process ID.

Fails to create mutex.





1. Exchange the finishing roll.


1. Check the sheet feeder.


1. Remove the jammed film.


1. Power OFF the Li-1417D, then ON again.

1. Make the Li-1417D online.





1. Check Ethernet, cables, and transceiver.






1. Check if there are any problems in the following points.

• IP address of connected devices

• Are the IP address, port number, AE title of the

Printlink set properly ?



















Error Code


E004

Mutex name illegal

E005

Mutex already create

E006

Mutex not create self

E007

Mutex using

E008

Mutex inst over timeout

E009

Mutex get

E00A

Mutex timeout

E00B

Mutex End Thread before release

E00C

Mutex no get

E00E

Mutex getting

E00F

Process illegal info

E010

Process illegal title

E011

Process illegal command line

E012

Process execute

E013

Process wait failed

E014

Process open

E015

Process terminate

E016

Thread illegal info.

E017

Thread Priority

E018

Thread resume

E019

Thread suspend

E01A

Thread terminate

E01B

Thread execute

Improper mutex name

Mutex has been already created.

Mutex is not created on this object.

Mutex is used on others.

Improper waiting time for mutex is

specified.

Fails to obtain mutex privilege.

Timeout of waiting for mutex

Mutex used thread ends before

releasing mutex.

Not obtain Mutex.

Mutex has been already obtained.

Improper process startup informa-

tion

Improper process title

Command line character string is

incorrect at the startup of process.

Fails to start up process.

Fails to wait for the end of process.

Fails to obtain process handle.

Fails to end process forcefully.

Improper thread information

Fails to set thread priority.

Fails to resume thread.

Fails to suspend thread.

Fails to terminate thread forcefully.

Fails to start up thread.






















2. Re-install the same version.



























Error Code


E01C

Thread illegal func pointer

E020

Sharedmemory not create

E021

Sharedmemory create

E022

Sharedmemory exist

E023

Sharedmemory no exist

E024

Sharedmemory read

E025

Sharedmemory write

E026

Sharedmemory open

E027

Sharedmemory already open

E028

Sharedmemory close

E029

Sharedmemory already close

E02A

Sharedmemory used

E02B

Sharedmemory not open

E02C

Sharedmemory file size

E02D

Sharedmemory file map

E02E

Sharedmemory no detatch

E02F

Sharedmemory creat file

E030

Sharedmemory file read

E031

Sharedmemory file write

E032

Sharedmemory file name

E033

Sharedmemory file R/W size

E034

Sharedmemory mutex

E035

Sharedmemory create default

Improper thread function pointer

Shared memory is not created.

Fails to create shared memory.

Name of shared memory to be set

exists.

Name of shared memory to be

deleted does not exist.

Fails to read shared memory.

Fails to write on shared memory.

Fails to open shared memory.

Shared memory is already open.

Fails to close shared memory.

Shared memory is already closed.

Shared memory is being used.

Shared memory is not open.

Fails to obtain file size.

Fails to map in memory.

Shared memory is not released.

Fails to open the file to be expand-

ed in the shared memory.

Fails to read from the file.

Fails to write on the file.

Transmitted file name is incorrect.

The size is not matched in reading

and writing from/on the file.

Fails to create the privilege.

Create the shared memory at the

default value.

















































Error Code


E036

Sharedmemory no used file

E037

Errorlog control struct name

E038

Errorlog control define file

E039

Errorlog control create file

E03A

Errorlog control file write

E03B

Errorlog control file size

E03C

Control struct name

E03D

T-Ethernet struct name

E03E

Route control struct name

E03F

DICOM struct name

E040

Modality I/F struct name

E041

Log control struct name

E042

HSTP struct name

E043

PAGE control struct name

E044

Channel control struct name

E045

Process control struct name

E046

Customformatmemory struct name

E047

Frame control struct name

E048

Frame control info. struct name

E049

Errorcode memory struct name

E04A

Format memory struct name

Shared memory is created and the

file is not used.

Improper structure name

Improper file name

Fails to open the file.


The number of bytes is not

matched in reading and writing

from/on the file.

Improper structure name Printlink

control data

Improper structure name Toshiba

Ether setting data

Improper structure name Route

data

Improper structure name DICOM

setting data

Improper structure name Modality

IF setting data

Improper structure name Log con-

trol data

Improper structure name HSTP

setting data

Improper structure name Page con-

trol data

Improper structure name Channel

control data

Improper structure name Process

control data

Improper structure name Format

setting data

Improper structure name Frame

control data

Improper character string name

(Frame control data used informa-

tion)


(Error code converting data saved

file)


(Format data)













































Error Code


E050

Serial open

E051

Serial setup comm

E052

Serial get commstate

E053

Serial set commstate

E054

Serial get timeout

E055

Serial set timeout

E056

Serial no open

E057

Serial already open

E058

Serial send

E059

Serial send size

E05a

Serial receive

E05B

Serial receive size

E05C

Serial receive NG comm.

E05D

Serial receive timeout

E05E

Serial send timeout

E05F

Serial parameter

E060

File close

E061

File already close

E062

File open

E063

File already open

E064

File used

E065

File read

E066

File write

Fails to open the serial port.

Fails to set the serial port.

Fails to obtain the operation infor-

mation of the serial port.

Fails to set the operation informa-

tion of the serial port.

Fails to obtain the timeout value of

the serial port.

Fails to set the timeout value of the

serial port.

The serial port is not open.

The serial port is already open.

Fails to make serial port transmis-

sion.

Improper serial port transmission

size

Fails to make serial port reception.

Improper serial port reception size

Serial port I/O error

Serial port reception timeout

Serial port transmission timeout

Fails to specify parameter function

at serial port.

Fails to close the file.

The file is already closed,


The file is already open.

The file is being used on others.

Fails to read the file.


















































Error Code


E067

File delete

E068

File directory

E069

Not File name

E06A

Not Mutex name

E06B

Not Buffer

E06C

Buffer size

E06D

Offset

E06E

Data No.

E06F

Sharedfile destroy

E070

Character

E071

Get file size

E072

File size

E073

Version file open

E074

Version file read

E075

Version file copy

E076

Version file write

E077

Version file version NULL

E078

Version file serial NULL

E07A

Image file open

E07B

Image file read

E07C

Image file write

E07D

Image file create

E07E

Version file syscode NULL

Fails to delete the file.

Fails to obtain the directory.

File name does not exist.

Mutex name does not exist.

Buffer does not exist.

Buffer size is negative.

Offset is negative.

Impossible file number

You have tried to delete Mutex that

was not created.

Characters "\\" are not found.

Fails to obtain file size.

The specified offset value exceeds

the file size.



Fails to store the character strings.


No VERSION is in the version

information file.

No SERIAL is in the version infor-

mation file.

The image file is not open.

Fails to read the image file.

Fails to write on the image file.

Fails to prepare for creating the

image file.

No system code is in the version

information file.

















































Error Code


E080

Send Thread message

E081

Receive Thread message

E082

Thread message send

E083

Thread message get

E084

Thread message wait

E085

Thread message not Equal

E086

Thread message receive timeout

E090

Socket startup

E091

Socket version

E092

Socket server

E093

Socket Client address

E094

Socket Listen

E095

Socket Client

E096

Socket server IP

E097

Socket connect

E098

Socket send

E099

Socket close

E09A

Socket receive

E09B

Socket accept

E09C

Socket timeout

E09D

Socket force close

E09E

Socket no change

E09F

Socket select exception

Thread message transmission error

Thread message reception error

Fails to transmit thread message.

Fails to receive thread message.

Waiting for thread message recep-

tion.

Thread message and ID are not

matched.

Thread message reception timeout

Fails to initialize socket.

Socket versions are not matched.

Fails to create the socket at the

server.

Fails to allocate the address to the

socket at the client.

Fails to announce the reception of

connection request.

Fails to create the socket at the

client.

Fails to obtain the IP address of the

server.

Fails to connect the socket of the

server.

Fails to transmit the message.

The socket is already closed.

Fails to receive the message.

Fails to accept the connection.

Socket timeout

The socket waiting for the connec-

tion is forcefully closed.

No change of socket status

Waiting the change of status except

socket transmission and reception.

















































Error Code


E0A0

Socket select send

E0A1

Socket select receive

E0A2

TCPIP unsupported OS

E0A3

TCPIP netcard reg.open

E0A4

TCPIP netcard reg. Query

E0A5

TCPIP illegal netcard reg.name

E0A6

TCPIP reg.open

E0A7

TCPIP reg.query

E0A8

TCPIP reg.set

E0A9

TCPIP bad IP address

E0AA

Remote file IP address

E0AB

Remote file filename

E0AC

Remote file open

E0AD

Remote file read

E0AE

Remote file write

E0AF

Remote file close

E0B0

Remote file receive

E0B1

Remote file network

E0B2

ALL data read

E0B3

ALL data write

E0B4

Versionup directory

E0B5

Versionup copyfile

E0B6

Versionup copy

Fails to wait for socket transmis-

sion.

Fails to wait for socket reception.

Called with unsupported OS.

Fails to open the network board

registry.

Fails to obtain the network board

registry contents.

Network board name to be set in

registry is incorrect.

Fails to open TCP-IP registry.

Fails to obtain TCP-IP registry.

Fails to set the TCP-IP registry set-

tings.

The specified IP address is incor-

rect.

Improper IP address

Improper file name




Fails to close the file.

The data that is required to obtain

cannot be used.

Fails to allocate the network drive.

There are insufficient files needed

for reading all the setting files.


for writing all the setting files.

Improper directory for reading the

file


for upgrading the software.

Fails to copy the file.

















































Error Code


E0B7

Search filelist

E0B8

Search filename

E0B9

Next pointer

E0BA

Versiondown directory

E0BB

Versiondown copyfile

E0BC

Versiondown copy

E0BD

Versiondown No Version

E0BE

Versiondown delete file

E0D0

Win.logon get privileges

E0D1

Win.logon get privileges value

E0D2

Win.logon set privileges

E0D3

Win.logon exit

E0D4

Win.logon no instruct power off

E0D5

Win.logon map device. drv.mem

E0D6

Win.logon open device driver

E0D7

Win.logon multi instance

E0D8

Win.logon set local time

E0D9

System date

E0DA

System time

E0DC

Times get privileges

E0DD

Times get privileges value

E0DE

Times set privileges

E0DF

Times not numeric

There is no FILELIST description

in the itrsetup.itr file.

Fails to find the file name

(Reaching to the end of the file).

Fails to search for the file.

Improper directory for the file to be

read


for downgrading the software.

Fails to copy the file.

Improper version of the module

Fails to delete the working file.

Fails to obtain the process privilege

token.

Fails to obtain the identifier of the

process privilege.

Fails to set the process privilege.

Fails to end Windows.

Fails to find power OFF.

Fails to map the UPS device driver

memory.

Fails to open the UPS device driver.

The instance of the UPS driver

operation logic is being executed.

Fails to set the system local time.

Improper system date

Improper system time

Fails to obtain the process privilege

token.

Fails to obtain the identifier of the

process privilege.

Fails to set the process privilege.

Includes characters other than num-

bers in the character string for time.

















































Error Code


E100

Install service file name

E101

Install service cntrl. Manager

E102

Install service handle

E103

Remove service cntrl. manager

E104

Remove service handle

E105

Remove service control

E106

Remove service delete

E107

Stop service control

E200

Output queue append

E201

Output queue delete

E202

Output queue get

E203

Study queue append

E204

Study queue delete

E205

Study queue get

E300

Command timeout

E301

Image timeout

E302

Illegal user name

E303

Not login

Fails to obtain a file name in

installing the service software.

Fails to connect with the service

control manager in installing the

service software.

Fails to create the service object in

installing the service software.

Fails to connect with the service

control manager in uninstalling the

service software.

Fails to obtain the service handle in

uninstalling the service software.

Fails to stop the service in unin-

stalling the service software.

Fails to delete the service in unin-

stalling the service software.

Fails to stop the specified service.

Fails to add output queue.

Fails to delete output queue.

Fails to obtain output queue.

Fails to add study queue.

Fails to delete study queue.

Fails to obtain study queue.

Timeout between commands (The

data of Toshiba Ether is not trans-

mitted.)

Timeout between frames (The data

of Toshiba Ether is not transmit-

ted.)

Improper user name is specified

with USER command (It is likely

that the modality does not work

properly after the connection).

Not login (It is likely that the

modality does not work properly

after the connection).































3. Check the modality.












Error Code


E304

Telegram illegal format

E305

Illegal data mode

E306

Command sequence

E307

Access position full

E308

Illegal channel number

E309

NEMA code receive error

E30A

NEMA code error data

E30B

NEMA code error data size

E30C

Illegal data

E400

Illegal command

E401

Previous page used

E403

Nonexistent Route

E404

Nonexistent Custom format

E405

Test pattern File

E500

DICOM COM Illegal Status

E501

DICOM COM Status check miss-

ing

E600

Receive illegal errcode

Improper format of received socket

message (It is likely that the modal-

ity does not work properly after the

connection).

The data reception mode is set out-

side of the range (It is likely that

the modality does not work proper-

ly after the connection).

Improper order of commands (It is

likely that the modality does not

work properly after the connec-

tion).

The number of modalities exceeds

the maximum.

The channel number is set outside

of the range.

NEMA code reception error

(receiving improper data from the

modality).

NEMA code error data (receiving

improper data from the modality).

NEMA code error data size (receiv-

ing improper data from the modali-

ty).

The data is set outside of the range

(receiving improper data from the

modality).

Improper command (receiving

improper data from the modality).

The previous page is demanded

while the previous page is

processed.

Route does not exist.

No custom format

Fails to create the test pattern file.

Receives an undefined value in the

status of the DICOM command.

Receives an undefined value in the

status of the DICOM command.

Receives an undefined error code

from the imager.



































2. Power OFF the imager, then ON again.



Error Code


E601

Receive ahync illegal errcode

EE00

Illegal parameter

EE01

Channel not used

EE02

Protocol not used

EE03

Illegal Channel number

EE04

Illegal Route number

EE05

Illegal Page number

EE06

Illegal Frame number

EE07

Illegal Message code

EE08

Illegal Message data

EE09

Memory alloc

EE0A

Illegal Image size

EE0B

Not stored

EE0C

Image size

EE0D

Get file data not found

EF00

Server Error

EFFF

Other error

F000

IMAGER not ready

0000

NOT_ERROR

Receives an asynchronous error

from the imager.

Startup parameter error

The specified channel is not used.

The specified protocol is not used.

The channel number is set outside

of the range.

The route number is set outside of

the range.

The page number is set outside of

the range.

The frame number is set outside of

the range.

Receives the telegram of the

improper message code.

Improper data is in the telegram.

Fails to allocate memory.

The size of the frame control data

and the actual image size do not

match.

There is no frame stored in the

page.

H and V size of image is set out-

side of range.

Fails to obtain the data from the

data file.

Printlink internal error (for

DICOM)

Other Printlink errors

Preparing for the image

No error


2. Power OFF the imager, then ON again.


































ing points.

• The connection with the imager keypad.

• Is the imager powered ON ?


Blank page

Blank page

22. Troubleshooting


22.1 Troubleshooting on Startup and Connection22.1.1 The Printlink does not get powered ON.

• Is the breaker switch for the power on the back of the Printlink turned ON ?

-> Turn the breaker switch for the power ON, if it is not.

22.1.2 The Printlink shuts down.• Is the power cable connected ?

-> Insert the power cable, if it is not.

22.1.3 The Printlink does not start up.• The Printlink does not start up, and "Konica" remains on the controller.

The display on the controller does not change until the communication between the controller and the Printlink is established.

-> Check the harness.

-> Check the controller.

-> Check the operation of the I/F.

-> Check the installation.

The settings of the I/F channel and the install software.

-> Check the H/D.

Is access made at startup ?

-> Check the main board.

22.2 Troubleshooting on Operations22.2.1 The film is not printed out.

• PRINT STOP may be set.

-> Change the setting on the "FUNCTION" screen of the controller if it is set.

• Is the test pattern printed out by the imager itself ?

-> If it is not, a problem occurs in the imager.

• "IMAGER not ready" is displayed on the controller of the Printlink.

The imager does not start up.

A problem occurs with the communication between the imager and the Printlink.

22.2.2 An error occurs in specifying the format from the Printlink to the imager• The format that cannot be selected in the connected imager is set to selectable in the Printlink.

-> Check the format that the imager supports (including image size).

-> Check the format data of the installation of the Printlink.

22.2.3 An error occurs in storing the image from the Printlink to the imager• Check the connection of D37 cable.

• Is the variable mode set in the imager, or does the imager support ROM ?

(Size of the frame memory ?)

• Check the set contents of the header in the imager.

22. Troubleshooting


22.3 Troubleshooting on Image Quality22.3.1 Image quality problem (Analyzing the causes)

• Are problems occur on the films of all the modalities, or on the films of some modalities ?

-> If the problems occur on the films of all the modalities, any device other than the Printlink I/F has an abnormality.

(Main board, H/D, Output I/F, Imager)

-> If the problems occur on the films of some modalities, the Printlink I/F has an abnormality (re-adjustment, re-setting).

• Check the test pattern of the imager.

-> If it is normal, the I/F of the imager or the Printlink has an abnormality.

• Check the test pattern of the Printlink.

-> If it is normal, the transfer from the I/F to the H/D has an abnormality.

-> If it is abnormal, the output I/F or the imager has an abnormality.

22.3.2 Abnormal print conditions• Check that the information specified on the Printlink controller and the settings of the imager controller that are output into

the imager are matched.

(While stopping operating other modalities and operating only the concerned modality, check the controller settings in the

imager when the image is read into the imager.)

22.4 Using Backup ImagerIt is necessary to set that the LUT, image size, the number of format frames, and film size can be shared when multiple imager are

defined as output devices.

• LUT: Set that the same density is set in the same LUT number between the different imagers.

• Format: The format that cannot be selected due to the image size or the frame memory size of the imager should be set to Not

selectable in the Printlink.

(The format that cannot be selected in one imager should be set to Not selectable in the other imagers.)

• Film size: Set the film size of the used imager in the backup imager.

Note: An error will occur and cannot be reset if you try to output images in the settings that the output imagers do not support.

Even if you power off the Printlink, this error cannot be reset.

In order to reset the error, execute COLD START (Printlink reset) in the Printlink install software.

22.5 Others• The settings will be reset if the power is turned OFF, and then ON again.

The battery for the memory backup of the controller has a problem.

-> Check that JP2 is set to ON.

-> Check the voltage of the battery.

If it is 3.4 to 3.6V, it is normal, but if it is below that, the battery is exhausted. Exchange the board.

22. Troubleshooting


How to collect Log• Errors (on anything other than images)

Collect Log with the maintenance software.

If an error occurs on one device, collect Log of that device. If the error may be associated with other devices according to the

records of the transmission/reception of data, collect Log of the other devices. Collect the files that are created approx. one

hour before/after the occurrence of the error.

• Errors on images (e.g. Previous is not output, loss of frame, the presence of noise, etc.)

Turn the power off/on and copy the following three folders.

Folder Name: ENV, DATA , LOG

Note: Be sure to use the copied folders above; otherwise if you use "cut", the Printlink is frozen.

Fig. 22.1 Collecting Error Log on Images

Note: Change to the detail Log setting after collecting Log. This will facilitate the analysis of the error next time the error occurs.

Blank page

Appendix

Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual Ver.1.0 2000.12 App-1

Internal Control CablesPart No. : 012385040A

Cable length : 1.05 m (For the power: 0.3m)

Attach the shield section on the cover of the connector.

Board side Controller side(Molex 5102-15) (DDK 17JE-13250-02(D1) D-sub 25-pin female)

Shield section 1 (FG)

(RXD) 1 3 (RXD)

(TXD) 2 2 (TXD)

(DSR) 3 6 (DSR)

(DTR) 4 20 (DTR)

(SG) 5 7 (SG)

(NC) 6 (NC)

(RXD+) 7 16 (RXD+)

(RXD-) 8 17 (RXD-)

(TXD+) 9 14 (TXD+)

(TXD-) 10 15 (TXD-)

(DSR+) 11 23 (DSR+)

(DSR-) 12 24 (DSR-)

(DTR+) 13 21 (DTR+)

(DTR-) 14 22 (DTR-)

(SG) 15 17 (SG)

(Molex 5102-04)

(+12V) 1 10 (+12V)

(+12V) 4 11 (+12V)

(+12G) 3 18 (+12G)

(+12G) 2 19 (+12G)

4

5

Appendix

Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service Manual Ver.1.0 2000.12App-2

Printlink 12-bit Internal CablesPart No. : 030985000A01

Cable length : 1.2 m

Board side Modality side(3M 7940-6500SC) (JAE DD-50S-N D-sub 50-pin female)

(F.G.) 1 1 (F.G.)

(RETRANS+) 5 4 (RETRANS+)

(RETRANS-) 6 5 (RETRANS-)

(REQUEST+) 7 6 (REQUEST+)

(REQUEST-) 8 7 (REQUEST-)

(MODE+) 9 8 (MODE+)

(MODE-) 10 9 (MODE-)

(STROBE+) 11 10 (STROBE+)

(STROBE-) 12 11 (STROBE-)

(DATA7+) 15 24 (DATA7+)

(DATA7-) 16 41 (DATA7-)

(DATA6+) 17 25 (DATA6+)

(DATA6-) 18 42 (DATA6-)

(DATA5+) 19 26 (DATA5+)

(DATA5-) 20 43 (DATA5-)

(DATA4+) 21 27 (DATA4+)

(DATA4-) 22 44 (DATA4-)

(DATA3+) 23 28 (DATA3+)

(DATA3-) 24 45 (DATA3-)

(DATA2+) 25 29 (DATA2+)

(DATA2-) 26 46 (DATA2-)

(DATA1+) 27 30 (DATA1+)

(DATA1-) 28 47 (DATA1-)

(DATA0+) 29 31 (DATA0+)

(DATA0-) 30 48 (DATA0-)

(DATA11+) 31 20 (DATA11+)

(DATA11-) 32 37 (DATA11-)

(DATA10+) 33 21 (DATA10+)

(DATA10-) 34 38 (DATA10-)

(DATA9+) 35 22 (DATA9+)

(DATA9-) 36 39 (DATA9-)

(DATA8+) 37 23 (DATA8+)

(DATA8-) 38 40 (DATA8-)

Appendix


MIU 12-Bit Cables 15, 30, 50, 100MPart No. : 027385000A 027485000A 027585000A 027685000A

Cable length : 15, 30, 50, 100 m

Imager side Modality side(JAE DD-50PF-N D-sub 50-pin male) (JAE DD-50PF-N D-sub 50-pin male)



(REQ+) 6 6 (REQ+)

(REQ-) 7 7 (REQ-)

(MODE+) 8 8 (MODE+)

(MODE-) 9 9 (MODE-)

(STRB+) 10 10 (STRB+)

(STRB-) 11 11 (STRB-)

(D11+) 20 20 (D11+)

(D11-) 37 37 (D11-)

(D10+) 21 21 (D10+)

(D10-) 38 38 (D10-)

(D09+) 22 22 (D09+)

(D09-) 39 39 (D09-)

(D08+) 23 23 (D08+)

(D08-) 40 40 (D08-)

(D07+) 24 24 (D07+)

(D07-) 41 41 (D07-)

(D06+) 25 25 (D06+)

(D06-) 42 42 (D06-)

(D05+) 26 26 (D05+)

(D05-) 43 43 (D05-)

(D04+) 27 27 (D04+)

(D04-) 44 44 (D04-)

(D03+) 28 28 (D03+)

(D03-) 45 45 (D03-)

(D02+) 29 29 (D02+)

(D02-) 46 46 (D02-)

(D01+) 30 30 (D01+)

(D01-) 47 47 (D01-)

(D00+) 31 31 (D00+)

(D00-) 48 48 (D00-)

Appendix


Internal Control Cable D371NPart No. : 029785000A


Board side Modality side(3M 7940-6500SC) (DDK 17JE-13370-02 (D1) D-sub 37-pin female)

(F.G.) 1 1 (F.G.)



(REQ+) 7 4 (REQ+)

(REQ-) 8 23 (REQ-)

(MODE+) 9 5 (MODE+)

(MODE-) 10 24 (MODE-)

(STRB+) 11 6 (STRB+)

(STRB-) 12 25 (STRB-)

(D07+) 15 8 (D07+)

(D07-) 16 27 (D07-)

(D06+) 17 9 (D06+)

(D06-) 18 28 (D06-)

(D05+) 19 10 (D05+)

(D05-) 20 29 (D05-)

(D04+) 21 11 (D04+)

(D04-) 22 30 (D04-)

(D03+) 23 12 (D03+)

(D03-) 24 31 (D03-)

(D02+) 25 13 (D02+)

(D02-) 26 32 (D02-)

(D01+) 27 14 (D01+)

(D01-) 28 33 (D01-)

(D00+) 29 15 (D00+)

(D00-) 30 34 (D00-)

Appendix


Imager Host Internal CablesPart No. : 012185000A



Board side Controller side(Molex 5102-15) (DDK 17JE-13250-02(D1) D-sub 25-pin female)

(FG) Shield section 1 (FG)

(RXD) 1 3 (RXD)

(TXD) 2 2 (TXD)

(DSR) 3 6 (DSR)

(DTR) 4 20 (DTR)

(SG) 5 7 (SG)

(NC) 6 (NC)

(RXD+) 7 22 (RXD+)

(RXD-) 8 9 (RXD-)

(TXD+) 9 8 (TXD+)

(TXD-) 10 21 (TXD-)

(DSR+) 11 25 (DSR+)

(DSR-) 12 13 (DSR-)

(DTR+) 13 12 (DTR+)

(DTR-) 14 24 (DTR-)

(SG) 15 17 (SG)

Appendix


Internal Cable D37OUTPart No. : 030785000A


Board side Modality side(3M 7940-6500SC) (DDK 17JE-23370-02 (D1) D-sub 37-pin female)

(F.G.) 1 1 (F.G.)



(REQ+) 7 4 (REQ+)

(REQ-) 8 23 (REQ-)

(MODE+) 9 5 (MODE+)

(MODE-) 10 24 (MODE-)


(STRB-) 12 25 (STRB-)

(D07+) 15 8 (D07+)

(D07-) 16 27 (D07-)

(D06+) 17 9 (D06+)

(D06-) 18 28 (D06-)

(D05+) 19 10 (D05+)

(D05-) 20 29 (D05-)

(D04+) 21 11 (D04+)

(D04-) 22 30 (D04-)

(D03+) 23 12 (D03+)

(D03-) 24 31 (D03-)

(D02+) 25 13 (D02+)

(D02-) 26 32 (D02-)

(D01+) 27 14 (D01+)

(D01-) 28 33 (D01-)

(D00+) 29 15 (D00+)

(D00-) 30 34 (D00-)

Appendix


Internal Cable D37OUTPart No. : 016285000A


Board side Modality side(3M 7940-6500SC) (DDK 17JE-23370-02 (D1) D-sub 37-pin male)

(F.G.) 1 1 (F.G.)



(REQ+) 7 4 (REQ+)

(REQ-) 8 23 (REQ-)

(MODE+) 9 5 (MODE+)

(MODE-) 10 24 (MODE-)


(STRB-) 12 25 (STRB-)

(D07+) 15 8 (D07+)

(D07-) 16 27 (D07-)

(D06+) 17 9 (D06+)

(D06-) 18 28 (D06-)

(D05+) 19 10 (D05+)

(D05-) 20 29 (D05-)

(D04+) 21 11 (D04+)

(D04-) 22 30 (D04-)

(D03+) 23 12 (D03+)

(D03-) 24 31 (D03-)

(D02+) 25 13 (D02+)

(D02-) 26 32 (D02-)

(D01+) 27 14 (D01+)

(D01-) 28 33 (D01-)

(D00+) 29 15 (D00+)

(D00-) 30 34 (D00-)

Appendix


Host Internal Cable 422Part No. : 016885000A

Cable length : 2 m


Controller board side Modality main unit side(Molex 5102-09) (DDK 17JE-13250-02(D8A) D-sub 25-pin female)


(TXD+) 1 16 (TXD+)

(TXD-) 2 17 (TXD-)

(RXD+) 3 14 (RXD+)

(RXD-) 4 15 (RXD-)

(DTR+) 5 23 (DTR+)

(DTR-) 6 24 (DTR-)

(DSR+) 7 21 (DSR+)

(DSR-) 8 22 (DSR-)

(SG) 9 7 (SG)

Appendix


Host Internal Cable 232CPart No. : 018385000A

Cable length : 2 m


Controller board side Modality main unit side(Elco 60-8263-3108-15000) (DDK 17JE-13250-02(D4A) D-sub 25-pin female)


(TXD) 1 2 (RXD)

(RXD) 2 3 (TXD)

(SG) 3 7 (SG)

(DTR) 4 6 (DSR)

(DSR) 5 20 (DTR)

6

(EXl1) 7 14 (EXT1)Not use

(EXl2) 8 15 (EXT2)Store switch

(EXl3) 9 16 (EXT3)Print switch

(SG) 10 17 (GND)

4

5

Appendix

Print Management System Printlink Installation and Service USA Ver. 1.1 2001.3App-10

Controller (keypad) Cable 232C (Extension)Cable length : 5 m (Model No. AS3207-CNT-CA05)

: 10 m (Model No. AS3207-CNT-CA10)

: 15 m (Model No. AS3207-CNT-CA15)


Controller board side PRINTLINK unit side(DDK 17JE-13250-02(D4A) D-sub 25-pin female) (DDK 17JE-23250-02(D8A) D-sub 25-pin male)

(FG) 1 Shield section 1 (FG)

(RXD) 3 3 (RXD)

(TXD) 2 2 (TXD)

(RS) 4 4 (RS)

(CS) 5 5 (CS)

(SG) 7 7 (SG)

(+12V) 10 10 (+12V)

(+12V) 11 11 (+12V)

(+12G) 18 18 (+12G)

(+12G) 19 19 (+12G)

Appendix


Host Cable 422A (for GE)Part No. : 016985000A

Cable length : 15 m


Diagnostic device side Host controller side(DDK 17JE-23370-02(D8A) D-sub 37-pin male) (DDK 17JE-23250-02(D8A) D-sub 25-pin male)


(RXD+) 20 16 (RXD+)

(RXD-) 2 17 (RXD-)

(TXD+) 21 14 (TXD+)

(TXD-) 3 15 (TXD-)

Remark:A 25-37 pin converting cable is supplied with DASMVDB when Konica laser imager is connected. If this cable is

not supplied, connect the cables assigned to the pins shown below between the DASMVDB and the controller

422 internal cable directly to make it possible to communicate.

Diagnostic device side Host controller side(RXD+) 8 16 (RXD+)

(TXD+) 9 14 (TXD+)

(RXD-) 21 17 (RXD-)

(TXD-) 22 15 (TXD-)

Appendix


Toshiba Host Cable Part No. : AS3207-HSTCRS1-CA**

Cable length : **=02 2 m

**=15 15 m


Diagnostic device side Host controller side(DDK 17JE-23250-02 D-sub 25-pin male) (DDK 17JE-23250-02 D-sub 25-pin male)


(TXD) 2 2 (RXD)

(RXD) 3 3 (TXD)

(SG) 7 7 (SG)

(DSR) 5 6 (DTR)

(DTR) 20 20 (DSR)

Appendix


3M Host Cable Part No. : AS3207-HSTCRS2-CA**


**=15 15 m




(TXD) 2 2 (TXD)

(RXD) 3 3 (RXD)

(RS) 4 4 (RS)

(CS) 5 5 (CS)

(SG) 7 7 (SG)

(DSR) 8 6 (DSR)

(DTR) 20 20 (DTR)

Appendix


Hitachi Host Cable Part No. : AS3207-HSTCRS3-CA**


**=15 15 m




(TXD) 2 2 (TXD)

(RXD) 3 3 (RXD)

(RS) 4 4 (RS)

(CS) 5 5 (CS)

(SG) 7 7 (SG)

(DSR) 8 6 (DSR)

(DTR) 20 20 (DTR)

Appendix


9/25 Pin Converting CablePart No. : AS3207-HSTCRS5-CA**



Diagnostic device side Host controller side(DDK 17JE-13090-02 D-sub 9-pin female) (DDK 17JE-23250-02 D-sub 25-pin male)

(TXD) 2 2 (TXD)

(RXD) 3 3 (RXD)

(RS) 4 4 (RS)

(CS) 5 5 (CS)

(SG) 7 7 (SG)

6 (DSR)

20 (DSR)

Appendix


Imager CablePart No. : 043185000A01M01

Cable length : 2 m


Printlink main unit side Imager side(DDK 17JE 13090-02 (D8A)) (DDK 17JE23250-02 (D8A))

Shield section

(TXD) 2 2 (TXD)

(RXD) 3 3 (RXD)

(SG) 5 7 (SG)

(DTR1) 4 4 (RTS)

(DSR1) 6 5 (CTS)

(RTS1) 7 6 (DSR)

(CTS1) 8 20 (DTR)

Appendix


For STORAGE, as shown in Table above, the patient name and ID may be added as an identifier as only the image data is transmit-

ted. Or other patient information that are obtained from HIS/RIS may be added.

DICOM PRINT and STORAGEDICOM STORAGE is a protocol for sending image data to the image server and the image viewer. DICOM PRINT is a protocol for

instructing the print of the image to the imager.

Table Appendix.1 Operations of DICOM STORAGE

TNIRP EGAROTS

).cte,mirt,tamrof(atadtnirP .mlifhcaerofsdneSdnamliffotpecnocoN.atadoN

.egap

atadtneitaP yllacisab,enoN .egamihcaerofsddA

noissimsnartfodohteMeht,atadmlifehtgnidnesretfAehttadettimsnartsiatadegami

.dedeensemitforebmun.egamihcaerofsdnesylnO

)gniyfitnedi(lortnocegamIehttamlifhcaerofsegamislortnoCreifitnedilaicepsoN.edisnoitpecer

.segamirof.egamihcaerofDIUeuqinunasddA

eltitEA,trop,noitaicossA .emaS

tnemnorivne,elbackrowteN .emitemasehttagnisurofmelborpoN.derahsebnaC.emaS

Appendix


Defined term

CR

MR

US

BI

DD

ES

MA

PT

ST

XA

RTIMAGE

RTSTRUCT

RTRECORD

DX

IO

GM

XC

Description

Computed Radiography

Magnetic Resonance

Ultrasound

Biomagnetic Imaging

Duplex Doppler

Endoscopy

Magnetic resonance Angiography

Positron emission Tomography (PET)

Single-photon emission computed

Tomography (SPECT)

X-Ray Angiography

Radiotherapy Image

Radiotherapy Structure Set

Radiotherapy Treatment Record

Digital Radiography

Intra-oral Radiography

General Microscopy

External-Camera Photography

Defined term

CT

NM

OT

CD

DG

LS

MS

RG

TG

RF

RTDOSE

RTPLAN

HC

MG

PX

SM

Description

Computed Tomography

Nuclear Medicine

Other

Color flow Doppler

Diaphanography

Laser surface Scan

Magnetic resonance Spectroscopy

Radiographic imaging

(conventional film/screen)

Thermography

Radio Fluoroscopy

Radiotherapy Dose

Radiotherapy Plan

Hard Copy

Mammography

Panoramic X-Ray

Slide Microscopy

Defined term

DS

DF

AS

EC

FA

DM

Description

Digital Substruction Angiography

(retired)

Digital Fluoroscopy (retired)

Angioscopy

Echocardiography

Fluorescein Angiography

Digital Microscopy

Defined term

CF

VF

CS

LP

CP

FS

Description

Cinefluorography (retired)

Videofluorography (retired)

Cystoscopy

Laparoscopy

Culposcopy

Fundoscopy

Note: • The XA modality merges with the retired modality DS.

• The RF modality merges with the retired modalities CF, DF and VF.

• The modalities listed in the modality data may not be matched to the IOD names. For example, the SOP instance

from XA IOD may be described as RF modality when the RF-equipped modality produces the XA object.

Specifying Diagnostic Device Type• Defined terms that can be used in the modality

• Defined terms that cannot be used in the modality

Blank page

KONICA MEDICAL IMAGING INC.411 Newark Pompton Turnpike, Wayne, NJ 07470, U.S.A.TEL.973-633-1500

KONICA FRANCE S.A.Paris Nord II, 305 rue de la Belle Etoile, B.P. 50077, 95948ROISSY C.D.G. CEDEX, FRANCETEL.1-4938-6550

KONICA CANADA INC.1329 Meyerside Drive, Mississauga, OntarioL5T 1C9, CANADATEL.905-670-7722

KONICA U.K. LTD.Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham, MiddlesexTW13 7HD, U.K.TEL.1-81-751-6121

KONICA EUROPE GMBHFriedrich-Bergius-Str. Gewerbegebiet,85662 Hohenbrunn, GERMANYTEL.8102-8040

0296-55010B

Documents

P_Link I - Install&Service_manual